Blog

  • What is Tipsy? and How to Get Rid of Tipsy

    What is Tipsy? and How to Get Rid of Tipsy

    Tipsy Is –  The habit of consuming alcoholic beverages is a health problem in Indonesia. In fact, the 2018 Basic Health Research (Riskesdas) published by the Ministry of Health stated that 3.3% of Indonesia’s population aged >10 years consumed alcohol.

    Meanwhile, the proportion of excessive alcohol consumption occurs in the age range > 10 years, namely 0.8% of the entire population in Indonesia. In fact, when someone consumes alcoholic beverages, it will enter the bloodstream which can then have an impact on brain and body functions.

    During the drunken phase of alcohol, there is a phase known as tipsy. On this occasion, we will discuss more about tipsy. To find out more about tipsy and how to get rid of them, then you can read this article to the end. However, before discussing this, we will first discuss the characteristics of drunkenness.

    Characteristics of a Drunk Person

    To find out if someone who drinks alcohol is drunk or not, then you need to know the following characteristics.

    1. Difficulty in making decisions or digesting information
    2. Decreased coordination
    3. Heart rate and breathing slow down
    4. Impaired vision
    5. Feeling very sleepy
    6. Lose balance
    7. But the speed of people who start getting drunk is certainly different.

    In addition, there are several factors that can influence a person to get drunk easily when drinking alcohol, including:

    1. Age
    2. Body shape
    3. alcohol tolerance
    4. Gender

    Things You Feel When Tipsy

    Being drunk or tipsy then becomes the first sign that the alcohol you drink is having an effect on the body. In general, a person then begins to feel drunk after consuming 2 to 3 alcoholic drinks within an hour.

    This hangover also begins when alcohol then enters the body’s bloodstream and begins to affect the functioning of the brain and body. Blood alcohol content (Blood Alcohol Content/BAC) is a unit used to measure the amount of alcohol in a person’s bloodstream.

    When someone is tipsy, they will usually feel a number of things, including:

    1. Look more talkative and become more confident.
    2. Tend to be more daring in taking risks
    3. His motor responses began to slow down
    4. Has a shorter attention span and poor short term memory
    5. Have a greater risk of injury due to being less focused.

    Phases of Alcohol Intoxication Levels

    If you consume excessive alcohol, your body’s functions will then run more slowly. Tipsy itself can be regarded as an early sign of alcohol starting to affect the body.

    Generally, someone who will then start to feel tipsy after he consumes 2-3 types of liquor within an hour. However, everyone’s alcohol tolerance level is certainly different. The more alcohol you drink, the stronger the impact on the body will be.

    A very severe level of alcohol intoxication is also very dangerous because it can cause seizures, vomiting, dehydration, acute kidney failure, injury, coma, which can result in death.

    This level is then assessed from the blood alcohol content (BAC), which is the unit used to measure the amount of alcohol in a person’s bloodstream. For more details, here are the levels of alcohol intoxication.

    1. Conscious (Sobriety)

    A person who is in a state of sober or very lightly affected by alcohol consumes only one alcoholic drink in a period of one hour. The blood alcohol level is only around 0.01-0.05%. At this level, a person then still feels like himself.

    2. Euphoria/Tipsy

    Tipsy is an early sign when alcohol is starting to have an effect on the body. Women and men have different tolerances for alcohol, including when they start to feel tipsy. For example, men start to feel tipsy after consuming 2-3 types of alcoholic drinks in one hour, women will feel tipsy after consuming only 1-2 types.

    The BAC level in this phase is 0.03-0.12%. When someone is tipsy, they feel more confident and talk to them more. In addition, tipsy people also become more willing to take risks even though their motor responses are slower. Furthermore, tipsy people then have a shorter focus span and memory.

    3. Excitement

    The next level of alcohol intoxication is excitement when they have consumed 3-5 drinks (for men) and 2-4 drinks (for women) within one hour. Class B drinks with 5% -20% alcohol will then trigger someone to get drunk. The BAC level in this stage is around 0.09-0.25%. This is the phase when someone is said to be drunk. Characteristics of a drunk person include:

    Usually, you will be fully sober more than 18 hours after people feel drunk. Drinking alcohol will also increase a neurotransmitter called gamma-aminobutyric acid or GABA. Then, GABA will then suppress the central nervous system, so you can get drunk. This is also explained in research published in Pharmacology Biochemistry and Behavior.

    4. Confusion

    Consuming more than 5 drinks (for men) and 4 drinks (for women) within one hour will then cause someone to enter the confusion stage or heavy drunkenness due to confusion. BAC levels in this stage itself is 0.18-0.30%. Characteristics at this level of intoxication include:

    1. Difficulty standing and walking
    2. Overflowing emotions
    3. Feeling very confused about what happened
    4. Vulnerable to loss of consciousness
    5. Cannot feel pain so the risk of injury is high

    5. Stupor

    The next phase is to make a person no longer able to respond to what is happening around him. It is impossible for a person in the stupor stage to stand or even walk. At this stage someone who is drunk can then pass out, have seizures, or even have pale and bluish skin.

    Furthermore, in this phase with a BAC level of 0.25-0.40%, a person can no longer breathe normally. Not only that, the gag reflex or gag reflex also won’t work optimally, so it’s very dangerous if you suddenly choke on your own vomit. At this stage you can say it is the level of intoxication where a person needs emergency medical treatment.

    6. Coma

    A more severe degree of alcohol intoxication is coma, which occurs when the body’s functions are too slow. A person is then at risk of death at this stage. It is very important to provide emergency medical attention when the blood alcohol level reaches 0.35-0.45%.

    7. Death

    When blood alcohol levels are higher than 0.45%, a person can die. If you have penetrated this stage, then the consumption of alcohol will then be too much, so that the body can no longer be able to tolerate it. The side effects of excessive drunkenness can also have a negative impact on the body. In people who are drunk and under the influence of alcohol, their bodies experience the following conditions:

    1. Dehydration
    2. Becoming too frequent urination
    3. Diarrhea, and sweating
    4. Indigestion
    5. Blood sugar drops
    6. Disturbed sleep time

    Groups of People Prohibited from Drinking Alcohol

    In order not to be tipsy or cause dangerous health conditions, there are some people who cannot drink alcohol, including:

    1. Younger than 21 years old.
    2. Pregnant or may be pregnant.
    3. Driving, or planning to drive, or participating in other activities that then require skill, coordination, and alertness.
    4. Taking certain prescription or over-the-counter medications which can then interact with alcohol.
    5. Suffer from certain medical conditions.
    6. Recovering from alcohol addiction or unable to control the amount they drink.

    How to get rid of Tipsy

    There are several ways to get rid of tipsy, including:

    1. Drink Coconut Water

    By drinking coconut water, the tipsy that is being felt can be reduced. This can happen because coconut water contains electrolytes and potassium.

    2. Chew Ginger

    By chewing ginger, you can reduce nausea caused by alcoholic beverages.

    3. Taking Aspirin Drugs

    The second way that can be done to get rid of tipsy is to take aspirin. However, you also need to remember that this drug should not be consumed in excess.

    3. Drink Mineral Water

    The third way that can be done to get rid of tipsy is to drink mineral water. By drinking mineral water, body fluids can be replaced, so that the feeling of dizziness is reduced.

    4. Don’t forget to eat

    The next step that can be taken to get rid of tipsy is to always try to eat snacks or small snacks to help improve blood flow.

    Health Risks Due to Tipsy

    There are several health risks caused by tipsy, including:

    1. Heart Damage

    Excessive alcohol consumption weakens the heart muscle. As a result, blood flow throughout the body also becomes disrupted. Alcohol will also cause cardiomyopathy which is characterized by shortness of breath, irregular heartbeat (arrhythmia), fatigue, and persistent coughing. Not only that, alcohol will also increase the risk of heart attack, stroke, and hypertension.

    2. Inflammation of the Pancreas (Pancreatitis)

    Too much alcohol in the body will then make the pancreas experience a buildup of enzymes. This excessive buildup of enzymes in the pancreas will eventually cause inflammation or what is called pancreatitis.

    Acute pancreatitis is generally characterized by various symptoms such as abdominal pain, nausea, vomiting, increased heart rate, diarrhea, and fever. If left unchecked and the habit of drinking alcohol is not stopped, it is not impossible that someone’s life will be threatened.

    3. Liver Damage

    The liver functions to filter out toxins and unused waste so they don’t accumulate in the body. However, excessive consumption of liquor will slow down the work of the liver, causing liver disorders.

    About one in three cases of liver transplantation in the United States originates from liver disease caused by excessive alcohol consumption. In addition, cirrhosis of the liver due to excessive alcohol consumption is also the 12th leading cause of death in America in 2009.

    4. Kidney Damage

    The diuretic effect of alcohol can also increase the amount of urine produced by the body. As a result, it becomes difficult for the kidneys to regulate the flow of urine and body fluids, including the distribution of sodium, potassium and chloride ions throughout the body. This condition will then disrupt the electrolyte balance in the body which will cause the body to become dehydrated.

    5. Anxiety Disorders

    Drinking alcoholic beverages can also be an escape to help a person feel more comfortable. Unfortunately this effect then only lasts a moment. As already mentioned, the relaxing effect that comes after drinking alcohol wears off quickly.

    Because of this, he will continue to rely on alcohol to help cover up his anxiety and then make his alcohol tolerance increase and he will need to drink even more to feel the same effects. However, without realizing it, the effect of a hangover will actually make these anxiety symptoms worse.

    Closing

    From all the explanations above, it can be said that tipsy is one of the levels of the drunken phase. Therefore, when you are experiencing tipsy, you should stop drinking alcohol. Thus the discussion about tipsy, hopefully all the discussion above adds to Sinaumed’s’ insight.

  • What is the Relationship between Spices and Colonization in Indonesia?

    What is the Relationship between Spices and Colonization in Indonesia?

    What is the relationship between spices and colonialism in Indonesia? Maybe that is the right question to delve into the history of the arrival of the invaders to our country. Indonesia has always been known as a country blessed with natural resources. Not only that, this country is rich in biodiversity, and one of the natural resources it produces is spices. Spices are some plants that can be used as seasonings for cooking.

    There is no doubt that Indonesia is rich in spices and was once visited by Europeans to colonize it. Then what is the relationship between spices and colonialism in Indonesia? To answer this question, let’s examine the relationship between spices and colonialism in Indonesia through the discussion of the following article, starting from the history of spice hunting in Indonesia, to the reasons Europeans came to Indonesia:

    History of Spice Hunt in Indonesia

    The discovery and development of spice plants discovered by ancient people is unstoppable. After trying to study the various types of plants and natural resources available, it turns out that herbal ingredients that can cure illnesses and reduce physical conditions (a type of doping, but made from natural ingredients) can be consumed if mixed with several types of food.

    Since 3500 BC the Ancient Egyptians have been using various spices to flavor food and cosmetics and treat the dead. The use of spices extends from the Middle East to the eastern Mediterranean and Europe. Spices from China, Indonesia, India and Ceylon (now Sri Lanka) were originally transported overland by donkey and camel caravans.

    Arab middlemen managed the spice trade for nearly 5,000 years before European explorers discovered routes to India and other spice-producing countries in the east. Before learning the seasoning technique, ancient people ate their food simply by burning it, without going through any additional processing stages.

    Of course, the resulting taste is the simple and pure taste of the ingredients they burn, often the trigger for disease caused by the food they consume. Not only that, the food they hunt is also very easy to prepare and you have to go looking for food every day, so you can’t store it for too long. From hunting to the day after returning, they wrapped the game in spice leaves.

    This inadvertently changes the taste and smell of the prey. Since the discovery of this technology, ancient people have researched new plants that would help enhance the delicious taste of their food. In addition, they are looking for ways to increase food resistance and resistance to pathogens by using certain spices. Today, spices are still an important addition to the delicious taste of food.

    Finding cheaper ways to get spices from the East ushered in a glorious New World era of exploration and discovery. European explorers such as Ferdinand Magellan, Vasco da Gama and Bartolomeu Dias have traveled long distances to find routes to the sources of spices. Christopher Columbus traveled west from Europe in 1492, finding the route to the spice lands, but discovered the United States of America.

    In 1497, the Portuguese navigator Vasco da Gama found a route around the southern tip of Africa and arrived in Calicut on the southwestern coast of India in 1498. Dagama returned from the journey with lots of nutmeg, cloves, cinnamon, ginger and pepper. It started thousands of years before Christ. The world’s greatest spice hunt didn’t occur until the 15th century. The trip was initiated by Europeans such as Spain, Portugal, Great Britain and the Netherlands who fought for spice production centers.

    Competition is fierce to spend years fighting for spices more valuable than gold. Its efficacy is sought not only as a perfume, but also for preservatives, drugs, and air freshener. European spice exploration was first pioneered by Christopher Columbus, but only the Portuguese Vasco da Gama, who became a successful sailor, recorded gold ink in the 15th century.

    This spice route passes through various parts of the world and ports, especially Asia, Africa and Europe. Indonesia is also known as a paradise for various kinds of spices because of its strategic location. Like cloves which grow in Ternate and Tidore, nutmeg which grows naturally in Banda and Sumatra is known as a producer of frankincense, cinnamon and pepper. It used to be a pioneer in the spice trade, and various tribes were involved in forming the archipelago.

    Spices have long been a valuable ingredient. Not all regions can produce the spices that meet their needs, so that groups of people and even countries that can explore remote areas often travel to conserve the natural resources they need. Historically, it is not uncommon for wars to arise from power struggles over an area to preserve natural resources wherever someone wants to control them. The reason for the war here is how they want to take control of this spice trading market.

    The Relationship of Spices and Colonization in Indonesia

    Based on the history of the spice hunt above, it shows how valuable spices were to the world at that time, even today. Based on the history of its development, this hunt can provide answers to the question of what is the relationship between spices and colonialism in Indonesia, which occurred in the following eras:

    Pre-colonial Age

    Jack Turner stated in his book “History of Temptation” that Indonesian spices which were traded in ancient times in the Mediterranean region were originally moored in Malabar (India). The results of the spice trade were then distributed by Indian traders to the cities of Rome and Venice as well as other parts of Europe. Not only that, the Arab merchants who were able to obtain these spices also brought them to the Red Sea and the Persian Gulf.

    Until the 14th century, Europeans had never seen or imagined herbs firsthand. The European spice imagination is in full swing. Imagine, for example, that peppers are harvested like vines and grown on trees rather than real vines. After all, Europe was bewildered in the 15th century, when it was hard to find spices as the Ottoman Turks occupied the fall of Constantinople, the gateway to trade between Asia and Europe.

    Europe needed spices from the whims of royal rulers, traders and adventurers. They also decided to carry out a spice expedition in the archipelago. The era of colonialism After Constantinople fell, the Europeans finally started their expedition to the archipelago. Before, rumors were widespread about the archipelago (Indonesia), which was known as a paradise for spices.

    This edition is included in Marco Polo’s book. And that explains how abundant spices are in this country. According to Fadly Rahman Negeri Spices magazine, expeditions to the archipelago began in the 15th century. Until 1511, the leader of the Portuguese expedition, Alfonso de Albuquerque, finally succeeded in conquering Malacca (North Maluku). Initially, the Portuguese only wanted to trade spices. However, because Indonesia had many high-quality spices such as cloves, sandalwood and nutmeg, the Portuguese wanted to rule over Indonesia.

    Later, the Portuguese succeeded in confiscating the archipelago’s spices and managed to monopolize the spice trade in Europe. Disliked by the Portuguese, who controlled European trade through a monopoly, the Dutch took steps to circumvent the Portuguese monopoly. The Dutch introduced the Vereenigde Oostindische Compagnie (Association of the East India Company) (VOC), which was founded on 20 March 1602.

    VOC is a Dutch company that monopolizes trading activities. Here, Dutch origin colonized Indonesia for centuries. From the explanation above, we can conclude that spices are related to colonialism, because Indonesia is rich in spices which became a magnet that attracted Europeans and controlled Indonesia.

    Reasons for Europeans Coming to Indonesia

    By 1390 cloves reaching Europe would be around 6 tonnes annually, and nutmeg would be around 1.5 tonnes. The first Europeans to enter the archipelago, the Portuguese. Then the Spanish and Dutch came to Indonesia as traders. Later, even the Netherlands established the Vereenigde Oost Indische Compagnie (VOC) or the Dutch Trade Alliance. After that, the VOC dominated Indonesia for a long time. It started when the Portuguese headed for the spice production center of the Maluku Islands under the guidance of Francisco Serrau after the conquest of the city of Malacca in 1511.

    The arrival of the Portuguese seems to have attracted the attention of Abu Beras, sultan of the Kingdom of Ternate. He then offered to build a fort on Ternate Island in exchange for selling all the carnation products to the Portuguese. With this offer, the Portuguese cooperated. This was the beginning of the Indonesian colonial era. Based on the ambition to dominate the archipelago’s rich spice trade through European countries. The kingdoms of Ternate and Tidore, quoted from the official website of the Ministry of Education and Culture (Kemendikbud), developed rapidly thanks to spices, especially cloves.

    Initially, Ternate and Tidore lived peacefully side by side. Their arrival had the ambition to hunt and control spices by colonizing the archipelago. Indonesia is rich in spices so it has different regions. At times, it even becomes an item that has high selling value or is expensive. Spices also have medicinal and health benefits. Around 1390, cloves reached Europe reaching about 6 tons annually, and nutmeg up to about 1.5 tons.

    The first Europeans to enter the archipelago, the Portuguese. Then the Spanish and Dutch came to Indonesia as traders. The Netherlands also later established the Vereenigde Oost Indische Compagnie (VOC) or Dutch trade association. After that, the VOC dominated Indonesia for a long time. The initial entry of the mainland into Indonesia Quoting from the website www.indonesia.go.id, it began after the city of Malacca was conquered in 1511. Under the guidance of Francisco Serau, the Portuguese headed for the spice-producing center of the Marc archipelago.

    The arrival of the Portuguese seems to have attracted the attention of Abu Beras, sultan of the Kingdom of Ternate. He then offered to build a fort on the island of Ternate in exchange for selling all the carnation products to the Portuguese. With this offer, the Portuguese agreed to cooperate. This was the beginning of the Indonesian colonial era. Then, after the defeat of the Portuguese in 1641, Dutch merchants came and founded the VOC. During this time, a monopoly on nutmeg was established in 1621, and clove was also monopolized in 1650.

    Based on the ambition to dominate the archipelago’s rich spice trade by European countries. The kingdoms of Ternate and Tidore, quoted from the official website of the Ministry of Education and Culture (Kemendikbud), thrived thanks to spices, especially cloves. Initially, Ternate and Tidore lived peacefully side by side. But peace did not last long, especially after the arrival of the Portuguese and Spanish. They started playing against each other, and as a result, the two empires disbanded and competed against each other.

    The Portuguese came to Marc by making Ternate an ally. Meanwhile the Spanish came to Marc in 1521 by making Tidore their ally. Their arrival not only imposed a trade monopoly, but also disrupted domestic governance. The competition between Portugal and Spain for control of the Maluku Islands ultimately led the two countries to resolve the conflict. Then in 1529 they signed the Treaty of Zaragoza.

    As a result of the Agreement, Spain had to leave the Maluku Islands and finally control the Philippines. Meanwhile, the Portuguese continued to trade in the Maluku Islands. In implementing monopoly policies, the VOC has become the richest private company in history. Even forced planting that changed the color of world trade.

    Types of Spices in Indonesia

    There are seven types of spices that make Indonesia rich: pepper, cinnamon, nutmeg, vanilla, cloves, turmeric and ginger.

    1. Pepper

    In Indonesia, pepper plants are spread in Aceh, Jambi, West Kalimantan, East Kalimantan, Lamphun, West Nusa Tenggara and South Sulawesi. Furthermore, Southeast Sulawesi, South Sumatra, North Sumatra, Yogyakarta Special Region. In 2016, pepper became Indonesia’s most important spice.

    2. Cloves

    Carnation cloves originate from the Maluku Islands in Indonesia. Cloves were a popular and expensive spice in the early days of Portugal’s expansion. At the time, people corresponded to the price of gold bars. In Indonesia, cloves are found in areas such as Jambi, West Java, Central Java, East Java, Central Kalimantan, East Kalimantan and Marc. Furthermore, NTT, Papua, Riau, South Sulawesi, Southeast Sulawesi, North Sulawesi, South Sumatra and DIY.

    3. Cinnamon 

    Cinnamon is a spice with a musty aroma and unique taste. Therefore, cinnamon is often used as an additive in cakes and drinks. Cinnamon is found in many areas, including Jambi, West Sumatra and Yogyakarta. As of 2016, cinnamon is the second most important ingredient after pepper.

    4. Nutmeg 

    Nutmeg is a typical plant of Banda and Marc. However, its distribution can be found in various regions such as Bengkulu, Marc, Papua, South Sulawesi, Southeast Sulawesi and North Sulawesi. Nutmeg is not only a spice, but also a raw material for producing essential oils. In 2016 it became the third largest raw material.

    5. Vanilla

    Vanilla is actually a Mexican spice, not Indonesian. However, in Indonesia it is widely cultivated in various regions such as East Java, Lampung, NTT, Central Java, Central Java and DIY.

    6. Ginger

    Ginger is one of Indonesia’s main seasoning ingredients. Ginger has health benefits, especially as an ingredient in Chinese herbs.

    7. Turmeric 

    Turmeric is a plant that is used for treatment. In Southeast Asia, turmeric is not only used as the main spice, but also as part of religious ceremonies.

    So, that’s an explanation of the relationship between spices and colonialism in Indonesia.

  • What is the Purpose of ASEAN Formation? Accompanied by Benefits and Obstacles

    What is the Purpose of ASEAN Formation? Accompanied by Benefits and Obstacles

    The purpose of ASEAN – ASEAN is a forum for realizing world peace, as was the real goal when the agency was formed. This peace starts from the Southeast Asia region, to other countries that can collaborate or establish good relations together. However, do you know what are the complete goals that underlie the establishment of ASEAN?

    Main Pillars Underlying ASEAN Goals

    The beginning of the formation of ASEAN was started by a conflict, where in the 1960s, the struggle for ideological influence had to be resolved immediately. Because of this, ASEAN was successfully formed on August 8, 1967 and its goals were contained in the Bangkok declaration.

    There are three main pillars that underlie the purpose of establishing ASEAN, namely the ASEAN Economic Community or ASEAN Economic Community , the ASEAN security community or the ASEAN Political Community , and the ASEAN cultural community which is referred to as the ASEAN Socio Cultural Community . The formation of a series of ASEAN communities requires the community to implement a regional mechanism, which means that each country must have a will.

    The ASEAN goals were successfully signed during the Bangkok declaration which was attended by representatives from each country such as Tun Abdul Razak from Malaysia, Adam Malik from Indonesia, Narsisco Ramos from the Philippines, S. Rajaratnam from Singapore, and Thanat Khoman from Thailand.

    ASEAN Goals Based on the Bangkok Declaration

    There are ten countries that are still actively contributing to this organization, namely Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore, the Philippines, Thailand, Brunei Darussalam, Myanmar, Laos, Vietnam and Cambodia. The following are objectives that have been approved according to the declaration.

    1. The purpose of forming the organization is to support economic growth, cultural development, and social progress in areas that can be approached. Thus, every party will come together and unite to make it happen through effort and enthusiasm that all women are equal. Friendship is in fact needed to strengthen the foundation of a society in a more prosperous and peaceful Southeast Asian nations.
    2. Regional peace and stability can be enhanced through the agency. The way to achieve this is by respecting justice and law and order in relations between countries in the designated area. The principles of the United Nations or UN are the main guidelines.
    3. Increasing cooperation between countries so that they become more active and can help each other on issues that are classified as a common interest such as in the economic, technical, social, scientific, and administrative fields.
    4. Cooperation will become more effective by increasing the utilization of industry and agriculture, trade which goes through a process of studying problems in international era commodities. Means of transportation and communication can go through a process of improvement, so that people’s living standards will increase and people’s lives will develop.

    Countries can often provide assistance in the form of suggestions on training and research activities for education. Fields that run in engineering, administrative, and professional positions will further develop if they obtain cooperation based on other principles.

    1. Another objective of this body is to promote studies in the region of Southeast Asia that are as broad and comprehensive as the opportunity allows.
    2. Close and well-maintained cooperation became one of the ideals when the agency was formed for a long time. Various organizations in international and regional scope have similar goals. All possibilities can be properly received and heard if they hold each other tightly.
    3. Responses that are more effective, meaningful, and can be positive or negative to prove that users must be even more careful about transnational crimes, cross-border challenges, and all forms of threats.
    4. Sustainable development must advance to ensure environmental protection in the region. Long-lasting resources, preservation of cultural heritage, and people’s lives can be developed to achieve high quality.
    5. Human resource development is carried out through closer cooperation, both in the fields of education and lifelong learning, science and technology, empowering people and strengthening the ASEAN community.
    6. Increasing the welfare of a decent life for all people throughout the ASEAN region. The trick is to create equitable access to opportunities for human development, justice, and social well-being.
    7. ASEAN was formed to build a safer environment, so that its people are guaranteed to be free from all kinds of illegal drugs and narcotics.
    8. ASEAN is promoted to be people-oriented, so that within it a layer of society will be formed from positive encouragement and motivation, benefiting from all opportunities, integration processes, and community building for ASEAN.
    9. ASEAN identity can be recognized by all people with a higher awareness of cultural diversity and regional heritage. For example, Indonesia, which is rich in its own culture and customs, is better recognized by residents.
    10. Defense of centrality and a proactive role as the main driving force in relations and cooperation through external partners for a regional architecture that is transparent, inclusive and open.

    Benefit from the ASEAN Goals

    Through a number of cooperation carried out by countries in ASEAN, there are a number of benefits to be obtained properly. These benefits include the following points.

    1. Stability, peace and order in the ASEAN region to continue development in all fields. From these benefits, Indonesia has the urge to be more advanced and compete with other countries.
    2. The creation of broad cooperation in the economic field, expansion of trade, investment, tourism, technology, education, and science. Development and acceleration in these fields can develop.
    3. ASEAN is a forum for Indonesia to fight for the country’s interests in the Southeast Asian region and the interests of all parties in the international region.

    ASEAN now has its own charter, dubbed the ASEAN Charter. This matter is stated on the website of the Ministry of Foreign Affairs or KEMLU, so that the body in question can transform its form as a political association with flexibility, becoming a strong legal basis or legal personality.

    The regulations that are brought in become stronger because of the existence of legal personality, so that the purpose is clear. In essence, ASEAN was formed to create an atmosphere of peace, friendship and prosperity. More importantly in the world of politics, ASEAN declares itself as an organization that highly respects and upholds human rights (Human Rights).

    This turned out to be in accordance with the Bangkok declaration which said that the formation of an Association for Regional Cooperation between regions in Asia was known as the Association of Southeast Asian Nations (ASEAN).

    1. Economic growth will accelerate and social progress and cultural development will be affected. This success comes from joint efforts in the spirit of equality and partnership. The point is that the foundation of society becomes stronger, so that prosperity and peace can be felt by them.
    2. The promotion of regional peace and stability is carried out to respect the rule of law and justice in relations between countries in the region in question and adherence to the principles of the UN charter.
    3. Its aim is to promote active cooperation and mutual assistance in the economic, cultural, technical, scientific, social and cultural worlds. Administrative and sectional are also characteristics that make associations easy to distinguish.
    4. Assistance to one another is channeled or provided in the form of training or research facilities, be it in the fields of professional, administrative, and technical education.
    5. Collaboration is actively carried out to meet the great needs in agriculture and industry. The expansion of their trade involves the study of trade issues on an international scope, improvement of transportation and communication facilities to increase the standard of living of the people living in the area.
    6. Promote Southeast Asia, attach great importance to the close cooperation and benefit of international organizations. Exploring all avenues leading to closer cooperation with one another.

    Activities That Must Be Implemented To Realize Asean’s Goals

    If you want to carry out the aims and objectives that have been written, the members of the ASEAN group must implement a number of the following activities.

    First, the annual meeting is held by the Minister of Foreign Affairs although it has to be on a rotation basis. The meeting will be held at the ASEAN ministerial level, the meetings that can be held will be adjusted according to needs.

    Such a meeting can be explained in the description of the AMM or Asean Ministerial Meeting, which is a meeting between foreign ministers of countries and ASEAN members that discuss developments in community development.

    The establishment of a committee under the foreign leadership of the host country and its representatives to serve as members. The detected data will be used to create association works between meetings organized by the foreign minister.

    An ad-hoc committee or specialist standing committee will be tasked with working on existing responsibilities. They serve in each particular field, according to their ability to work.

    Furthermore, participation in all regions in Southeast Asia to carry out the principles and goals of the organization. This association is tasked with representing the various collective wills of the region in Southeast Asia to bind themselves together in sacrifice and cooperation.

    This goal is safe for the people, children and grandchildren thanks to peace, and freedom and prosperity that makes all parts of the region or areas in the country integrated. Acting as an umbrella for cooperation between countries in Southeast Asia, ASEAN is given great responsibility for the development and life of diplomatic relations between peoples.

    In its development, conflicts and disputes can occur in members in ASEAN. It is hoped that this world peace organization can become a bridge for these countries to resolve existing disputes.

    If there is an inharmonious relationship between its members, the goals of ASEAN can also be hampered. Well, for examples of problems and cases themselves, you can see them through the details below.

    Problems That Can Hamper the Realization of ASEAN Goals

    In fact, there are indeed a lot of problems that occur between ASEAN members or countries. One of the issues that often creates controversy, which has not even been resolved until now, is the issue between Indonesia and Malaysia related to the Ambalat block claim.

    What is the Ambalat block? The basic block that exists on the sea or continental shelf with an area of ​​15,235 square km, is precisely located 80 miles off the sea of ​​East Kalimantan, a depth of 2.5 Sulawesi waters. This block is actually still located in Indonesia’s EEZ or area, to be precise if there are Indonesia’s sovereign rights to manage natural resources.

    According to The United Convention on the Law of the Sea (UNCLOS) 1982, the maritime zone is divided into several areas according to different rules and rights. As we already know, the territorial zone is a maritime zone that is drawn 12 miles from the base line or baseline.

    In the case of Indonesia, the line used is usually the straight archipelagic baseline as the right over our archipelagic state. The zone also enforces a limited number of laws that extend beyond the coastline, such as health, immigration, customs, and fiscal.

    However, you should also know that outside the Territorial Zone there is also a separate regulation called sovereign rights , whereby the coastal state can manage natural resources in the region. Land and sea transportation are still allowed to pass over the EEZ, in contrast to the underwater area which has its own regulations.

    From this decision, Malaysia made a claim that the area belonged to it based on the 1979 marine area map. The map was issued unilaterally by the Malaysian state, so it can no longer be called illegal. However, the regulation still has political implications.

    This claim naturally invites many objections, including from Indonesia itself. It doesn’t stop there because Malaysia also claims itself as an archipelagic country after winning a dispute with Indonesia, regarding Ligitan and Sipadan Islands from the International Court of Justice.

    According to Malaysia, the islands of Ligitan and Sipadan must also have a territorial sea, which, when measured by the baselines of the islands, their territorial waters will enter Malaysian territory. This action provoked a reaction from Indonesia and many other neighboring countries.

    Some of the reasons that can provoke conflict between countries are divided into several points, namely as follows.

    1. Ambalat is a Natural Continuation of the Kalimantan Region

    From a geographical perspective, Indonesia does have a stronger position because the western and eastern Ambalat blocks are a form of natural continuity in the Kalimantan region. Regulations regarding the continental margin are governed by the natural continuation of the landmass of the coastal states that comprise the seabed area.

    2. Decision of the Constitutional Court

    A decision coming from a constitutional court could win Malaysia over the issue of island ownership, even if only for the mainland. Meanwhile, Indonesia has always guarded the Ambalat area to remain part of our Sovereignty State.

    The judges themselves said that the decisions they made had no effect on the delimitation of the continental shelf. Simply put, Malaysia cannot take the waters or continental shelf around Ligitan Island with the Ambatan Sea.

    3. Indonesia as an archipelagic country

    The characteristics of Indonesia as an archipelago or Archipelagic State have made it claim the Ambalat region since the Dutch colonial era. Malaysia is not an archipelagic country, but only a country that has normal beaches to use regular or straight baselines.

    With various reasons and opinions, the approval of this case is even more heated. The two countries also began to guarantee relations and cooperation with international companies that carry out oil or resource concessions in the region.

    To solve this problem, all ASEAN members submitted their opinions or opinions in a forum. The main goal is that the dialogue that occurs will be more constructive, so that a series of problems, from security and politics, make them able to carry out tasks immediately.

    Contributions are made to be more significant, regarding developments with public confidence regarding the residence of members. The application of preventive diplomacy for stops in the Asia Pacific area can also help.

    Those are some of ASEAN’s goals and various applications that you can understand. ASEAN in fact has good goals to develop, so that we as a community in the Southeast Asian region can always support and always work together.

  • What is the Nebula Theory in the Formation of the Solar System

    What is the Nebula Theory in the Formation of the Solar System

    Nebula Theory – Studying the solar system and everything in it is endless. The presence of the solar system itself is an interesting phenomenon that makes many people wonder how it was formed. Discussing the ranks of the solar system is inseparable from all the theories including the nebula theory.

    Have you ever seen clusters of stars in the sky that at first glance look like colorful clouds? If you go to a place with low light, such as in a field, on a wide savanna and use a telescope, you may have seen clouds like this.

    The clouds between these star clusters remind us of the nebula theory, which in Latin means cloud. So what exactly is meant by this nebula theory?

    Before going into details about the nebula theory, you need to get acquainted with the theory of the formation of the universe.

    Theory of the Formation of the Universe

    Astronomy explains the theories of the formation of the universe which also include the nebula theory. So how did the universe form based on the science of astronomy?

    Without us realizing it, we, who have been busy with our daily activities and learning everything, are all limited to knowledge on the earth we live in. In fact, if you want to take a wider view of our vast earth, this is only a small part of the solar system and even the universe.

    Have you ever thought about what the history of our solar system really was like long ago? What’s in one solar system, and what’s in another?

    When discussing outer space and the solar system, maybe at a glance what is in the shadows is scenes from science-fiction films such as Star Wars, Guardian of the Galaxy, ET and the like. Of course, these stories also appeared not because of the inspiration of natural phenomena and also theories of the formation of the universe which have been a secret since ancient times.

    Scientists and astronomers have been observing everything in outer space since time immemorial. Because of this, various theories have emerged to clarify and provide a common thread for all of our current questions.

    In astronomy, there are a number of theories regarding the process by which the universe and its contents were formed. These theories can be interrelated and some are contradictory, but all of them are believed to be used as a reference for future learning.

    Steady-State Theory

    Steady-state or steady-state theory believes that the universe exists without beginning and also without end. This means that nature has just been formed without any phenomenon and this theory also assumes that the universe will never end.

    This thinking is also based on monitoring celestial bodies which have not changed in the past thousands of years.

    This may be inversely proportional to what most people believe about the end of the world. However, that’s how a theory put forward may not always be in line with other sciences.

    Today, since the 20th century this steady state theory is no longer used, given the advanced technological developments so that scientists have found evidence that is considered much more concrete.

    At this time scientists believed that the universe was formed through the processes that exist in the latest theory, and not suddenly exist without a beginning or an end.

    The Big Bang Theory

    Ever heard of the big bang theory? Or often called the big bang theory. Based on the big bang theory, this explains the beginning of the formation of the universe as it is today because of a big explosion that came from an atom that was so dense that it was even too dense.

    Due to the high heat energy and atomic density, it eventually created a very large explosion which scattered the pieces into all the material in this solar system.

    This theory is also supported by the existence of Hubble research evidence, a scientist who discusses this theory. In his research it was proven that there is a red shift of galaxies in the microwave cosmos.

    Some of the light elements in galaxies are getting bigger and bigger so that it is called galactic evolution. Predictably, this can happen because of the growth of gravity from the standard theory. This further emphasizes that there is a possibility that the universe was formed through a big bang.

    Nebula Theory

    For observers of the solar system, or for those of you who are interested in discussions about astronomy, you may be familiar with hearing the term nebular theory in your ears, because this theory is the most widely accepted by scientists and scientists .

    The term nebula itself also means cloud or also means fog which was also coined by a scientist in 1755, which explained that the solar system was formed starting from a large amount of gas such as a cloud or fog.

    Most of these clouds or fog come from hydrogen gas which has very hot temperatures. A rotating cloud or nebula that forms the sun and other planets in the solar system.

    The Formation of the Solar System Based on the Nebula Theory

    The nebula theory itself has many versions according to the research and conclusions of previous scientists. The following is the theory of the formation of the solar system presented by scientists based on the nebula theory.

    Nebula Theory According to Kant

    Kant revealed that the formation of the early solar system came from a nebula or cloud that rotated slowly and was attracted by gravitational forces. It is this gravity that eventually forms, bit by bit, to agglomerate and harden into the composition of our solar system.

    Nebula Theory According to Laplace

    Kant’s theory is further strengthened by the income from Simon Laplace, a mathematician and astronomer. Laplace explained in more detail about the role of the nebula theory in the process of forming the solar system.

    Based on Laplace’s discovery, the nebula theory is a creation of the universe starting from the sun. The sun starts from a ball of hot gas that rotates centrifugally or spins outwards quickly.

    Matter and gas that were on the outside of the ball were thrown away and cooled to form a planet. Meanwhile, the core hot ball was getting hotter and forming the sun.

    Nebula Theory According to C. Von Weizsäcker

    When Kant and Laplace had explained this nebular theory, in the 20th century a German scientist also voiced his own version of the nebular theory. According to him, in ancient times a large layer of gas in the form of hydrogen and helium was found.

    Some of the gas is outside the sun’s equator and the rest just disappears. The pressure from the sun’s heat energy then makes this gas leave the heavier elements and collect in one mass line.

    A series of mass collections originating from gas also attracts solid material in outer space until it collects and condenses into a planet.

    Nebula Theory Based on NASA

    The nebula theory, also known as the fog theory, was explained by NASA. Quoting from NASA’s Solar System Exploration states that around 4.5 billion years ago the solar system only started from clusters of clouds and dense gas in the form of dust and stars.

    These clouds rotate slowly to form a larger clump in the form of a solar nebula. The existence of gravity makes dust and gas particles in this solar nebula rotate slowly and consistently to form a disk.

    After forming a disk, the nebula gets denser and denser and forms a solar core. The gas and other materials that cool around the sun’s core form the ranks of the planets in the solar system that we know as the Milky Way.

    In the ranks of the planets of the solar system, there is the earth where the planet where we have stopped and lived all this time.

    The Process of Forming the Solar System Viewed from the Nebula Theory

    Starting from the Collection of Mist

    When drawing conclusions from the exposure of previous scientists, it can be concluded that this universe was formed starting from a cluster of clouds or fog. This fog cluster is actually gaseous particles that mostly contain hydrogen and helium.

    This gas is also the most frequently found on other planets, including Earth in ancient times. This large and hot cloud mass is the beginning of the formation of the sun as the center of the solar system.

    Rotating Nebula

    The fog clusters in the form of gas rotate and rotate quickly so that they have a strong enough gravitational pressure. The rotating nebula is getting stronger and stronger, the gas content inside also causes high heat, this is what will form the sun.

    During rotation, some of the gas is in the path and some is outside the path of the sun’s rotation and forms a ring around it.

    Spread of Gas Beyond the Lines of the Sun

    The nebula or fog that is outside the trajectory of this solar nebula eventually revolves around the sun like a ring. The gas around the sun’s ring also makes its own rotation while circling the sun.

    Gas Condensed Into Planets

    This nebula, which rotates in the trajectory of the sun’s rings, still has the sun’s gravitational pressure. The existence of this gravity makes gas, dust and objects in outer space around it attracted by the force of gravity and unite.

    The nebula that comes from hot gas also cools and solidifies over time, so that at that time gas, dust, and other solid matter merges into a rotating round planet.

    Like a nebula ring that is on the path of the sun to form the planets in the solar system from Mercury to Pluto before finally disappearing.

    The planets that are on the outer path of the sun have the coldest temperatures, while those that are closest to the sun still have hot gases belonging to the sun.

    When viewed from the process and correlation, this nebula theory is the most widely trusted because it is closest to reality. But any theory certainly has advantages and disadvantages, as well as in nebulae.

    Advantages of the Nebula Theory

    Through this theory it is proven successful to state that our solar system is in a flat straight line with an oval trajectory around the sun. Therefore, it is not surprising that many scientists believe in the truth of this nebula theory.

    Disadvantages of the Nebula Theory

    However, there are also those who disagree and think that this theory has weaknesses. James Clerk and Sir Jeans also stated that the bracelet or ring trajectory around the sun has less gravitational pressure.

    In addition, based on the nebula theory, the largest size should be a planet and not the sun. While in fact the sun has the greatest mass weight.

    Already Know the Nebula Theory?

    Talking about astronomy with all its theories is always an interesting discussion, especially if you are really interested in that field. So terms like big bang theory and nebula also sound familiar.

    The nebula itself, as a theory that is believed by most scientists and astronomers, is the theory that feels the closest to reality. Although the explanation also varies from each scientist, we can see similarities between them.

    The nebula theory still has many flaws that feel ‘odd’, but this is something that makes sense considering that the emergence of a theory is only based on research and data. No one really knows what the outer universe is like, nor does anyone know how this universe was actually created.

    One thing is certain, humans continue to study the earth and its solar system throughout the year in order to get the closest data accuracy and knowledge. Therefore many of us cannot be separated from books about astronomy to study the sky and everything in it

  • What is the Major Diatonic Scale? Definition and Examples

    What is the Major Diatonic Scale? Definition and Examples

    What is the Major Diatonic Scale – In every musical instrument, of course, there will be a basic tone that makes it sound more harmonious. The scale itself is one of the most important elements in a piece of music that is useful for producing beautiful and pleasant tones to listen to. In a sense, scales are the result of a combination of tones that have certain intervals.

    One of the scales most often used in a song is the major diatonic scale. As a music lover, of course you have to understand what a major diatonic scale is and its characteristics, as well as examples of songs that use these scales. In this article, we will discuss it in more detail.

    What is the Major Diatonic Scale?

    According to a book entitled Tone and Rhythm by M. Noor Said (2020), the meaning of the major diatonic scale is a scale that is arranged with pitch spacing or intervals in the form of 1-1-½-2-2-2-2/2. In music, pitch or interval is the distance between one note and another. An example of a major scale is C major which consists of do, re, mi, fa, sol, la, si, and do.

    Difference between Major and Minor Diatonic Scales

    To be able to distinguish between the two types of diatonic scales, you must first understand the meaning of each of these terms. If explained using the genre of the song, then usually the major diatonic scale will be used for songs that are cheerful and fun. This is certainly different from the minor diatonic scale which usually gives a more melancholic impression to songs or music that uses this type of scale. Not only that, the distance between the notes of the two types of scales is also different.

    Where the major diatonic scales have intervals between notes, namely 1-1-½-1-1-1-½, while minor diatonic scales have intervals between notes, namely 1-½-1-1-½-1-1. . Actually, we can see the difference from the impression and the interval directly. So, you will not feel confused and have difficulty in distinguishing which songs or music use major scale types and which songs or music use minor scale types. Here, you only need to know and pay attention to the impressions and intervals to be able to recognize them.

    Characteristics of the Major Diatonic Scale

    Actually, from the explanation regarding the meaning of the major diatonic scale above, of course you already know some of the characteristics that exist in this scale, namely the properties it has and also the interval it applies. However, only by knowing the characteristics above, you will certainly feel less able to understand this type of scale clearly. Therefore, let’s take a good look at some of the characteristics possessed by the major diatonic scales below.

    1. Cheerful and Fun

    Every type of scale that exists in the world of music will certainly have an impression or characteristic that is different from one another. As for the major scale itself, it will show a more cheerful and pleasant nature. So when you listen to a song or music that uses this scale, it is very likely that the song will have a cheerful and fun impression. With its pleasant impression, this song will make you feel more excited after listening to songs that use major diatonic scales.

    2. Make a Valuable Impression

    Besides being able to give a cheerful and fun impression, songs or music that use major diatonic scales can usually also give a valuable impression. Therefore, the major diatonic scale is a scale that is often used in songs with the theme of struggle. There are several patriotic songs or national songs that use major diatonic scales, because these scales are full of enthusiasm. Surely this will fit perfectly with the criteria for a struggle song that really requires an impression like that.

    3. Prefix and Suffix of the Major Diatonic Scale

    Basically, this major diatonic scale will start with the root note “do” in the first note. Then, this type of scale will end with the do key which is an octave higher than the previous do key. So, even though the prefix and suffix of the basic tone of this type of major diatonic scale have the same name, the octaves themselves will be different from one another. This further indicates that this type of scale will be different from other types of scales.

    For more details, the order of the notes in this type of major diatonic scale is do, re, mi, fa, sol, la, si, and do. The order of these tones is among the most common. So that we can conclude that this type of scale is included in the type of scale that is most often used in a particular song or music.

    4. Interval Patterns on the Major Diatonic Scale

    The interval pattern in the major diatonic scale is 1-1-½-1-1-1-½. Where this interval pattern will also be a differentiator between the types of major diatonic scales and other types of scales. Every type of scale in the world of music will certainly have its own interval pattern. Which will later become its own characteristic for this type of scale. Therefore, to understand the characteristics of the major diatonic scale, you must first know what kind of interval pattern is used.

    Features of the Minor Diatonic Scale

    Almost the same as the major diatonic scale which has its own characteristics. The minor diatonic scale is the same way. This type of scale has its own characteristics, which you must understand clearly. Following are some of the characteristics possessed by minor diatonic scales, including:

    1. Is Melancholic and Gentle

    Songs that use this type of ladder will produce a soft and melancholy impression. Generally, songs that are in the ballad genre will use a minor diatonic scale type, so that the song can give a melancholy impression. Songs or music that have a melancholy and gentle impression are quite liked by many young people to adults. When you’re listening to a song or music that has a melancholy impression, it’s likely that the song uses a minor diatonic scale.

    2. Prefix and End of Minor Diatonic Scale

    These next characteristics are also one of the differences between the major and minor diatonic scales. If the sequence on the major diatonic scale is do, re, mi, fa, sol, la, si, do, then the sequence for the minor diatonic scale is la, si, do, re, mi, fa, sol, la, which in that case would equal A minor. When the tone sequence is understood more deeply, then you will know more and more about the reasons why this type of scale will produce a song or music that has a soft and melancholy nature.

    3. Interval Patterns on the Minor Diatonic Scale

    Not only are the properties and impressions different from the major diatonic scales, the interval patterns in the minor diatonic scales are also different from other types of scales. For the interval pattern in the minor diatonic scale, namely 1-½-1-1-½-1-1. With the difference between the interval patterns in it, it is not surprising that the nuances produced from the two types of scales are different. So, it can be said that the characteristics of the two types of diatonic ladders include the basic knowledge that exists in the world of music.

    To further clarify information about the two types of diatonic scales, you need to know some examples of songs that use diatonic scales. By paying attention to the tone in the example, you will understand more about the definition of this type of scale. Therefore, let’s take a good look at some examples of the songs below.

    Examples of Songs Using Major Diatonic Scales

    As we discussed earlier, for songs that use the major diatonic scale type, it will produce a cheerful and fun impression and be more enthusiastic. With such a character, this makes many patriotic songs or national songs use this type of scale. The following are some examples of children’s songs as well as national songs that use major diatonic scales, including:

    – Delman ride
    – My balloon
    – From Sabang to Merauke
    – See my garden
    – Halo-Halo Bandung
    – Garuda Pancasila
    – Manuk Dadali
    – Ampar-Ampar Bananas
    – Wake Up Youth Youth
    – Forward Undaunted

    Examples of Songs Using the Minor Scale

    In contrast to songs or music that use major diatonic scales, songs or music that use minor diatonic scales will produce a sadder, gentler, and melancholic impression. This is a very basic difference between songs or music that use major diatonic scales, and songs that use minor diatonic scales. Below are some examples of songs that use the minor diatonic scale type, including:

    – A moment of silence
    – Gratitude
    – Indonesian Heritage
    – Take the Moon
    – Morning Star

    By understanding some examples of songs in these two types of diatonic scales, you can judge for yourself the differences between these types of songs.

    Why Scales Are Included in Basic Knowledge in the World of Music?

    Scales are often referred to as one of the basic knowledge in the world of music that must be learned and understood if you want to work in the world of music. This statement appears not without reason, because the scale is very important in the world of music, so it should not be missed. Not only that, learning and also understanding scales can also help you to do various things in the world of music. So that it will also benefit you. The following are the benefits that you will get when you learn scales well.

    1. Makes It Easy To Play Musical Instruments

    When playing a musical instrument, of course we are required to be able to read notes which are usually in a songbook. The notes are closely related to the scales discussed earlier. So, by learning and understanding scales well, it will be easier for you to play the instrument you like. Thus, you can also create beautiful harmony in the same music.

    2. Increase Concentration

    For the next benefit, this is actually included in the benefits of learning the art of music. But because basically scales are part of the art of music, the benefits of this one can also be referred to as the benefits of learning the scales in music. When you want to play a musical instrument, of course you have to understand the notes. Where usually this will happen for beginners who want to learn certain musical instruments. By learning about these scales, you will be better able to concentrate on playing your favorite musical instrument.

    3. Add Knowledge About the World of Music

    Music is also one of the interesting things to learn. In addition, music can also include a song, musical instruments, and various other musical arts that many people often don’t understand. When you want to enter the world of music, especially for musical instruments such as the violin, piano, and also the guitar, then you must know about the scales in them.’

    Because, each tone can give a different impression from one another. So that it will become one of the basic sciences that must be understood. For example, between the major diatonic and minor diatonic tones. If a song or music using a major diatonic scale will give a cheerful impression, then it is different from a song using a minor diatonic scale which gives a more melancholy impression.

    4. Can Create Various Kinds of Songs

    Not a few people think that someone who can create a song with various genres is a genius. Therefore, if you want to get this title, then you can start by understanding the various scales first. As previously discussed, that each scale will give a different impression. Therefore, we can conclude that when you can recognize the scales in the world of music, then this will make you have great abilities in creating various types of songs with different genres.

    For someone who has been involved in the world of music for a long time, information about the characteristics and also the interval pattern in the major diatonic scale may include basic knowledge that has been memorized by rote. However, this is different from some people or beginners who have just entered the world of music. Of course, they still have questions about this knowledge. So, with this article, we hope that the various explanations discussed above can be a learning reference for those of you who want to get involved in the world of music.

    This is an explanation of what the major diatonic scale is and how it differs from the minor diatonic scale. How, are you interested in learning more about music?

    Book Recommendations & Related Articles

  • What is the Main Thought? Functions, characteristics, and how to determine them

    What is the Main Thought? Functions, characteristics, and how to determine them

    What is the Main Thought? – Do you know if in a reading there is a main idea. This has also been taught when you were in elementary school. But so that it is easier for you to remember and understand related to the explanation of the main idea. This article can help you remember information about the main idea.

    Understanding Main Thoughts

    When we are all learning Indonesian, of course, material for finding the main ideas in articles or in one paragraph is often found. It turns out that if we flash back the main ideas in a paragraph it is true and this can become a core or main topic which will later be explained in several supporting paragraphs in an article.

    The main idea is a core of a reading or a topic which will be discussed more deeply through supporting explanations. A paragraph will usually consist of two main elements.

    The first element is the topic to be discussed or it could also be the main idea. Then for the second element is a supporting sentence. Where later this supporting sentence can be an explanation or reinforcement of the main idea.

     

    You can learn about the PUEBI Book, General Guidelines for Indonesian Spelling

    by Eko Sugiarto

    The Functions Of The Main Idea

    If you already understand the meaning of the main idea through the previous point. Next you can understand about the function of the main idea at this point. Simply put, the function of the subject matter itself is for readers to more quickly identify what the creator of the article or paragraph really wants to convey.

    However, as previously explained, if the main idea is stronger and easier to understand, the meaning requires several supporting sentences.

    Main Thoughts Based on Paragraphs

    After knowing the function of the main ideas in the previous explanation, it turns out that the main ideas are also divided into several types based on the paragraphs you know. Among them are deductive paragraphs, inductive paragraphs, descriptive paragraphs, and mixed paragraphs.

    Of course, the four paragraphs have their own characteristics. So that you better understand the four paragraphs. Come on, see the full explanation below.

    1. Deductive Paragraph

    The first type of paragraph is deductive, where in this paragraph the main idea will be placed at the front. You could say this type of paragraph has a pattern from general to specific.

    The structure of a deductive paragraph starts with the main idea and is supported by several supporting sentences behind it. Because it has an easy structure and is so detailed. So do not be surprised if paragraphs are used more often.

    2. Inductive Paragraph

    In contrast to deductive paragraphs where the main idea or sentence is at the beginning of the paragraph. This type of inductive paragraph uses the placement of the main idea at the end of the paragraph.

    The structure of this type of paragraph is usually from general to specific. Starting from a general explanation that will refer to the main ideas at the end of the paragraph.

    Not only that, it turns out that inductive paragraphs are also divided into three types, namely generalization, analogy, and the last is causality.

    3. Descriptive Paragraph

    This descriptive paragraph is slightly different from the previous two types. Where the main idea of ​​the descriptive paragraph is spread out. This means that each explanatory or supporting sentence has an implied main idea.

    4. Mixed Paragraphs

    Finally there is a mixed paragraph. Just as the name suggests, mixed paragraphs have the main ideas placed at the beginning and end of the paragraph. If you look at the pattern, from the general special then it is strengthened to the special again.

    Of all the types of paragraphs described above, of course, they can be found in every article. Of course, understanding the explanation of the main ideas based on the type of paragraph can make it easier for you to understand what the author of the article will convey.

     

    You can learn about the Skilled Writing Indonesian Series: Sentences

    by PROF. Dr. DJOKO SARYONO, M.PD. DKK

     

    Characteristics of Thoughts

    In a paragraph the existence of the main idea also has several characteristics. The characteristics of this main idea will of course also make it easier for you to determine whether a sentence is a main idea or just an explanatory sentence.

    Quoted from a journal entitled “The Ability to Determine Main Ideas by Using an Inquiry Learning Model for Class VIII Students of SMP Negeri 1 Bone-Bone, North Luwu Regency” by Marchella Praserda Katika with the year of manufacture in 2018.

    It turns out that there are several characteristics that exist in a main idea or main idea. So what are these characteristics? The following is a full explanation.

    1. The Main Idea Is Not Too Complicated

    A main idea should not be convoluted or too wordy. This means that each content of the main idea should not be narrowed or too broadened. The purpose of this is to make it easier for the reader to find the main idea or more easily understand what the author really wants to convey in a paragraph.

    2. Main Thoughts Must Be Clearly Conveyed

    In addition to not being too convoluted in making a main idea, it must also be conveyed clearly. Even the placement of the main idea must also be clearly seen, whether at the beginning of the paragraph, at the end, or at the beginning and end, or in all sentences there will be an implied main idea.

    3. Is General

    A main idea must have a general nature. This means that the main idea can be translated back in the next few sentences. This explanatory sentence can also be called a supporting sentence.

    4. There are Supporting Sentences

    Finally, a main idea must have several supporting sentences. This means that a main idea can not stand. Must have several supporting sentences so that the main idea is stronger and easier for the reader to understand.

    You can learn about Creative Journalistic Writing Features, Accompanied by Rules in Journalistic Writing

    by Fanny Lesmana

    How to Determine Main Thoughts

    Some of the characteristics described earlier can indeed be used as an alternative way when you are looking for a topic. However, not everything can go easily, sometimes it has been read over and over again, there is often a feeling of confusion about what exactly you want to say or what is the main idea of ​​a paragraph.

    Of course, we need a tip or a way that can be done to make it easier to determine the main ideas in a paragraph. You can read an explanation of how to find a main idea in a paragraph below.

    1. Read Entire Content In Paragraphs

    The first thing you can do in looking for a main idea can be by reading the entire contents of the paragraph. But in reading the entire contents of the paragraph must be done with full concentration and thoroughness.

    Understand each content in the paragraph, then distinguish which is the main idea and which is an explanatory sentence. That way you can more easily determine a main idea.

    2. Read Every Sentence

    Next, you can look for a main idea by reading each sentence in the paragraph. Understand each sentence in the paragraph. Because a main idea can have the possibility of being in the beginning, ending, or mixture.

    Of course, by reading every sentence in a paragraph it looks very effective to do. Find out which is the main idea or supporting sentence.

    3. Separating Main Sentences With Explanatory Sentences

    Third, you can try to separate the main sentence from the explanatory sentence. Of course, you also have to understand what is meant by the main sentence and the explanatory sentence.

    Most main sentences will be followed by explanatory sentences. But if you are still too difficult to distinguish between the two sentences. Then observing the main sentence and the explanatory sentence can be seen by looking at their characteristics.

    The character of the explanatory sentence will usually have a proof. An example is a sentence that describes a plan. When you can understand between the two sentences. Of course, to determine a subject matter is not so difficult anymore.

    4. Mark Important Information

    Of course, in every paragraph there is always information that is considered so important. Therefore, one way to make it easier to find main ideas is to mark some information that is considered important and interesting.

    However, accuracy and precision are needed in finding this important information. If you find an important piece of information in a few sentences in a paragraph.

    So the next step is to try to select the important information. Look for what really matters. That way the process of finding the main idea will be easier.

    5. Recognize Explanatory Sentences

    Next is to recognize the explanatory sentence as a support for a main idea in one paragraph. Even though it sounds so simple, some people still find it difficult to determine a supporting sentence.

    One way to recognize a supporting sentence is to pay attention to its characteristics. Usually supporting sentences will always be repeated.

    This means if there are several words that are repeated in several sentences. It could be that some of these sentences are supporting sentences that have the aim of strengthening the main idea.

    6. Provide a Paragraph Conclusion

    The sixth step can be by making a conclusion from a paragraph. When you have read the entire contents in a paragraph. Do the next method by trying to make a conclusion from the contents of the paragraph.

    This can also make it easier to find the main idea in a paragraph.

    7. Mark Each Found Idea

    The last method you can use is to mark every time you find a main idea. This may make it easier for you to find mixed paragraphs.

    Where mixed paragraphs have the main idea placed at the beginning and also at the end of the paragraph. Of course, you also have to read the contents of the paragraph so you can find a sentence that you feel is a main idea.

    Examples of Main Thoughts in Paragraphs

    When you understand what the main idea is, function, and easy ways to determine the main idea in a paragraph. Quoted from the official website www.sinaumedia.com, the following are some examples of questions related to the subject matter.

    1. First Example

    The mud flood disaster caused by the collapse of the Situ Gintung embankment, located in South Tangerang, has caused various kinds of diseases to the people around there. Some of the diseases caused by the mud flood disaster are diarrhea, dengue fever, typhus, and leptospirosis.

    Discussion:

    The main idea of ​​the paragraph above is the flood disaster that can cause various kinds of diseases. If seen from the paragraph above, it can be concluded if the main sentence or main idea is at the beginning. Meanwhile, other sentences have the task of explaining and reinforcing the main idea.

    2. Second Example

    When someone thinks too much about the problem, it will make that person sadder. In addition, rather than dragging on in sadness, it’s better to focus on solving the problem. There is no need to think about and exaggerate the problem, but keep your spirits up and ask for help from people you can trust. That’s how to overcome sadness if you are experiencing problems.

    Discussion:

    The main idea of ​​the paragraph above is a way to overcome justice. Then the main idea in the paragraph is at the end. The pattern used in the paragraph is from general to specific. This can be seen from the beginning to a few sentences before the end becomes explanatory and ends with the main idea.

    3. Third Example

    Trees provide various benefits for humans and other living things. Trees are useful as a source of food, medicine and industrial materials. One of the most important roles of trees for humans and all living things is that trees are a producer of fresh air in the world.

    Discussion:

    The main idea in the paragraph is the benefits of trees that are useful for the health of living things. Judging from the paragraph above, the main idea is at the beginning of the paragraph. The pattern that is owned by the sentence is from specific to general.

    Where if you look back at the first sentence served to show the topic to be discussed. Then the second sentence to the end is in charge of explaining the main part of the sentence.

    4. Fourth Example

    Insomnia can be caused by various factors. Insomnia or what is meant by sleep disturbances is generally caused by anxiety or a burden on one’s mind, other things that cause insomnia are working late into the night, uncomfortable bed conditions, and other habits.

    Discussion:

    The main idea in the paragraph in the paragraph above is about the causes of the condition of insomnia. Then the main idea is placed at the beginning of the paragraph and followed by explanatory sentences. The pattern that is owned by the paragraph above is from specific to general.

    5. Fifth Example

    Addiction to pornography can damage the brain. The brain of pornography addicts will be continuously stimulated which causes excessive production of dopamine and endorphins. Under normal conditions, these substances can be useful for people on the move. However, it is different from the case of pornography addicts. Where the brain will experience excessive stimulation, which in the long term can make the brain smaller and eventually damaged.

    Discussion:

    The main idea of ​​the paragraph above is that pornography addiction can damage the state of the human brain. Then to put the main idea of ​​the paragraph above is at the beginning. The first sentence already explains a topic to be discussed and is followed by various explanatory sentences as reinforcement for the first sentence.

    Book Recommendations & Related Articles

    Conclusion

    The main idea is a topic that will be discussed in a paragraph or article. The placement of the main idea can be found at the beginning, end, or the beginning and end of one paragraph.

    The placement of the main points can also be distinguished based on the type of paragraph, such as inductive, deductive, descriptive or mixed. In addition, there are several features that you can use to find the main idea in a paragraph.

    If it is seen from several characteristics, it has not been able to find a main idea in a paragraph. So using several methods of searching for main ideas as explained above can more easily help you.

    If Sinaumed’s wants to make it easier and more understandable about the subject matter in a paragraph. So there’s nothing wrong with using a variety of readings. Starting from books, essays, novels, and others that can be found at www.sinaumedia.com.

    Authors: Djoko Saryono and Soedjito

    Book title: Indonesian Writing Skilled Series: Paragraph

    You can use the book entitled “Indonesian Writing Skills Series: Paragraphs” published by Bumi Aksara as a training medium so you can master a paragraph. Contains 220 pages in easy-to-understand language that will make learning easier for you.

  • What is the Main Idea in a Paragraph? Here’s How to Determine It

    What is the Main Idea in a Paragraph? Here’s How to Determine It

    What is the Main Idea in a Paragraph – Reading in the form of books, novels, articles, and news always has the main idea of ​​a paragraph. When reading a book or analyzing a book, readers can see the important content of each paragraph.

    According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), extensive reading is needed to reach reading. Extensive reading is a person’s ability to be able to capture the contents of each paragraph. This reading process helps improve the skills of reading aspects.

    These readings contain the main idea of ​​each paragraph, a summary of the contents of the reading, to finding facts and opinions. This reading process is necessary so that the reader can understand the essence and intent of a piece of writing.

     

    What is Main Idea? Definition of Main Idea

    The main idea of ​​a paragraph is the core of the conversation or the main problem in a reading. The main idea is a general sentence, then it can be explained through a more specific explanatory sentence, so that the reading is more coherent.

    The main idea is the main sentence that contains the basic thoughts and ideas explained in other sentences. The main idea is also called the main idea, topic sentence, theme, subject matter, and main idea. In one paragraph, there is at least one main sentence which is the main idea. The main idea becomes the main core of a reading, then the next sentence provides information development.

    Nurhaena (2010: 123) in Introduction to Indonesian argues that the main idea is the idea that underlies the preparation of a paragraph in the reading. The main idea is then developed again with more detailed sentences which are called supporting ideas or explanatory ideas. With the main ideas and explanatory ideas, the paragraphs in the reading can be arranged as a whole.

    Furthermore, he clarifies that the main idea of ​​a paragraph is the soul of each paragraph or the core of friends discussed in a reading paragraph. Another term used to refer to the main idea is the main idea or main idea that underlies a reading paragraph.

    In a paragraph there will only be one main idea, which is in the main sentence in the paragraph. The main idea is usually located at the beginning or end of the paragraph, but some are located in the middle of the paragraph.

    Learning Indonesian recognizes terms, such as main thoughts, main ideas, and main sentences. The term contains the same meaning, which refers to the topic sentence. Hayon (2003: 64) in Main Reading Material I states that the main idea is in the main sentence, sometimes the main idea is clearly visible or explicit, but it is also implied, either in whole or in part.

    The main idea of ​​a paragraph according to Nurhadi (2004:73) in Contextual Learning and Its Application in Competency-Based Curriculum (CBC) is the main idea that forms the basis of essay development. Characteristics of sentences that contain the main idea can be seen from the keywords that accompany it.

    Nurhadi (2004: 144) also stated that the main idea (main idea) is a statement made by the author as a general expression (formulation) of the topic. This element plays a significant role in a paragraph. Every other sentence in the paragraph must refer, either directly or indirectly, to the statement. This is because this statement formulates a topic, sometimes this element is also known as a topic sentence .

    Djago (2008:14) further states that the topic sentence is the embodiment of the main idea sentence of the paragraph in a general or abstract form. Opinions about the main idea can be concluded that the main idea can be interpreted or defined as a main idea or thought that forms the basis or foundation in the development of a reading paragraph.

    How to Determine the Main Idea of ​​a Paragraph

    How to determine the main idea in a paragraph is determined from the supporting ideas of a passage. If someone reads carefully, there are ways to determine the main idea, namely:

    • Read the title and the entire reading paragraph quickly and thoroughly. Pay attention to the title and reading, then formulate the main ideas;
    • Pay close attention to the first sentence to the end;
    • Read sentence by sentence, until you finally find the main idea of ​​the paragraph;
    • After finding the main idea, then quickly read the next paragraph. Read the subtitles section, then connect with the main idea;
    • Make a formula according to the main idea;
    • Attention to the main idea in the form of a general statement that covers a wide range. The supporting ideas are narrower in scope, namely in the form of special statements;
    • Make notes for the main idea of ​​each paragraph. These notes will make it easier to understand paragraphs coherently and logically. Usually, the main idea of ​​the statement is general-specific (deductive) and specific-general (inductive).

     

    The difference between Main Sentences and Explanatory Sentences

    The main sentence contains the main idea, main thought, or topic sentence. This sentence has characteristics that can be distinguished from the explanatory sentence.

    Main Sentence Features

    • Complete sentences that can stand alone;
    • Contains potential problems that can be detailed and described;
    • Has a meaning that is quite clear without being connected with other sentences;
    • Can be formed without conjunctions;
    • The main sentence contains the main idea of ​​a topic or event.

    Characteristics of Explanatory Sentences

    • Explanatory sentences of more than one sentence;
    • Fill in the explanatory ideas in the form of brief descriptions, examples, illustrations, and quotations;
    • The explanatory sentence is a special statement and narrow in scope;
    • This sentence clarifies the main idea of ​​the paragraph.

    Marchella Praserda Katika in her research entitled The Ability to Determine Main Ideas Using Inquiry Learning Models for Class VIII Students of SMP Negeri 1 Bone-Bone, North Luwu Regency explained that the main idea has several characteristics.

    The following are the characteristics of the main idea:

    1. The existence of main ideas is not complicated

    The existence of the main idea in a paragraph should not be convoluted. That is, the meaning of the main idea should not be narrow, but also not too broad. This is so that the reader can easily catch the main idea. In addition, this main idea will also help readers to easily understand it.

    2. Main Idea Stated Clearly

    Apart from being simple, a main idea must also be clearly written or described by the author. This is related to the location. In addition, the theme to be conveyed or the essence of the idea must also be stated clearly.

    3. Is General

    A main idea must contain something that is general in nature. This will later be pursed again. That is, a main idea can then be explained and elaborated again. The description will be more specific in the following sentences.

    4. Have Supporting Sentences

    A main idea does not necessarily stand alone in a paragraph. The main idea must have a supporting sentence or a clear idea. These supporting sentences are useful for providing further explanation regarding the previous main idea, so that the paragraph will be coherent and easy to understand.

    5. Main Idea function

    The existence of a main idea in a paragraph also has a function, for example to make it easier for the reader to find out the main idea or subject matter in a paragraph that is read. This is useful so that the essence of something conveyed in the paragraph can be conveyed. Through identifying the main idea, the reader can find out the main idea of ​​a paragraph that is read.

     

    Example of the main idea of ​​a paragraph

    Quoted from a book entitled Definitely Top Success in the 2016 SD/MI Exams , the following is an example of questions about the main ideas of paragraphs.

    Turning Used Goods into Works

    Recycling is the activity of reprocessing unused items into new works. Used items that can be recycled include drink bottles, newspapers, and rags. Recycling is done to prevent many items from being wasted.

    There are many benefits of recycling used goods, one of which can increase income. We can sell recycled handicrafts. In addition, recycling used goods can be a useful activity for children. Used items that children can recycle, such as old newspapers. The way to recycle used newspapers is quite easy, namely by soaking the torn newsprint in a bucket filled with water for a day and a night. Then, the newspaper is blended and mixed with glue. The results of recycled newspapers can be formed into various creations.

    Leftover fabrics or patchwork can be made into dolls in a multi-purpose storage area. Various ways of making dolls from patchwork can be found on the internet. You won’t have any trouble making items out of the patchwork.

    Sentence Analysis

    • The main sentence in the first paragraph: Recycling is the activity of reprocessing unused items into new works;
    • The main sentence in the second paragraph: There are many benefits from recycling used goods, one of which can increase income;
    • Main sentence in third paragraph: Leftover fabrics or rags can be made into dolls or multipurpose storage containers.

    After you can understand an example of analyzing the main idea in a paragraph, in the following, another example of questions regarding the main idea that you can use to practice will be given.

    Problem 1

    The focus of the driver in a moving vehicle is to look ahead through the windshield, not the rearview mirror. Focusing on the rearview mirror will affect the vehicle’s speed and it is not impossible to result in an accident. The use of the rearview mirror is only occasional and each time it is only used for an instant, not for a long time.

    Source: Kompas, 9 July 2007

    The main idea of ​​the paragraph above is…..

    A. The driver’s main task is to look at the windshield
    B. The use of rearview mirrors is sufficient from time to time
    C. The effect of mirrors on vehicle speed and accidents
    D. The driver must look ahead

    Answer key: A

    Problem 2

    The Jakarta – Merak Toll Road Section is Uncomfortable

    As a user of the Jakarta – Merak, Banten toll road, especially the Cikupa-Cilegon section, I really feel uncomfortable. Every day there are sections of the road that are repaired, then half of the roads are closed. As a result, traffic jams and long lines. For those who go with high punctuality, don’t expect to be on time.

    For the Cilegon-Cikupa direction, there are currently seven location points where the road sections are being repaired. The repair length varies between 1 and 2 kilometers, namely at Kilometer 74, Kilometer 65, Kilometer 56, Kilometer 51, Kilometer 49, Kilometer 44 and Kilometer 31.

    Toll roads really need to be repaired so that toll users can be comfortable, safe, without obstacles. However, the problem seems to be that the repair never ends. In the last two years there have been toll roads that have been repaired. Sometimes those that were repaired were about 100 meters, but roads that were closed were more than 0.5 kilometers. The funny thing is, the road that had been repaired a few months later cracked again.

    Is it possible for toll road repairs to be arranged in such a way so that traffic jams do not occur at multiple points at the same time? As a toll road user who has paid a high price, of course we hope that by using the toll road, the trip will be smooth.

    Source: Definitely Top Success in 2014 SD/MI Exams

    The main idea of ​​the second paragraph in the text is…..

    A. Number of damaged roads
    B. Direction of repaired roads
    C. Location of damaged roads
    D. Length of roads repaired

    Answer key: C

    Problem 4

    Fuel oil has a variety of uses. Motorcycles use pertalite fuel. Diesel-engined vehicles use diesel fuel. Airplanes use avtur as fuel. Housewives use kerosene as fuel for oil stoves.

    The main idea of ​​the paragraph is…..

    A. Use of fuel oil
    B. Various types of vehicles
    C. Household fuel
    D. Benefits of pertalite and kerosene

    Answer key: A

    Problem 5

    Traffic accidents on the highway are caused by various things. Many road users do not obey traffic rules. For example speeding, violating traffic signs, and wanting to win alone. In addition, many vehicles are not equipped with mirrors. If all road users obey the rules, traffic accidents can be reduced.

    The main idea of ​​the paragraph is…..

    A. Road traffic compliance
    B. Road traffic awareness
    C. Causes of road accidents
    D. Reducing road accidents

    Answer key: C

    That is a brief explanation of the meaning and how to determine the main idea in a paragraph. Sinaumed’s can also visit sinaumedia’s book collection at www.sinaumedia.com to obtain additional references on Indonesian writing skills. The following are recommendations for sinaumedia books that Sinaumed’s can read to study them in full. Happy reading.

    Find other interesting things in www.sinaumedia.com. sinaumedia as #FriendsWithoutLimits will always present interesting articles and recommendations for the best books for Sinaumed’s.

    Book Recommendations & Related Articles

    • What is the Main Thought? Functions, characteristics, and how to determine them
    • How to determine main ideas accompanied by examples of questions and answers
    • Examples of main ideas in paragraphs and how to define them
    • Main Idea: Definition, Characteristics, Functions, and How to Find Them
    • Understanding Main Thoughts: Functions, Types, and Examples

     

  • What is the intention of the male corpse prayer?

    The intention of praying for the body of a man – In Islam, prayer is a worship that must be carried out for Muslims. Whether it’s fard prayer or sunnah prayer, both of them will get a great reward from Allah SWT. Not infrequently, a Muslim will continue to remain silent in the mosque so as not to miss the prayer time and accompany it with dhikr. This prayer service is even still carried out until a Muslim dies. Yep, when a Muslim or Muslim woman dies, she will be prayed for as the last form of worship in her life.

    However, when it comes to reading the intentions and procedures, of course it is different between the bodies of men and women. So, what is the intention of the funeral prayer for men? What is the sequence of procedures for the male funeral prayer? What things should Muslims know about funeral prayers? So, so that Sinaumed’s understands these things, let’s look at the following review!

    What is the intention of the male corpse prayer?

    Basically, this funeral prayer will be performed for Muslims who have died, both men and women. While those who pray are Muslims who are still alive with the legal status of fardhu kifayah. At the time of the Prophet Muhammad, he never wanted to pray for the bodies of those who died in debt or due to suicide, so that those who prayed would be his people or the general public.

    As with fardhu and obligatory prayers, this funeral prayer also requires intention which of course will have a difference between the bodies of men and women. So, here are the intentions of the male funeral prayer:

    (Ushollii ‘alaa haadzal mayyiti arba’a takbirootin fardhol kifaayati ma’muuman lillaahi ta’aalaa)

    Meaning: I intend to pray over this deceased four times takbir fardhu kifayah, as a makmum because of Allah Ta’ala.

    So, what if the body is an immature boy? Of course it has the intention of praying its own body. Almost the same as the intention for the male funeral prayer, it’s just that there are slightly different readings. So, here’s a reading of his intentions.

    (Ushollii ‘alaa haadzal mayyiti tafli arba’a takbirootin fardhol kifaayati ma’muuman lillaahi ta’aalaa)

    Meaning: I intend to pray over the body of this boy four times takbir fardhu kifayah, as a makmum because of Allah Ta’ala.

    Has Sinaumed’s ever thought why we have to perform the funeral prayer when the person being prayed for has already passed away? Yep, the main purpose of carrying out the funeral prayer there are 2 things, namely praying that the corpse will be forgiven for its sins so that the burden of tormenting the grave will also be reduced and praying for the corpse so that its dignity will be elevated in the afterlife. Even though he has died physically, his spirit will live in the afterlife which will happen to everyone who lives in this world.

    Sequence of Procedures for Men’s Bodily Prayer

    In carrying out the funeral prayer, there are several pillars that must be carried out so that the prayer becomes valid before Allah SWT. In the fiqh book by Sheikh Muhammad Nawawi al-Bantani, he briefly explains the pillars that must be carried out in the funeral prayer, namely there are 7 pillars.

    1. Intentions

    This intention will be pronounced depending on the identity of the corpse. If the corpse is of an adult male who has reached puberty, then the intention to read is the reading of the intention previously explained. This intention will be recited in the heart only and must be carried out simultaneously with the implementation of takbiratul ihram. It’s the same when we are doing fardhu prayers in congregation.

    2. Stand up for those who are able

    Yep, in the funeral prayer there are pillars in the form of having to do it standing up, especially for those who can afford it. This is because this funeral prayer is fardhu prayer, namely fardhu kifayah, so it must be done standing up. However, for those who are unable to stand due to certain circumstances, it may still be done by sitting. The provisions are the same as performing the five daily obligatory prayers in general.

    3. Takbiratul Ihram 4 Times

    During the funeral prayer, if takbiratul ihram is not performed 4 times, then the prayer becomes invalid. It is sunnah when reading this takbiratul ihram, our hands are raised at the level of the shoulders. Exactly the same when carrying out the five daily prayers.

    4. Reading Al-Fatihah After the First Takbir

    After pronouncing the first takbiratul ihram, then immediately read surah Al-Fatihah. It’s good when reading Al-Fatihah, just lower his voice. That is, the sound of his reading was still heard by himself, even though at that time the funeral prayer was held at night.

    It is also recommended that before reading surah Al-Fatihah, read ta’awwudz first (according to qaul ashah/strongest opinion). However, it is not sunnah to read the iftitah prayer, right… because the funeral prayer should be done in a nutshell.

    5. Reading the Prophet’s Salawat After the Second Takbir

    So, after the second takbiratul ihram, immediately recite the shalawat. The recitation of salawat which is sufficient for the validity of the funeral prayer is as follows:

    Meaning: O Allah, bestow mercy on the Prophet Muhammad.

    6. Reading the prayer for the body after the third Takbir

    There are many prayers for the corpse that can be recited after the third takbiratul ihram. If you want to be brief, it is enough in the form of: “Allahummagh firlahu warhamhu wa’aafihi wa’fu anhu ..”

    However, if you want a specific prayer for a corpse, then it can be,

    It means: “O Allah! Forgive him (the corpse) give mercy to him, save him (from some things that are not liked), forgive him and place him in a glorious place (Heaven), widen his grave, bathe him in snow and ice water. Cleanse him from all mistakes, as You clean a white shirt from dirt, give a better house than his house (in the world), give a better family (or wife in Heaven) than his family (in the world), wife (or husband) who is better than his wife (or husband), and put him in Heaven, protect him from the torments of the grave and Hell.”

    5. Read the Prayer Again After the Fourth Takbir

    The prayer in this order is for the body and those who pray for it, recited after the fourth takbiratul ihram. The prayer can be:

    It means:

    “O Allah, do not forbid our request for its virtue and do not allow us to be overwritten by slander after its absence and forgive us and him as well as our partners who were formerly believers and do not instill feelings of jealousy into our hearts towards those who believe. Our Lord, verily, You are gracious and merciful.”

    6. Greetings

    This greeting is done by turning to the right and left with the reading:

    Meaning: “May the safety, mercy, and blessings of Allah remain upon you all.”

    Things You Should Know About the Funeral Prayer

    All worship in Islam should not be done haphazardly. There are so many things that must be understood especially in this funeral prayer, starting from the pillars, the law of implementation, the virtues, to the position of the priest who leads the implementation.

    Law of the Corpse Prayer

    The law of carrying out the funeral prayer is basically Fardhu Kifayah. That is, if some Muslims do it, then other Muslims will be released from that responsibility. However, if there is no one to carry it out, then all Muslims in the region will bear the sin. This has been said by Allah to what is contained in QS. At-Tauba verse 84,

    Meaning: “… And do not you (Muhammad) pray for someone who dies among them (hypocrites), forever and do not you stand (pray) over his grave. Verily, they disbelieved in Allah and His Messenger and they died in a state of wickedness.”

    In this verse, it is clear that Allah SWT forbids Muslims to pray over the bodies of infidels. This shows that praying for believers is a law that has been prescribed. In addition, the implementation of the funeral prayer can also be done at any time and can be done by women. Even if there are several corpses that died simultaneously, it is also permissible to pray together.

    The Virtue of Performing the Funeral Prayer

    Carrying out the funeral prayer, of course, has its virtues, in accordance with the words of the Prophet Muhammad, who promised a great reward for those who pray for the body. In a hadith from Abu Hurairah ra, Rasulullah SAW once said,

    Meaning: “Who prays for the corpse, then returns home before being buried, he returns with the reward of one qirath.” (Narrated by Bukhari 47)

    The main objective of the funeral prayer is to pray for good and ask for forgiveness for the sins that the corpse has committed during its lifetime. That is why, it is recommended to increase the number of people participating in the funeral prayer. The more people who participate in the funeral prayer, the greater the chance that the prayer will be answered by Allah SWT. This was also expressed by Rasulullah SAW, he said that,

    Meaning: “If there is a dead person who is prayed for by 100 Muslims, and all of them intercede (pray for good) for the body, then their prayer will be granted.” (Narrated by Muslim 947)

    Moreover, if the people who participate in the funeral prayer are good believers, who always believe in the monotheism of Allah SWT in all their worship, then of course their prayers will have a better chance of being accepted. This was disclosed from Ibn Abbas ra that the Prophet Muhammad SAW once said,

    Meaning: “If a Muslim dies and is then prayed over by 40 people, for whom they do not associate anything with Allah, then Allah will grant their intercession.” (Narrated by Muslim 948).

    The pillars of the funeral prayer

    Basically, the pillars of the funeral prayer are the same as the procedures for carrying out the funeral prayer, yes… namely in the form of,

    1. Intention
    2. Stand up for those who can
    3. Read takbiratul ihram four times
    4. Read Al-Fatihah after the first takbiratul ihram
    5. Read blessings on the Prophet Muhammad SAW after the second takbiratul ihram
    6. Read a prayer for the corpse after the third takbiratul ihram
    7. Read prayers for the bodies and those who pray for them after the fourth takbiratul ihram
    8. Read greetings to the right and to the left

    The position of the Imam in carrying out the funeral prayer

    Actually, there are 2 opinions regarding the position of the priest in carrying out this funeral prayer.

    1. Al-Hanafiyah: Chest of the Corpse

    In this opinion, it is revealed that the position of the priest must be right at the chest of the corpse, without distinguishing between male and female corpses. This is because the chest is the place of the priest. This intercession has been narrated by Ibn Masud ra.

    2. Al-Malikiyah

    Meanwhile, this opinion differentiates the position of the priest based on the gender of the corpse to be prayed over. On a male corpse, the position of the priest will be standing in the middle of the corpse. Meanwhile, if it is a woman’s corpse, then the position of the priest will be standing at the shoulder area of ​​the corpse.’=

    Source:

    Sarwat, Ahmad. (2018). Fiqh of the Body Prayer . South Jakarta: Fiqh Publishing House.

    Also Read!

    • Procedure for the Implementation of the Funeral Prayer
    • Definition of the Book of Safinatun Najah and its contents
    • Reading the Verse of the Chair and 12 of its Virtues in Life
    • The Best Hours For Midnight Prayers
    • The Virtue of Surah Al-Ikhlas for Life
    • Prayer List For People Who Have Died
    • The Meaning and Benefits of Grave Pilgrimage
    • Translations, Virtue and Acts of Surah Al-Lahab
    • 6 Legal Requirements for the Implementation of Friday Prayers
    • 5 Prayers For Mothers Who Have Passed Away
  • What is the function of the intercooler in a car, how it works, and how to treat it!

    What is the function of the intercooler in a car, how it works, and how to treat it!

    Intercooler Function – After we previously provided information about the function of a turbocharger engine in a four-wheeled diesel engine, the information that we will provide further in this discussion is to discuss other components, namely, the intercooler .

    In general, the turbo intercooler is known as a car component whose function is to cool the air released by the turbo engine. The air at the turbo inlet is maximally cooled in the form of a radiator which is equipped with a cooling grid. Therefore, this component is usually placed on the front of the car which is exposed to the wind directly from the front.

    An intercooler is a tool or component that is similar to a car radiator but has a different function. If the radiator must cool the water, the inter-radiator itself is responsible for cooling the air produced by the turbo engine before entering the combustion chamber.

    For those of you, especially Sinaumed’s friends, who want to know more about the meaning of an intercooler and want to know its functions and how it works on a machine, in this discussion we have summarized information related to the intercooler here.

    Furthermore, we have summarized the discussion and can be listened to below!

    What is an Intercooler?

    An intercooler is a mechanical device used to cool fluids, including liquids and gases, between stages of a multi-phase heating process, usually a heat exchanger that removes waste heat in a gas compressor. Used in a wide range of applications including air compressors, air conditioners, refrigerators, gas turbines, passenger car engines, trucks, buses, etc.

    Widely recognized in the automotive world as an air-to-air or air-to-liquid (turbocharger or supercharger) induced intercooler in internal combustion engines to increase their volumetric efficiency by increasing the charge density of the incoming air to close to isobaric cooling density.

    The intercooler increases the efficiency of the intake system by reducing the intake heat generated by the supercharger or turbocharger and promotes more thorough combustion. This removes the heat of compression (i.e. increase in temperature) that occurs when increasing pressure or increasing unit mass (density) in any gas.

    Turbochargers and superchargers are designed to push more air mass into the intake manifold and engine combustion chamber. Intercooling is a method used to compensate for heating due to compression, which is a natural by-product of the semi-adiabatic compression process. An increase in barometric pressure can cause the intake port to overheat, which greatly reduces compression efficiency due to reduced density. An increase in intake temperature can also increase the temperature of the combustion cylinders, causing explosions or thermal damage to the engine block.

    Turbocharger (turbo) is an additional component that increases engine power without increasing the engine cylinder capacity (cc). The turbo uses the torque generated by the exhaust gases to add air into the cylinder.

    There, when the turbo kicks in, the air pressure rises, and so does the temperature. This heating of the intake air is bad for the engine. First, raise the temperature of the combustion chamber. Second, heat causes the air to expand, so that the density of air decreases. Coolant is needed here as a counterweight. The intercooler is a heat exchanger, like a radiator, but not for cooling the engine coolant, but for cooling the air that passes through it. Lowering the intake temperature has two advantages: a lower combustion chamber temperature and a higher air density, which allows more air to enter the cylinder.

    Intercooler function

    The Turbo Intercooler is actually placed in front of the engine, not just for display or to make it look cool, but actually has quite an important function.

    As is known, the air drawn in and pushed out by the turbo turbine produces a higher air temperature.

    The intercooler plays an important role in boosting the turbo system’s combustion process, which increases engine power. The turbo-intercooler’s job is to reduce the temperature of hot air before it reaches the engine’s combustion chamber. Intercoolers usually have aluminum material where this material can conduct heat faster than ordinary iron.

    In colder weather, it definitely has a positive effect on the engine. The more air molecules that enter the engine, the better the car’s performance. One of the Hyundai cars, NEW SANTA FE, is equipped with variable geometry turbo (VGT) technology. In VGT, the turbine has a shape that can change depending on the amount of air passing through it. In this way, turbo lag is reduced and turbo power is also maintained.

    Thanks to these components, you can feel wild engine power, but still optimal in turbocharged cars. With combined intercooler Intercooler cools the air leaving the turbo to operate. The intercooler cools the hot air coming from the turbo so that cooler air can enter the engine room.

    Without the air intercooler it gets hot so it’s not perfect, performance doesn’t increase much either. This intercooler works according to the principles of thermodynamics. Convection and induction occur inside the intercooler, transferring heat from the movement of the fluid. The intercooler structure itself consists of tubes with fins between them for cooling.

    How Do Intercoolers Work?

    The intercooler works as a function that cools the air released by the car’s turbo. The air released by the hot turbo is cooled by this radiator so that the air entering the engine room is cooled by passing through this radiator. This way of working itself works by applying the principles of thermodynamics. Convection and induction exist in heat transfer caused by a moving fluid. The shape of the radiator itself is made of tubes and has fins to cool the car faster.

    Like a car radiator, the location of the intercooler is in front of and under the car. The cooling arrangement in this section is designed so that the cabin air is cooled by air when the car is moving. Not all or all repair shops can service this radiator for this intercooler service.

    Turbo intercoolers work by compressing and increasing the density of air before it reaches the engine cylinders. By pushing more air into each cylinder, the engine can burn proportionately more fuel.

    This compression process generates heat and increases the temperature of the air entering the engine. Unfortunately, as the air heats up, its density also changes, reducing the amount of oxygen available to each cylinder and affecting performance. The intercooler prevents this process by cooling the air so that the engine gets more oxygen.

    According to the operation of the diesel engine, the turbo-intercooler also follows the principle of thermodynamics. Convection and induction occur inside the intercooler, transferring heat from the movement of the fluid. The intercooler structure itself consists of tubes with fins between them for cooling. The position of the intercooler is in front of the base, like the radiator. The intercooler is cooled by air while the vehicle is running.

    Because the role of the turbo intercooler is very important in the car, it is very important for you to carry out routine maintenance yourself at home. All you need to do is check the connecting pipe between the turbo pipe and the intercooler. Because high air pressure can cause leaks at the intercooler joints.

    Actually, the operation of the intercooler is very simple, namely to cool the compressed air produced by the turbo engine, which is initially hot (high) and then directs it to the intercooler network. In addition, the air flowing inside the grill is cooled by the wind passing through the intercooler grill.

    So that the initially hot air becomes cold, causing the cooled air particles to condense, so that when the air is fed into the combustion chamber, the resulting compression is much greater than the air from a turbo engine which is not cooled by an intercooler.

    High engine compression increases the power produced, so fuel economy also increases and car engines produce less polluting gases, because high compression makes the combustion process more complete, namely. no fuel left. burning because the oxygen needs of the engine combustion process are met.

    Intercooler Location

    The location of the intercooler in the car must be in a place where free air can easily pass and usually in two different places. First, the intercooler is placed behind the front bumper of the vehicle, parallel to the grille or air conditioner. capacitors, radiator grille and right in front of the intercooler grille.

    The second place is located directly behind the hood or above the car engine, for example in the Toyota Fortuner or Toyota Hilux Double cab. In these two positions, the top of the machine is easier to clean.

    Maintenance of this intercooler is quite simple because you only need to clean the intercooler grid from any adhering dirt such as dust, leaves or plastic debris that may be attached to maximize performance.

    How to Clean the Intercooler

    There are several reasons why a turbo intercooler needs to be cleaned. Over time, the vehicle’s mileage also increases, passing through various types of dirt that is dusty, highly polluted, and others.

    Extreme weather and climate conditions also affect the condition and performance of this turbo intercooler. Turbo intercoolers on vehicles that are not good can affect engine performance because they can get clogged with dirt which then causes the engine to heat up quickly. The combustion system becomes imperfect. Fuel consumption is not proportional to the power generated.

    If this continues, the spare parts for portable engine parts will wear out, or we as the vehicle owner will bear the cost of repairing the machine, as well as damage to the truck, of course, this will affect your income, which will decrease.

    One way to fix this is to clean the turbo intercooler. But the problem is that many of us don’t know how to deal with a dirty turbo intercooler. Usually you take the car to a repair shop, which of course costs money.

    To clean the intercooler, you don’t need to use strange steps, you just need to use the wind pressure that is put into the intercooler so that all dirt and dust can be cleaned. What’s more important is that you have to pay attention to when it’s time to carry out periodic servicing of your four-wheeled vehicle so that it is maintained and the engine performance is maintained.

    Another way to clean the intercooler is to remove the intercooler in its place, especially if there are other problems with the turbo engine. This intercooler can be placed in the highest place (above the engine) or behind the front bumper. Actually, anywhere where the position of the intercooler will not affect the performance of the car’s engine, only when it is installed on the front bumper, it will get dirty faster because it is exposed to road dirt and flying dust. If this happens and the intercooler becomes dirty, it will interfere with engine performance and the engine will not work optimally.

    How to clean the intercooler that is installed on the front of the front bumper will be more difficult because it requires extra effort. But it can be overcome by using wind pressure and using soap to make it cleaner. If you see rocks or insects getting into the interior of the intercooler, you can fix this by manually picking it up using a puncture or anything that can reach where the dirt is.

    If it still can’t be cleaned manually the only way is to remove the front bumper and clean the intercooler afterwards. However, this method will take a long time and be inconvenient, so you need to take it to a repair shop to ask for help from a more professional person.

    How to clean the intercooler that is mounted above the engine hood will usually be easier because its position is easier to reach. The only thing that needs to be done is to clean the intercooler cover only and then clean it with the help of a damp cloth. And, don’t forget to also clean the scoop part which becomes the water cavity or can be cleaned by removing the engine cover by opening the clip holder.

    In this method, you don’t need water to clean the intercooler, you only need enough wind pressure to clean the remaining dirt, rocks, dust, and other debris that is in your car’s engine intercooler. And, it should be noted that do not use high water pressure so that the wing intercooler is not damaged.

    Another Way to Clean the Intercooler Using Cleaning Liquid

    • Place the suction tube in the cleaning bottle.
    • Place the insert button
    • Choose the appropriate tube size so that we can reach the gaps or parts around the turbo intercooler for maximum reach.
    • When the cleaning liquid has run out, let stand for half an hour then wash.

    After cleaning the turbo intercooler, heat circulation inside the vehicle becomes optimal and the engine operating temperature is normal, thereby saving time and effort. This is one way to thoroughly clean the turbo intercooler using a special cleaning fluid. Using such liquids saves time and effort in cleaning and can reach those hard to reach places.

    Conclusion

    That’s all for a brief discussion of what an intercooler is, its functions, benefits, and how it works. Not only knowing what an intercooler is, but also discussing functions, benefits, how it works and how to properly maintain it so that the engine is maintained.

    Knowing what an intercooler is for automotive enthusiasts is very useful to find out how the intercooler works on their four-wheeled vehicles, whether it is necessary to install it and benefit from installing the intercooler. Installing an intercooler in your car’s engine has a positive impact so that your car’s engine does not heat up quickly and can work optimally.

  • What is the definition of an SUV? Characteristics, Types, and Advantages!

    What is the definition of an SUV? Characteristics, Types, and Advantages!

    Understanding SUV Cars – For automotive enthusiasts, of course they have their own assessment of whether or not an automotive product is good, be it a two-wheeled vehicle or a four-wheeled vehicle, and so on. They are automotive enthusiasts who certainly demand the automotive industry to increasingly provide the best quality of their products.

    In this case, four-wheeled vehicles are increasingly needed considering that people’s daily activities require good and durable private vehicles to be used in their various daily activities.

    The presence of an SUV type car is a solution for consumers who want to have a family car that has a cool design but also has good quality for traveling to remote places and poor road access.

    The SUV type itself is a combination of passenger and off-road types. Therefore, an SUV is not only suitable for driving on urban roads, but also durable on rough terrain, such as rocky roads. The features of an SUV include the presence of a spare tire at the rear of the car and the use of a four WD (Four Wheels Drive) system.

    The WD drive system is equipped with all of the SUV’s wheels that can operate autonomously so the SUV can tackle even the most difficult terrain. This is what distinguishes an SUV from an MPV in terms of strength.

    Jeeps are a type of SUV type car designed to traverse all terrain, jeeps have a higher ground clearance and larger tires than MPV cars and usually only have 2 rows of seats or seat only 5 passengers, although currently there are cars with 7 seats.

    In terms of engine capacity, the engine capacity of this car is more than 1500 cc which allows this car to pass through some quite heavy roads.

    However, do you know what is meant by the SUV itself? If you want to find out more about SUVs, in this discussion, we have reviewed information about SUVs, complete with their functions, types, and advantages and disadvantages.

    Furthermore, the discussion has been presented and can be listened to below!

    What is an SUV Car?

    Sport Utility Vehicle (Indonesian: Sport utility vehicle), abbreviated SUV or nicknamed Bemo, is a classification of passenger cars, but built on a light truck body. In Indonesia, this type of car is often called a “jeep car”. In fact, Jeep is the first American SUV brand in the world, namely “Jeep”.

    In general, cars classified as SUVs are equipped with wheel drive (4×4), so they can be used for off-roading. However, many SUVs in Indonesia are not equipped with four-wheel drive (4×4). SUV brands equipped with all-moving tires (4×4) include the Toyota Land Cruiser, Jeep Wrangler, several versions of the Toyota Fortuner and Mitsubishi Pajero Sport, etc.

    A distinctive feature of an SUV is that it usually has a spare tire at the rear and has a high ground clearance. The term SUV, by definition, is synonymous with multi-car, a vehicle characterized by large bodies and very powerful engines.

    The design of this SUV itself is also generally sportier, with solid body curves that give the impression of hardiness and durability when driving on off-road and urban streets.

    Meanwhile, the engine capacity is more than 1500 cc with medium displacement, wide trunk, more complete comfort features than MPV and sturdy suspension that dampens vibrations to the maximum when driving on steep and bumpy roads.

    Of course, fully supported by fierce specifications, the price of this SUV is considered much higher than the MPV. It can even reach billions of rupiah.

    SUV Car Characteristics

    1. Strong Chassis Based on the SUV concept

    As a durable vehicle, the chassis used by this SUV is of course also very strong.

    Integrated into the ladder chassis and monocoque combination, allowing it to withstand maximum loads while maintaining the taller hull appearance. SUVs usually have a one-size-fits-all chassis and suspension. Also, some types, such as those that support off-road driving, tend to have stiffer axles that improve off-road capability.

    2.Ground clearance

    Conversely, the ground clearance or the lowest distance of an SUV is also on average higher than that of an MPV, which usually reaches 210 mm in height. This is of course a support so that the bottom of this car is safer when driving in mountainous or rural terrain that is steep and rocky.

    3. Large Diameter Tires

    Also, SUVs usually have tire diameters of 15-17 inches or more. In addition, the wheels of SUVs are usually covered with high-profile tires, which makes them durable and have a stronger grip. Ideal for target terrain when traveling on rough terrain or off-road.

    4. Relatively large body dimensions

    As a car that gives an agile impression, the body dimensions of this jeep are naturally designed with long, thick, large and masculine.

    This is certainly the hallmark of an SUV as a sports vehicle that gives the impression that it is ready to hit various road surfaces that it drives.

    In fact, the size of the body provides a much more optimal balance, which is not easy to balance when driving at high speeds.

    5. Big Fender

    The next SUV has a face with a large and dignified fender.

    The use of such a large fender certainly makes the visual image of this SUV even taller and more striking.

    6. Spacious Cabin and Tough Suspension

    Tough cars, including SUVs, are said to have a spacious and flexible passenger space to ensure comfort for their passengers.

    In fact, don’t forget that the suspension it uses is also very hard, and the relatively high shock absorption ensures maximum stability.

    Types of SUVs

    1. Compact SUVs

    Compact SUVs are commonly known as low SUVs or mini SUVs. In general, the dimensions and power are relatively smaller than other types of SUVs.

    Cars equipped with this type of compact SUV are usually designed for everyday use on city streets. Some of the cars included in this type are Daihatsu Terios, Nissan Juke, Toyota Rush, Ford Ecosport and Honda HV-R.

    2. Medium SUVs

    Medium SUV engine dimensions and power are usually larger than compact SUVs. Its rather large dimensions make the car’s interior much more comfortable and seem lighter. Several medium-size SUVs include the Nissan X-Trail, Mitsubishi Pajero, Mazda CX-5 and Toyota Fortuner.

    3. Luxury SUVs

    Enter the third type of SUV, namely the luxury SUV. This type prioritizes the beauty of car design, the latest technology and passenger comfort. Brands in the luxury SUV category include Range Rover Sport, Land Rover Discovery, Porsche Cayenne and Audi Q7.

    4. Full-size SUV

    The last type is the full-size SUV, or what is commonly called the “true SUV”. This type of full size SUV has high power and a very economical engine that requires a lot of fuel consumption. Some of the cars that fall into the full-size SUV category include the Toyota Sequoia, Nissan Armada, GMC Yukon, and Chevrolet Suburban.

    Main Functions of SUV Cars

    The main task of this type of car is to transport various types of terrain. From the smooth streets of the capital to steep and difficult roads. So do not be surprised if this car is usually used for various purposes. Or as a family car or SUV.

    Another interesting function of this car is as a tow truck. So if you have a friend whose car is damaged, you can bring him along with the Daihatsu SUV.

    If you want to use your SUV as a crane, you have to be a little careful. Especially if you want corners. Take extra care when driving. If you rush, you will cause the towed car to overturn and crash.

    Advantages of SUVs

    SUV type car has many advantages beyond its kind. Some of them are as follows:

    1. Can move in various types of terrain

    This is the main advantage of an SUV. From the start, SUVs were designed to drive on various types of terrain. From smooth roads, potholes, inclines, steep and rocky. Suitable for road conditions in Indonesia which are not completely flat.

    2. Able to transport passengers comfortably

    Apart from being difficult on different terrains, SUVs also make passengers comfortable when the car is moving. It is indistinguishable from a car seat designed in this way. So do not be surprised if this car is usually used as a family car.

    3. Holds a lot of stuff

    The advantage of this SUV also lies in its large trunk. This allows friends to transport goods in large quantities. However, you still need to be careful when storing goods in the SUV.

    It is advisable to store things right in the SUV garage. If necessary, tie the objects with string. This is done so that the object does not jump when the car brakes suddenly.

    One type of car that is currently popular is the Sport Utility Vehicle. This car is like an off-roader, but with a sporty accent. This car can be an option for friends who want to buy a special family car or a car that drives on difficult roads.

    Lack of SUVs

    Every car is designed for different needs and driving styles, so no car is perfect, including SUVs. However, there are some drawbacks that need to be considered even if you want to recommend an SUV. Here are some of the disadvantages of SUVs that you should know about.

    1. Adjusting Car Dimensions

    The large dimensions of an SUV can indeed be an advantage, but it can also be a disadvantage for those who are not used to driving it. You will need some adjustments when driving the Jeep to get used to riding the larger frame.

    Big cars can also be a problem for city drivers. This is because cars cannot move freely on the streets of the capital, for example, during traffic jams. For those who are used to driving a compact car, it will definitely take longer to get used to it.

    2. No Fuel Efficient

    SUVs usually have high-powered engines that support the car’s efficiency when facing various road challenges. However, the large engine capacity makes fuel consumption more extravagant.

    Fuel consumption is an important aspect when choosing a car, so that refueling the vehicle does not become a burden in the future, so that the car remains little used and neglected.

    Tips for Buying an SUV

    If you are confused and want to know more about what to pay attention to when buying the latest SUV, here are some tips for choosing the best SUV so you don’t lose out.

    1. Find out the intended use

    In fact, when choosing a car, the most important thing is knowing the needs or purpose of using the car purchased. Not only limited to the type of car you need, but more on the SUV you will buy, what you will use it for later. These needs will later become the basis when you choose the size of the SUV, what features it has, how much power and at what price.

    The SUV you want to use every day is different from the SUV you want to use for mountains and rough terrain. Buying a large-powered and not fuel-efficient SUV for rough terrain is very counterproductive if it is used for daily mobility needs in the city.

    2. Find the Right SUV Size

    SUVs generally come in three categories: compact, mid-size, and full-size. True to their size, each serves its own purpose for the best possible use. If the size does not meet your usage needs, it is obviously not comfortable to wear.

    For example, a compact SUV is suitable for everyday transportation. The operating system and available features are generally not too complicated, one might even say simple. Many call it a compact SUV because of its sporty nature, but it is more suitable for city driving, asphalt or less extreme terrain. If you want a passenger car, you can choose a 7-seater SUV. It’s different with mid-size and full-size SUVs. These two categories are usually large and strong to support heavy off-road terrain.

    3. Pay attention to the characteristics

    When choosing the best SUV, you must also pay attention to the characteristics of the SUV. Generally, the items offered are comparable to the variants and prices. However, each version has standard feature benchmarks.

    When choosing the best SUV, you can easily look for one with the most complete features. Notable features include ride comfort and safety features. Driving comfort features make you feel at home in the middle of a trip, while safety features help minimize the possibility of an accident.

    4. Choose the right machine

    When choosing an SUV, the most powerful engine is not always synonymous with the best SUV. Engine capacity is closely related to fuel and maintenance costs. High-powered engines require a lot of fuel, maintenance costs are even higher. Again, you have to adapt to your needs.

    If your needs are limited to daily city traffic and the occasional out-of-town escape, a mid-size or compact SUV will likely suffice. In general, these two versions only use the engine or 6 cylinders. Full-size SUVs usually have 8 cylinders. Cylinder engines are slightly less expensive to maintain than engines with large cylinders.

    5. Compare car prices based on all aspects

    The most expensive is not necessarily the best. The high price of a car could be due to the quality, features or popularity of the brand. Therefore, choosing an SUV that fits your budget is the best way. You don’t have to force yourself to buy an expensive car just because it’s a well-known brand. Many well-known brands have the same qualities as less well-known brands or even new brands.

    First, pay close attention to the four points above, then compare the type of SUV that you are interested in. Check one by one whether the price offered is good enough or too expensive. Remember that cheaper doesn’t always mean lower quality.

    Conclusion

    That’s all for a brief discussion of what an SUV is: Characteristics, types, and their advantages and disadvantages. Not only knowing what an SUV is, but also discussing the advantages, disadvantages, tips for buying it and knowing the types of cars on the market.

    Knowing what an SUV is for automotive lovers is very useful in knowing the right type of four-wheeled vehicle to become a family car at a low price and suitable for use on rough terrain when you want to travel far.

  • What is the definition of an NGO? Check out the Functions, Characteristics, and Purpose

    What is the definition of an NGO? Check out the Functions, Characteristics, and Purpose

    Understanding NGOs – In a community that wants to help the economy of the middle to lower class or become a forum for anyone who wants to channel their activities to creative ideas that are family-friendly, we will know what an NGO is, namely a Non-Governmental Organization.

    The existence of NGOs also helps when a disaster occurs, whether it befalls their members or the general public who need help. NGO itself is a non-governmental organization established with the intention of obtaining benefits from the activities they carry out together.

    NGOs also participated in voicing a number of social issues or their criticism of the government or any institution. For this reason, it is very important for Sinaumed’s friends to know what an NGO is and its functions, characteristics, types and purposes which can be additional insight for Sinaumed’s friends at home.

    You can see further discussion about the meaning of NGOs below!

    Definition of NGO

    Non-Governmental Organizations can be interpreted as organizations/institutions established by members of the public who are citizens of the Republic of Indonesia, voluntarily on their own accord and with full interest, and participate in certain activities determined by the organization/institution as a form of community participation to increase standard of living and social welfare, with an emphasis on self-help.

    It should be noted that NGOs are also organizations founded by individuals or groups of people who provide services to the community voluntarily and without profit. Therefore, the formation of this NGO is based on voluntary work without the hope of getting big profits.

    NGOs work not only voluntarily, but also based on Pancasila principles. This is of course because Indonesia is the home and development of NGOs that support Pancasila. Of course, the Pancasila precepts are always applied in all activities of non-governmental organizations in the life of society, nation and state.

    In society, non-governmental organizations/organizations have grown and developed as a gathering place for Indonesian citizens who become volunteers or are declared non-governmental organizations. The term non-governmental organizations was first recognized in Law Number 4 of 1982 concerning

    Main Provisions for Environmental Management and related to environmental issues.

    After that, NGOs have areas of action in their development that are not limited to the environment but include other areas of interest to improve living standards and social welfare both mentally and physically.

    On the one hand, the existence and freedom of participation and development for the benefit of society and the state requires a conducive climate that encourages enthusiasm, creativity and community dynamics in all fields, so that non-governmental organizations can develop independently and voluntarily. Therefore, NGOs should be promoted as government partners who provide guidance, protection and encouragement.

    Non-governmental organizations which are commonly abbreviated as non-governmental organizations are also referred to as non-governmental organizations (NGOs) in Indonesia. Internationally, this institution is referred to as a non-governmental organization (NGO). According to a 1998 UN report, there are 29,000 international non-governmental organizations, most of which were founded in the last 30 years. The existence of non-governmental organizations has its own history and background, depending on the form of the institution.

    NGO function

    Based on Regional Regulation no. 13 of 2006 concerning Communities and Community Institutions states that “The definition of Community Empowerment Institutions, hereinafter abbreviated as (LPM) is an institution, organization or forum formed on the initiative of the community as a partner of the district government in fulfilling and realizing community aspirations and needs in the field of development.

    Before it was called the Community Empowerment Institute, it used to be called the Village Community Rehabilitation Institute (LKMD). The main objective of the establishment of this organization is to strengthen community initiatives and self-help in implementing participatory development programs. In this case, community participation developed through LPPM includes planning and monitoring of development implementation at the sub-district level.

    1. Duties and functions of community empowerment institutions

    According to the Regulation of the Minister of Home Affairs Number 5 of 2007 concerning Guidelines for the Arrangement of Social Institutions, it is clearly stated that the function of village community empowerment institutions as referred to in Article 2 paragraph (1) is their responsibility. to assist the Lurah in community and community development and empowerment work. The Community Empowerment Agency to carry out the functions referred to in Article 3 paragraph (1) and paragraph (2) has the following duties and functions:

    • MISSION OF NON-governmental Organizations
    • Develop participatory development plans.
    • Mobilize community support.
    • Development implementation and management

    Next, Bastian summarizes Ismail Haddad’s comments on the role of NGOs according to their functions, namely:

    2. Provide motivation

    The function of NGOs is to motivate, explore potential, develop and expand people’s awareness of the problems they face and their environment;

    3. As a Communicator

    The function of NGOs is also to act as a communicator, observing, recording and channeling the aspirations and needs of the community to be used as a reference in the process of formulating policies and planning development programs as well as monitoring the development process.

    Carry out community development policies and programs, and explain to the community about development programs in a language that the community can understand, and establish partnerships between NGOs that have the same interests and goals;

    4. Strategy and Innovation Developer

    As a developer of various strategies and innovations, as well as managing an organization that is not well known in the community;

    5. As a Facilitator

    Acting as a facilitator, namely providing various technical assistance in program implementation, such as funding, working capital, equipment, etc., according to the needs of the community.

    NGO Characteristics

    In order to get to know these NGOs well, it is first necessary to know the characteristics of these NGOs. So, here are the characteristics of an NGO that you need to know.

    • NGOs are not government, bureaucratic or state organizations.
    • Not all activities organized by NGOs are aimed at achieving certain benefits.
    • All activities and activities organized by NGOs are solely for the benefit of the community and not for the personal interests of NGO members.
    • The legal basis is in Law no. 16 of 2001 on the basis.

    Objectives NGO Established

    NGOs promote their cause by carrying out activities such as advocacy and voicing issues. For example, they lobby and persuade the public to pay more attention to the issues they are trying to address, such as gender inequality and wildlife protection. On the other hand, they also try to persuade, request or pressure the government to act on the issues they raise.

    As well as advocacy and awareness raising, they can also provide services such as legal aid and counseling to assist those in legal, economic or social difficulties. They can also provide microfinance or help lift households out of poverty by encouraging them to become small entrepreneurs.

    Although independent from the government, some NGO work can also support government efforts, for example related to development, education, health and humanitarian programs. In addition, they help the government successfully implement these programs, at least by providing constructive criticism.

    John Clark describes the characteristics of NGOs in terms of realizing their goals as follows:

    • Serving the needy and poor groups
    • Encouraging open public participation in the policy implementation process
    • Develop useful initiatives and solve problems. Sometimes these innovations raise objections to government policies.
    • Implementation programs are small in scale to make it easier to track and measure precise results and objectives.
    • There is high employee engagement when they carry broad values ​​and beliefs about the social change mission.

    Kinds of NGOs

    NGOs cover a wide range of activities. So there are several types. But, what is certain is that they are independent from the government.

    1. Blood donation organization

    Non-governmental blood donation organizations are non-governmental organizations whose aim is to provide financial and proportionate support related to donating blood to others. Examples of these NGOs are: PMI

    2. Professional organization

    An NGO in the form of a professional organization is a non-governmental organization that carries out activities based on skills and expertise in certain fields, such as the health sector, the press and legal aid.

    3. Opposition organizations

    Opposition NGOs are NGOs that carry out activities by choosing to balance government policies, for example by providing criticism, suggestions, and involvement related to monitoring the continuity of the government.

    Types of NGOs can be classified according to their directions:

    • Charity – for example, helping or meeting the needs of the less fortunate with little or no active involvement.
    • Empowerment – ​​for example, helping the poor by actively pulling them out of poverty through designed programs, such as developing home businesses.
    • Services – providing essential public services such as health care and education.

    Another classification based on the field of activity, can be based on:

    • Community – serves a specific population within a narrow geographic area of ​​a country.
    • National – operate and provide services with national coverage.
    • International – operate internationally, cover more than one country, usually based in developed countries.

    Then, depending on the objective, the NGO can:

    • NGO Advocacy – aims to influence policy or practice to defend or promote a particular cause.
    • Active non-governmental organization – aims to design and implement projects to provide services.

    What is an international NGO?

    International Non-Governmental Organizations (INGOs) are non-governmental organizations that have an international scope.

    They are not formed by agreements between governments like other international bodies such as the International Labor Organization (ILO). The following are examples of international NGOs:

    • Junior Achievement – ​​focuses on education by equipping students with academic programs related to financial literacy, entrepreneurship and work readiness.
    • Human Rights Watch – conducts human rights research and advocacy, and urges all parties to respect human rights by pressuring governments, businesses and policy makers to condemn human rights abuses.
    • Amnesty International – an international human rights NGO and advocate for the rights of women, children, minorities and indigenous peoples; End torture, abolish death penalty and refugee rights. The main target is the government.
    • Greenpeace – an international NGO specializing in environmental issues. It advocates for environmental issues and develops solutions for Earth’s sustainability, including voices on climate change, biodiversity, eco-friendly economic activities, and quantity of renewable energy.

    NGO example

    To perfect your knowledge of NGOs, it’s a good idea to listen to some examples of NGOs, including the following.

    1. YLBHI

    The first example of an NGO is YLBHI which stands for Legal Aid Indonesia which is an NGO that provides legal assistance to people in need.

    2. Contrast

    Kontras or the Commission for Disappearances and Victims of Violence is a non-governmental organization that helps victims of violence and those who are considered missing.

    3. Elsam

    Elsam or the Community Research and Advocacy Institute is a non-governmental organization that provides advocacy and related research support to people in need.

    4. PBHI

    PBHI or the Indonesian Association of Legal Aid and Human Rights is one example of an NGO in Indonesia that focuses on providing legal assistance to people who have experienced violence or have been victims of violence, some crimes.

    Information about NGOs or non-governmental organizations can provide insight and knowledge for those of you, especially those who are looking for all information about NGOs

    NGO Funding Sources

    Donations are generally the main source of funding for NGOs. Other sources are membership fees or sales of goods and services. Donors can come from charities, private non-profit organizations, local organizations, international organizations and private donations. The latter usually represent a significant portion of NGO funding.

    However, although they are called NGOs, i.e. independent from the government, some NGOs also depend on government grants, such as Oxfam, an NGO that works to reduce equality of grievances to end poverty and injustice.

    As not-for-profit organizations, NGOs rely on a variety of funding sources, including:

    • Membership fee
    • Personal Contribution
    • selling goods and services
    • allowance

    Although independent from the government, some NGOs rely heavily on public funding. Some large NGOs may have multi-million or billion-dollar budgets. On the other hand, start-up NGOs will have very little funding.

    How Important is the Role of NGOs?

    Why are there so many NGOs? As the world becomes more global and technology makes communication easier, more and more people are becoming aware of issues affecting others.

    At the same time, people are losing faith in government institutions and their ability to meet people’s needs, both at home and around the world. More NGOs is a natural result. There are tens of thousands of NGOs operating today, but are they really helping? A number of NGOs have certainly received negative press in recent years, challenging the idea that these organizations have better aims.

    But overall, it appears that NGOs are making a big positive difference. While not perfect, NGOs are very important and vehicles for positive change.

    Conclusion

    This is a brief discussion of the definition of an NGO. The discussion this time does not only discuss the definition of an NGO, but also discusses further how the functions, characteristics, types, and examples of these NGOs can be studied carefully.

    Understanding the meaning of NGOs gives us additional knowledge about the various social institutions that exist in society in Indonesia as well as on an international scale which have a positive purpose and can help people without discrimination or looking at the existing social strata.

  • What is the Definition and Duties of Business Development in the Company?

    What is the Definition and Duties of Business Development in the Company?

    Definition of Business Development – Business or commerce is the activity of trading goods or services with the aim of making a profit. In economics, a business is an organization that sells goods or services to consumers or other businesses, for a profit. Historically the word business came from English business, from the word busy which means “busy” in the context of individuals, communities or society. In a sense, busy doing activities and work that brings profit.

    In a capitalist economy, where most businesses are privately owned, businesses are formed to earn profits and increase the wealth of their owners. The owners and operators of a business are rewarded according to the time, effort or capital they provide. However, not all businesses pursue profits like this, for example cooperative businesses that aim to improve the welfare of all its members or government institutions that aim to improve people’s welfare. This business model contrasts with socialistic systems, where large businesses are mostly owned by the government, the general public, or unions.

    Etymologically, business means a situation where a person or group of people are busy doing work that generates profits. The word “business” itself has three usages, depending on the scope — the singular use of the word business can refer to a business entity, namely a juridical (legal), technical, and economic entity that aims to make a profit or profit. Broader usage could refer to a specific market sector, for example the “television business”. The broadest use refers to all the activities carried out by the community providing goods and services. But the exact definition of “business” is still a matter of debate today.

    Basic Forms of Business Ownership

    While the forms of business ownership vary from country to country, there are several forms that are considered common:

    1. Sole Proprietorship

    A sole proprietorship is a business owned by one person. Owners of sole proprietorships have unlimited liability for company assets. This company is managed individually and has full responsibility for the continuity of the company and its capital comes from its own. Usually individual companies have advantages and disadvantages.

    2. Fellowship

    A partnership is a form of business in which two or more people work together to operate a company for profit. Just like a sole proprietorship, each partner (partnership member) has unlimited responsibility for the company’s assets. Guild can be grouped into a limited partnership and the firm.

    3. Company

    A corporation is a business whose ownership is held by several people and is supervised by a board of directors. Each owner has limited liability for company property.

    4. Cooperative

    Cooperatives are businesses whose members are cooperative people or legal entities with the basis of their activities based on cooperative principles as well as a people’s economic movement based on the principle of kinship. Cooperative aims to improve the life of its members. The main characteristic of cooperatives that differentiates them from other business entities is that cooperative members have multiple identities. Dual identity means that cooperative members are owners and users of cooperative services.

    Do you have good communication skills? Interested in the world of business? Like interacting with new people? Maybe business development (BD) is the right job for you.

    What, really, is the job of a business development? Come on, see the explanation below.

    What is Business Development?

    Some people still think that BD is the job of a salesperson. In fact, the reality is not so. According to Forbes, BD is a process of creating long-term value for a company through customers, markets and business relationships.

    I mean this, BD is the person responsible for finding ways so that the interaction of the three channels (customers, markets, and business relations) can create opportunities for the company to continue to grow.

    Long-term value or what is commonly called long-term value itself is simply money, profit, image, or whatever is the main goal of a developing company. However, the person in charge of business development is not just trying to make as much profit as possible in a short time.

    They also have to think about strategies and tactics in the long term for the development of the company. In other words, a BD must rotate money continuously so that the company is always profitable.

    The Role of Business Development in the Company

    The position of business development is very important for the company’s long-term business continuity. A company must be able to adapt to market demands by conducting business development.

    Business development includes market research, improving and maintaining relationships with new potential customers, identifying and creating potential business opportunities. Therefore, a BD must be able to make a business strategy.

    Business Development Factors in Making Strategy

    1. Customers

    Without customers, there will be no growing business. A BD must be able to read what problems are being experienced by customers, what they need, what value they are looking for.

    It could be that customers really consider packaging when buying, or are more concerned with the quality of goods. This must be identified by a BD to then be able to respond to changing customer needs.

    2. Market

    A product definitely has its own target market, but this target is dynamic. A BD has a duty to find new target markets and adapt their products to be accepted in that market.

    Consumer behavior can be formed based on geographical location, demographics and psychographics. For example, the Javanese people, especially Yogyakarta and Solo, like sweet-tasting food because of the large supply of sugar in Java during the colonial era. BD can see this as an opportunity to develop sweet-tasting food products to target customers in Central Java, Yogyakarta and East Java.

    3. Relationships

    Companies must be able to build good relationships between customers, clients, business partners, and investors. Without a relationship a business will not be able to develop and tend not to last long. BD is here to help build trust, image and mutually beneficial relationships. The goal is that the company’s relationship can run in the long term and sustainably.

    Tasks Performed A Business Development

    How? Are you familiar with Business Development? Now it’s time to discuss the tasks that a BD performs within a company.

    1. Monitoring Market Developments

    A BD is in charge of monitoring developments and existing market competition. So that he can see prospects for making product development strategies, new customers and partnerships.

    2. Research to Determine the Target Market

    BD is also responsible for clearly defining new target markets before adapting them to the product you want to develop. It is intended that the products made can be right on target and become a solution to customer problems.

    3. Understand the Company’s Products

    BD is also required to understand all of the company’s products/product knowledge complete with its advantages, features, raw materials to the processes carried out.

    4. Coordinate with other divisions to develop products

    Of course a BD also needs other divisions to support its performance. Starting from Sales, Marketing to Account Manager.

    5. Developing and Presenting Business Development Strategies

    BD is also in charge of designing various strategies related to business development. Such as strategies to increase customer loyalty, find new customers, partnership strategies, sales to monitor performance indicators. Because of that BD must have the ability in presentation, sales, and making agreements related to the strategy that has been prepared.

    The difference between Business Development and Sales

    Many consider BD’s work the same as sales. In fact these two jobs are different. People in business development are tasked with advancing a company with its business development strategy. For example by developing new markets, selling subsidiaries to other companies, and the like.

    The job of a sales development also aims to increase profits for the company. However, sales development is more responsible for cooperation or purchasing contracts, handling prospects, and providing demonstrations of the products being sold.

    Sales development is more focused on the products being sold and profit from these sales. Even though these jobs are different, the two are related, you know! Sales could have entered into the business development section.

    With the same goal of making a profit, they can work together to exchange strategies in order to achieve the targets expected by the company. Imagine if the BD task was done alone without sales, maybe the development achieved by the company would not be maximized.

    Business Development Responsibilities

    Have you got a little enlightenment about the work of BD? Well, now is the time to find out what BD’s work and responsibilities are:

    • Do market research.
    • Look for new customer opportunities and maintain relationships between customers or clients.
    • Collaborate with other divisions to meet market or client needs.
    • Develop and present the company’s business development plan.
    • Conduct research on the company’s business development on a regular basis.
    • Understand the company’s products, competitors, and business position in the market.
    • Work closely with the sales department to get promising new prospective clients or customers.

    Skills Required A Business Development

    Interested in becoming a BD or even want to swerve to become a BD? Check out the skills needed by a BD below:

    1. High Motivation

    Becoming a BD requires high motivation and discipline at work. A BD should not give up easily and be able to meet targets within limitations and deadlines.

    2. Management

    With a very diverse task focus, the ability to manage time and priorities must also be owned by a BD. A BD must also be smart in managing the resources available to the team and the company so that they can support business growth.

    3. Communication

    Not only working behind the scenes, a BD must also have good communication skills. The reason is, they have to communicate with potential customers, clients, teams, and also present in front of colleagues or clients.

    4. Marketing

    Not only with sales, BD also works a lot with the marketing division to promote the brand. Therefore, a BD should also have basic skills in marketing.

    5. Negotiation

    In his work, a BD will be faced with negotiating with existing clients or potential clients who have the potential to work with the company. Well, in this case a BD must hone skills in negotiating so that all projects are successful.

    6. Data Analysis

    There will be a lot of data that must be analyzed by a BD. From monthly sales growth data, investor data, client data, to also data from competitors that need to be analyzed and studied. This is where accuracy and data analysis skills are needed. Data is not just writing, you know! A lot of data contains image patterns, numbers, number patterns, and even mathematical operations.

    A BD must also be able to compile data and present it to superiors in language that is easy to understand. If you are confident in your data analysis skills, you may be a great fit to work in business development.

    7. Project Management

    Working to develop a business is indeed a complex and high-risk thing. Becoming a BD requires high responsibility because the company depends on your fate.

    In becoming a BD, you must be prepared to face all the best and worst possibilities. You have to handle not only projects, but teamwork, team support, and problem solving. In this case, leadership needs to be instilled in your mind so that all the projects you lead can run smoothly and be in harmony with the team.

    How to Become a Business Development Associate

    If you are interested in becoming a bizdev, here’s how to become a business development:

    1. Look for Internship Experience

    In order to make it easier to get a job as a business development person, internship experience is needed. With an internship, you can learn earlier from previous companies about their business models and learn from seniors.

    Nowadays, many companies are opening internship vacancies for business development. You can search on job vacancy sites with the keyword business development internship. One of the job vacancy sites that you can use is LinkedIn.

    2. Keep Up-to-Date with New Developments

    To become a reliable business developer, extensive knowledge of all aspects of the business industry is required. Always update your knowledge by reading economic news, technological developments and also industry. Develop knowledge of marketing, accounting, or management so that it can help you in your future work.

    3. Prepare CV

    To get the first job, of course, you need a Curriculum Vitae (CV) to apply for a job. A good business development CV should be written in a way that highlights your abilities and accomplishments. If this is the first time you have made a CV to apply for a business development job, you can see an example CV below for reference.

    Business Development Manager Career Path

    The senior level of the Business Development Manager position is to become VP Business Development or Director of Business Development – EKRUT. However, the career journey to become a Business Development Manager is not easy to achieve. To get to this point you can start a career as Customer Service, Sales or Marketing. Only after having a lot of experience, you can become a Business Development Representative. From Business Development Representative then the next career path is Business Development Manager.

    At the senior level, there are several positions that you can get, including being the Vice President of Business Development or becoming the Director of Business Development. By knowing some of the qualifications above, now you have a clear picture of the role and duties of a Business Development Manager, right?

    Business Development Manager Career Projection 2022

    Quoted from Forbes, currently, many businesses are looking for ways to recover from financial losses suffered in the past year and successfully transition to “The Next Normal” – a term that refers to the emerging post-pandemic era created by McKinsey.

    This begs the question: How can organizations strategize for growth and prepare their Business Development teams to better understand and align with their goals.

    Therefore, career projections for 2022 for Business Development Managers are still a crucial point to maintain the company. The most sought-after candidates are candidates with the ability to innovate and adapt in the new normal era.

    The position of Business Development Manager must understand the changing situation, so that the company will be better prepared in articulating issues for future plans and preparing business plans while still thinking ahead.

  • What is the Code? Understanding and Its Application in a Story

    What is the Code? Understanding and Its Application in a Story

    Koda – Do you like reading fiction books or novels with beautiful stories, deep moral messages, and unexpected endings ? It turns out that there are indeed many novels and fictional stories that have all of these criteria. For example, stories written by top writers such as Tere Liye, Dee Lestari, Andrea Hirata, which have so many moral messages contained in each of their works.

    Or other works by foreign writers such as Matt Haig, Stephanie Meyer, Cho Nam Joo, and Keigo Higashino who write a lot of dramatic to dystopia stories that always make the reader feel a roller coaster. Of all types and genres of writing, all of them have a moral message and stories that end beautifully.

    So that makes us realize that there are so many interesting elements contained in it. In fact, if we pay attention to these talented writers, they really need a number of intrinsic elements that should be in a story. So that it can give birth to a beautiful story and leave an impression on the hearts of its readers.

    Know the Code and Its Functions

    When we are reading a story, whether it is a short story or a novel, we are aware that there are a number of intrinsic elements contained in it. Of the many elements that exist in a story, such as plot, characters, background and setting, there are also elements that we often forget.

    Coda is an important part of the intrinsic elements of a story, which not many people are aware of its presence. The role of the coda itself is almost always present and can help us conclude a story.

    You may have heard the term coda, but you still don’t understand what the definition of coda is and its application in a story. Let’s check out the following reviews!

    Definition of the Code

    Coda is an element contained in the story, which contains the message or message to be conveyed by the story. The coda is generally placed at the end of a story or novel.

    The existence of this coda is also able to help the reader have a clear conclusion from the whole story. However, not all stories automatically have a coda with a clear ending. Some stories often deliberately end with plots that hang or still leave new questions. Where the reader must conclude for himself how the conclusion and the end.

    But that doesn’t mean that this type of story doesn’t have a coda at the end, usually the coda remains to be the conclusion of the story as a whole, regardless of how it ends . Therefore, the role of this coda is important to give more value to the story, so that it can attract more readers.

    Writers will also usually give a mandate or message about an issue that they raise in a story that is spread throughout the story. However, the essence and final conclusion of the message is contained in the coda.

    The coda is also usually the answer to all of the readers’ questions that arise throughout the story. Especially in stories with the horror or detective genre that have a lot of suspense throughout the story, the answer will be given at the end of the story as well as the moral message that the writer wants to convey.

    Code function

    As with the definition of the coda itself, the function of the coda is to convey the moral message or message of the whole story. So that when reading the story, the reader is able to understand what the author wants to convey through his work.

    The message contained in this coda is also the hope of the author who is expected to make the reader understand, so that he can take the positive side. So, it’s not surprising that many writers don’t hesitate to raise social issues, problems that have recently occurred, to satirize the political system, just to voice their ideas through writing.

    It is this idea that the author brings up later that is expected to reach every reader so that other people understand it better.

    We can take a simple example of the coda function from the fable that we used to read when we were little. As in the story of Si Kancil who likes to steal cucumbers belonging to the farmer, but in the end he gets rewarded for his actions.

    We can understand one thing from the author of this deer story, namely about the meaning that stealing is not a commendable act. So what we do always has its own consequences, including when we steal.

    From this simple story, the moral message about not stealing something that doesn’t belong to us has succeeded in getting into our minds until we grow up. So it means that the function of the coda as conveying morals and morals through the story of the deer is very successful.

    So that this coda is also commonly found in short stories for children as a form of teaching morals and educating children from an early age. This has proven to be effective in shaping our mindset and character in the future.

    Instead of having to dictate a child to act positively, telling stories with coda full of moral messages like this can actually be a more effective medium for shaping their character.

     

     

    Position of Koda in Story Structure

    The role of the coda is actually quite large considering that the coda is able to bind the reader’s feelings to a story or novel after reading it. Because, coda is able to leave a final impression that holds the hearts of its readers. Making these readers will always remember the story in that story because it is so deep and beautiful as a work.

    However, in a story, the coda does not stand alone. There’s a lot of structure that needs to be in place in a story for coda to work well when applied to stories. Here are some important structures in the story that we need to know in order to understand the position of the coda in the story.

    1. Abstraction

    Abstraction or abstract in general is a brief description of a theme, event or idea in a story. This becomes the main structure that influences the course of the plot of a story.

    Abstract can also be said as a premise that is taken to become the main idea of ​​the story. For example, in a romantic comedy novel, the writer wants to raise the premise of a poor girl who is independent meets a rich man who is arrogant.

    This is a brief abstract, which can then be developed more broadly, for example by the situation that brought the two together, the character’s background and so on.

    2. Orientation

    The next very important structure is orientation, which is the introduction of situations, characters in the story. Generally, every story written in fiction will have various types of orientation.

    This introduction includes the introduction of characters, setting of place and time, situations, issues raised to the relationship between the characters in the story. The way of introduction also varies according to the theme of the story taken.

    Usually the introduction of characters and their characterization will be described slowly and little by little. As the story progresses, several new characters will appear that have not been mentioned, or have been mentioned but have not appeared.

    In contrast to the introduction of the background which is most often introduced from the start, because for setting the time and place there is always the possibility of changing according to the flow. Generally for certain genres such as detective, criminal, thriller there will be an introduction of characterizations that are scattered throughout the story.

    So it is very likely that there is another side of the characters in the story that is only known after heading to the end of the story. This is often done in order to support the storyline and process the emotions of the readers.

    3. Complications

    The next structure is complication, where the conflict arises when entering the middle of the story to the climax. This conflict is important to exist and be made maturely so that it can bring a story to life.

    A story that has no complications will feel very flat and boring. Therefore, the existence of various conflicts is able to present varied and complex colors, so that the story will always be interesting to follow.

    The type of conflict that is embedded in a story is also very diverse and it all depends on the main idea or ideas that the author wants to raise. Conflicts can be in the form of conflict either between fellow characters or with oneself, a number of problems that seem to be starting to make it difficult for the main character in the story.

    For example, in the famous novel Little Women, the four main characters begin to experience various internal and external conflicts. Where they have to struggle to become women who follow the wishes of society or against the stereotypes that are given to them as women.

    So seeing the possibility of complications arising is what triggers character development, which in the end there will be a change in attitude. For example, from evil to a good person.

    4. Rising action

    The rising action or conflict achievement is all the piles of problems, events, and emotional turmoil that pile up into one. It is at this point that achieving conflict will feel so heavy and tiring for the main character.

    This ultimately triggers the main character to bring the storyline to the highest level. Usually a story that has reached the conflict milestone will feel as if there is no way out.

    Taking the example of the film Avengers: Endgame, the point of reaching the conflict is in the scene where all the Avengers and other superheroes have been repeatedly resisted by Thanos’ minions. The scenes that were shown many times also showed that they were all too tired, and almost wanted to give up.

    This is what then prompted Captain America to take Thor’s hammer and not long after the storyline headed for the climax of the conflict or climax.

    5. Climax

    This section becomes the climax of the conflict or often referred to as the climax, which is the culmination of a story. After the story develops from what was originally only character introduction and conflicts begin to emerge, then a story will have its peak.

    The climax of this story is the culmination of various problems that continue to arise, the inner conflicts of the main characters to all the circumstances and plots that support it. A story that has a climax like this makes readers increasingly unable to escape from the story they are reading.

    A good conflict setting and choosing a climax in the right situation will be able to make the story in the story so memorable . Like when you watch the movie Avengers: Endgame, the climax in that story is when the Avengers ensemble scene.

    At that point the audience is able to feel the power of a sentence that becomes so strong and meaningful, coupled with the continuous attacks that satisfy the audience’s thirst. This feels so right because of the correct choice of climax, and the well-plotted and successive conflict arrangements.

    So that when the peak of the conflict comes, everyone who follows the story will feel that all the previous feelings and emotions have paid off well. This climax is also referred to as a turning point, which in some stories can change the entire plot.

    6. Evaluation

    In this evaluation section, the story has reached its final part which is the bright point of every conflict and problem experienced by the characters in the story. So that it can be said in this evaluation section, the main character in the story has found a solution or a way to solve their problem.

    For example the part Thanos is finally able to defeat, with Iron Man again snapping his fingers to bring back the people who were hit by the blip .

    7. Resolution

    This resolution section can be said to be the end point of a storyline. In this last section is a number of explanations about the problem that has been completed. If it tells about a detective or criminal story, this part shows who the perpetrator is and the reasons why he committed the crime.

    Therefore, this resolution becomes an explanation and explanation that clarifies and straightens out every question that has ever occurred to readers before. This section also explains what happened to the characters and what situations changed after the events happened.

    8. Code

    As previously explained, the coda is at the very end which contains conclusions and moral messages from the journey of the main characters after experiencing a number of events.

    How does the writer want to convey a message so that we can take the best lessons from the experiences of the characters.

    Application of the Coda in Stories

    Actually the application of the coda in each type of story is fairly simple, but not all of the coda written in written stories are real. But there are several coda which are implicitly included at the end of the story.

    For example, in a novel like Harry Potter, you may not find a message of moral mandate written firmly at the end of the novel. But by following the whole storyline, and reading it to the end, you can be sure that the story contains a very clear coda about the sincerity of parents’ love for their children.

    Where in the story, true love is described as being able to defeat any evil power of magic because love itself is the most natural, magical, and powerful magic.

    But if we look at some short stories such as in legends, fables, and others, we can easily find the coda of the story in question at the end of the story. Most coda are found prominently in fables because of their purpose for children’s learning.

    For example, in the story of the mouse deer stealing the cucumber, it will be written at the end of the story that stealing is not a commendable act, so we should not be like the mouse deer who likes to steal things that don’t belong to him.

     

     

    Conclusion about the Code

    If reading a story with a plot full of tension is able to make us cry and laugh, plus a moral message that is so deep, it is indeed an interesting experience.

    This is because the coda is a place for writers to convey the message they want to convey to readers. So reading the story is not a waste.

    Through interesting media such as stories, it is hoped that the ideas and messages that the author wants to convey can be more easily understood by all readers from various different backgrounds.

    So, do you have a favorite story with the best coda? If not, then find epic fictional stories and the best moral messages at sinaumedia, okay!

  • What is the Abiogenesis Theory: Its Advantages and Disadvantages

    What is the Abiogenesis Theory: Its Advantages and Disadvantages

    Has Sinaumed’s ever asked about how this world was formed or about how humans can be born? If so, then surely you will find varied answers. If you’ve ever heard of the Big Bang theory as the beginning of the formation of the Earth, in Biology there is also a theory called the theory of abiogenesis as the theory of the beginning of the formation of living things on Earth.

    Science is always developing every day. It is not surprising that at any time there will be the possibility of discovering theories or even theories that can disprove pre-existing theories. This is due to the development of technology which also affects the development of science.

    As we understand that humans are living beings who have high curiosity. Long before there was a theory that discussed the origin of the universe, namely based on the big bang theory, humans themselves had thought about how living things appeared on this Earth. No wonder there are many opinions about the origin of living things. One of them is the theory of abiogenesis. But, what exactly is the theory of abiogenesis? Let’s discuss in full below.

    What is the Abiogenesis Theory?

    The theory of abiogenesis or biopoiesis is a study that discusses how biological life can arise from organic matter through natural processes. Specifically, this one term refers to the process by which life on Earth arose. Abiogenesis is thought to have occurred in the early Archean period or about 3 to 4 billion years ago.

    Most of the amino acids, which are often referred to as “the building blocks of life”, were successfully synthesized in the Miller-Urey experiment and in other experiments simulating the conditions of early Earth. As for other important biochemical materials such as nucleotides and also saccharides can appear in a similar way. In all organisms, these biochemicals are organized into even more complex molecules such as proteins, nucleic acids, as well as polysaccharides. The three molecules are essential for the functioning of life and are also present in all organisms.

    The formation of these macromolecules is mediated by nucleic acids as well as enzymes, which are synthesized through biochemical pathways catalyzed by proteins. Which organic molecules first appeared and how they might have helped the first organisms is still being debated.

    The first life to appear on Earth is thought to have been a single-celled prokaryotic that may have evolved from protobionts or organic molecules surrounded by a membrane-like structure. The oldest recorded micro fossils date from 3.5 billion years ago, the ratio of isotopes of carbon, iron, and sulfur shows the influence of life on minerals and inorganic sediments and also as a molecular marker indicates the occurrence of photosynthesis.

    Modern abiogenesis, which was first coined by Oparin and Haldane in the 1920s, is different from classical abiogenesis or spontaneous generation. One of the most fundamental differences is that modern abiogenesis is an explanation of the origins of life phenomena while classical abiogenesis coined by Aristotle explains how certain animals or plants routinely appear without going through reproduction. For other differences, namely in terms of mechanism, where modern abiogenesis is based on modern biochemical knowledge, while classical abiogenesis is based on classical concepts such as material principles, movement principles, and also spirit principles. The absence of proof of classical abiogenesis is now even more controversial among professional biologists,

    History of the Theory of Abiogenesis

    The theory of abiogenesis is a science that studies how biological life arises from naturally occurring inorganic materials. Where this one theory refers to the process when the formation of Planet Earth. It is thought that this abiogenesis theory occurred early in the Eoarchean or 4 billion years long on a relative time scale. This theory is classified as the oldest theory that discusses the origin of living things. It can be said that the theory of abiogenesis is a theory that explains if living things come from inanimate matter. This opinion arose based on a simple thought when he saw frogs or worms emerging from the mud or soil.

    The theory of abiogenesis was first coined by Aristotle in 384 to 322 BC which was a scientist from Greece. Abiogenesis or also known as spontaneous generation theory is made based on the observation made by Aristotle that the fish in the river come from mud. Not only that, he also conducted an experiment on soil that was soaked in water and the result was that worms emerged from the soil. Based on these experiments, the theory of abiogenesis became the basis, that living things came from non-living things. Generatio Spontanea or what is called the classical theory of abiogenesis has been recorded in Aristotle’s book entitled Historia Animalium.

    This theory was still believed until the end of the 17th century and one of its supporters was a British scientist named Nedham. Nedham conducted an experiment by boiling the broth in a container for a few minutes. Then, He covered it with a cork. Within a few days, in the broth that was stored there were bacteria. So Nedham concluded that the bacteria that appeared in the broth came from the broth itself.

    The proof of the abiogenesis theory does not end here. Another supporter also came from Antonie Van Leeuwenhoek, when he found microorganisms in the straw soaking water using a microscope, this discovery strengthened the theory of abiogenesis and also his supporters said that microorganisms came from decomposed straw. However, Leeuwenhoek denied this and argued that these microorganisms came from the air.

    The development of the theory of abiogenesis continued to grow until the emergence of the modern theory of abiogenesis which was coined by Oparin and also Haldani in the 1920s. There is a difference between spontaneous generation or classical abiogenesis. We can see this difference when modern abiogenesis explains the origin of life phenomena. While classical abiogenesis emphasizes more on how certain animals or plants can appear routinely without going through the process of reproduction. We can also see the difference between the two theories in terms of mechanism, where modern abiogenesis is based on modern biochemical knowledge, while classical abiogenesis is based on classical concepts in the form of material principles, movement principles, and also spirit principles, as we have discussed above.

    Abiogenesis Theory Broken

    Not a few who want to break and do not believe in the basis of this theory of abiogenesis since this theory was coined. Francesco Redi has started efforts to disprove the theory of abiogenesis by conducting experiments using meat. The meat was put into two jars, one of which was left open, while the other was closed. After a few days, larvae appeared in the meat that was in the open jar.

    From this, Redi concluded that the larvae in the meat came from flies that entered the jar. Apart from that, he also did the same experiment, only modifying the lid of the jar by using gauze. This is so that air can get into the jar, while the other jars are closed tightly. The result is that the meat still rots but no larvae are found in the meat.

    In 1768, Lazzaro Spallanzani repeated John Needham’s experiment. He heated the broth then placed it into 2 containers. One of the containers used is left open, while the other container is closed tightly. After a few days, the broth in the open vessel turned cloudy and gave off an unpleasant odor. Meanwhile, the broth in a closed container remains clear. This experiment proved that organisms did not come from inanimate objects but came from other living things.

    Even so, the theory of abiogenesis persisted, until finally Louis Pasteur, a biochemist from France, attempted to perfect the experiments conducted by Spallanzani. Pasteur modified the container used by using a long-necked flask. He did this to find out other indicators related to the flask tube with the air outside. After waiting a few days, the result was that the broth remained clear, but at the end of the neck of the tube a lot of dust and dirt had gathered. Then in the open tube, the broth contains lots of microorganisms.

    From the results of trials conducted by Louis Pasteur, this theory of abiogenesis was broken which resulted in a new theory, namely:

    1. Omne vivum ex ovo which means all living things come from eggs.
    2. Omne ovum ex vivo which means all eggs come from living things.
    3. Omne vivum ex vivo which means that all living things come from other living things.

    Advantages and Weaknesses of the Abiogenesis Theory

    Each theory that emerges will certainly have its own advantages and disadvantages. Likewise with this theory of abiogenesis. Based on several experiments conducted by previous experts, many thought that this theory was too naive, even though it was supported by previous experiments. The following are some of the advantages and disadvantages of the abiogenesis theory, including:

    1. Advantages of the Abiogenesis Theory

    Based on the research that has been done, the theory of abiogenesis actually has several advantages, because it provides the basic idea for the emergence of the aparin theory or naturalistic theory. This theory states that the origin of life is biochemical, to be precise, living things emerged abiotically. Without this research, there would be no Oparin Theory developed.

    2. Weaknesses of the Abiogenesis Theory

    As with other theories in other fields of science, this theory also has weaknesses. These weaknesses, namely the examples mentioned and explained, then carried out research by previous experts were considered too naive. The examples given are considered unable to support the theoretical propositions given. In addition, researchers at that time also did not see any small material such as bacteria or worm eggs, which actually is the beginning of the emergence of this life.

    That is the explanation of the theory of abiogenesis put forward by some experts regarding the beginning of life in this world. Even though this theory has not been proven correct, studying and understanding the various theories that might support the occurrence of life on Earth will provide more knowledge.

    For Sinaumed’s who want to know more deeply about other theories, they can read related books by visiting sinaumedia.com. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

  • What is State Defense Initial Capability and Examples of Its Basic Values!

    What is State Defense Initial Capability and Examples of Its Basic Values!

    What is State Defense Initial Ability – Did you know that state defense initial ability is included in the basic values ​​of state defense. So, in this article, we will discuss in more detail what is the initial ability to defend the state and the form of defending the state for citizenship education. Both of these are quite important things for us to learn as Indonesians.

    In addition, we are also obliged to practice it in everyday life. By practicing the basic values ​​of defending the country, we are like practicing the values ​​contained in Pancasila.

    What is State Defense Initial Capability?

    What is State Defense Initial Capability? The initial ability to defend the country can be interpreted as the potential and also the readiness of every citizen to defend the country according to their profession and abilities in their respective environment. Every citizen of this country basically has the initial ability to defend the country. This can be seen in physical, psychological, and spiritual abilities.

    Psychic abilities such as for example willing to obey various existing regulations. While physical ability is like having physical health. As for spiritual abilities, for example, diligently carrying out worship according to their religion.

    Having the initial ability to defend the country can be reflected in attitudes and behavior, including:

    1. Have the ability, integrity, and also confidence in defending the nation and state.
    2. Be able to understand and identify threats that exist in each environment and remain responsive to report them to the authorities.
    3. Have high emotional and spiritual intelligence and intelligence.
    4. Have knowledge of local wisdom in responding to every threat.

    Form of State Defense

    The form of defending the country has been stated in Law no. 3 of 2002, namely through civics education, compulsory basic military training, service as a soldier of the Indonesian National Armed Forces which is done voluntarily or compulsorily, and service according to profession.

    The four forms of defending the country have been explained in more detail in Law no. 23 of 2019, regarding Management of National Resources for Defense.

    Civic education

    According to Article 7 Paragraph 1 of Law Number 23 of 2019, it states that citizenship education is carried out through fostering awareness of defending the country by instilling the basic values ​​of defending the country. Having knowledge of local wisdom in responding to every threat is a form of initial state defense capability that we must have.

    In Article 7 paragraph 2 of Law Number 23 of 2019, it is stated that fostering awareness of defending the country is carried out in the scope of education, work and society. Regarding fostering awareness of state defense in the education sphere, Law Number 23 of 2019 also states that this development is carried out through the national education system. The national education system is also carried out in every track, level, and type of education by the government through the ministries in the education sector. Within this scope, the most important citizenship education is Pancasila Education and Citizenship Education or PPKn.

    Basic Values ​​of Defending the Country in Everyday Life

    What meaning is contained in article 27 paragraph 3 of the 1945 Constitution and examples of its implementation in everyday life? Efforts to defend the country can be done by instilling basic values. The provisions contained in Article 27 Paragraph 3 of the 1945 Constitution explain that every citizen has the right and obligation to participate in efforts to defend the state. Simplified, then article 27 paragraph 3 of the 1945 Constitution explains our obligation to make efforts to defend the country.

    The purpose of defending the country is none other than to maintain the survival of the nation and state, preserve the existing culture, practice the values ​​of Pancasila and the 1945 Constitution, and maintain the identity and integrity of the state. In the past, this state defense contest was an attempt to carry out a struggle or physical effort to fight for and defend independence. Then, in this modern era, defending the country is no longer just taking up arms or fighting other nations, but includes many things, one of which is fighting the effects of globalization.

    Then, what is the meaning of Article 28 Paragraph 3 of the 1945 Constitution and examples of its implementation in everyday life? Basically, the concept of defending the country can be interpreted broadly. However, if elaborated, defending the country is a matter of obligation, soul, and also honor. Then, in everyday life, efforts to defend the country can be done in various ways. One of them is by instilling six basic values ​​as follows:

    1. Love the Motherland

    Planting state defense that can be done is by growing a sense of love for the motherland. Then, to be able to foster a sense of love for this homeland, the Indonesian people must know the history of Indonesia’s independence, the potential of natural resources, the potential of human resources, and also its strategic geographical position. By understanding Indonesia’s condition like that, a sense of love for the motherland will grow as a sense of belonging, a sense of pride, and also a sense of responsibility to protect it.

    2. Awareness of Nation and State

    Love for the motherland alone is not enough. Therefore, this feeling of love must be supported by an awareness of a harmonious nation and also an awareness of the state that upholds the principles of the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia and the 1945 Constitution. archipelago, national resilience, and free and active foreign policy.

    3. Loyal to Pancasila as the State Ideology

    Pancasila is a state ideology formed by paying attention to the national character. To be able to build loyalty to Pancasila, it is necessary to understand the basic values ​​of defending the country in the form of upholding discipline, developing political ethics, developing a democratic system, and also fostering a sense of obedience to the law.

    4. Willing to Sacrifice for the Nation and Country

    Indonesian independence did not come easily. The previous heroes had a sense of self-sacrifice, persistence, and also a high unyielding spirit, so that they could win independence from foreign nations. Instilling a sense of self-sacrifice is definitely very necessary. To be able to build awareness and also a sense of self-sacrifice, it is important to understand aspects such as the conception of the soul, spirit, and fighting values, ethical, moral and constitutional responsibilities, as well as the attitude of prioritizing national interests over personal or group interests.

    5. State Defending Initial Capability

    If interpreted, the initial ability to defend the country is the potential and also the readiness to carry out acts of defending the country in accordance with the abilities of a person and their profession anywhere. Basically, every citizen has the initial ability to defend the country based on aspects of their respective abilities, such as self-confidence, professional values, and so on.

    6. Passion to Create a Sovereign, Just and Prosperous Country

    The spirit to realize the ideals of the Indonesian nation is one of the national attitudes and determination based on the determination of national unity and integrity. With the spirit to realize a sovereign, just and prosperous country, one will be able to utilize the potential of national resources and local wisdom in facing threats and challenges according to the times.

    This is an explanation of what is the initial ability to defend the country and how to cultivate an attitude of defending the country. For Sinaumed’s who want to learn all about the initial skills of defending the country and other knowledge related to love for the motherland, you can visit sinaumedia.com to get related books.

    As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia always provides the best products, so you have the best and latest information for you. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

    Also read:

  • What is SEO, SEM and SMM? Today’s Digital Marketing Strategy

    What is SEO, SEM and SMM? Today’s Digital Marketing Strategy

    Content writer is a common job in the digital era like now. There are many people who list their experiences as content writers on their LinkedIn profiles. Even though it is very common, becoming a content writer is not as easy as many people imagine.

    Content writers are not only tasked with compiling words into sentences, then combining them into paragraphs and a coherent piece of writing. Content writers must also develop a strategy so that the content they create can be reached by many people, especially digital readers.

    Therefore, in the world of copywriting , three important terms are known, namely SEO, SEM and SMM. The last two may not be so commonplace, but that doesn’t mean they aren’t important, you know.

    SEO is a technique for maximizing content so that writing can appear in searches on the top line, by doing a few tricks on the content.

    SEM and SMM are also the same, it’s just that they do it in a different way. SEM is done by advertising on search engine providers such as Google Ads, while SEM is by marketing through social media. Still confused? The following is a comprehensive explanation.

    A. Know What is SEO?

    1. Understanding SEO

    Search Engine Optimization (SEO) is a technique for managing a website so that it can work optimally and get the top ranking in search results.

    This top ranking will help boost the number of visits to the website so that it will generate profits. The application of SEO in managing a website is not only aimed at achieving high traffic, but also to help reach the intended audience.

    When creating a site, the creator must have certain goals with a certain audience or readers, the existence of SEO will help so that the content on the website can be the right target audience.

    SEO as a technique for getting high traffic and reaching the desired target audience cannot be done without paying attention to a number of indicators. Creators must be able to understand how SEO works, understand all the indicators that can help maximize content, including understanding how search engines or algorithms work on Google, Yahoo!, Bing or others.

    Understanding SEO also means understanding how search engine algorithms work. Search engines like Google will place certain content as the top ranking based on its compatibility with the algorithm they apply.

    For example, Google will display certain sites on the top page based on their match with certain keywords that are most searched for, the more the same keywords, the more relevant they will be and displayed on the top line.

    Since 2011, at least Google, as the search engine most used by the world’s people, has made eight changes to its algorithm provisions. Therefore, a creator who wants to maximize SEO is required to always update regarding the latest algorithm indicators. In the case of a creator still following the old algorithm pattern, the content he creates will not be effective.

    2. SEO indicators

    The SEO indicator is the main criterion that determines whether the technique used will work optimally, this is by taking into account a number of components which also still have a close relationship with how Google’s algorithm determines. Therefore, every time Google changes the terms of the algorithm, the indicators or components of SEO will also change.

    a. URL structure

    The shorter and simpler the website URL structure, the greater the chance to appear on the top page. This is because URLs are used by search engines to identify sites and content that is relevant to the search keywords.

    A short and simple URL structure can be just the site name and content title. For example, https://websitename//content . Conversely, the longer and more complicated the URL of the website you are creating, the more difficult it will be to display on the top page.

    b. Use of SSL/TLS

    Secure Sockets Layer (SSC) and Transport Layer Security (TLS) are components used by Google to mark which website is safe.

    Meanwhile, sites that do not activate these two things are indicated as pages that are not secure , so they often do not recommend users to reach websites that do not enable SSC and TLS.

    These two components are related to the transfer of visitor data, because sites that have activated SSC and TLS will encrypt all visit data on the website.

    An easy way to find out if a website has SSC and TLS enabled is to cross-check its domain address. If the website address starts with HTTP then this has not activated SSC and TLS, while what has been installed is the one with the HTTPS address.

    c. Search Intents

    Google often directs users to shopping services when typing the keyword ‘ bag ‘. This is known as search trend, which means the majority of Google users type the word bag to search for bag shopping sites.

    On the other hand, sites that contain information related to bag theory, such as understanding, types or materials of bags, often do not appear at the top if you type the same keywords.

    This is because most internet users will type the keyword ‘ understanding of bag ‘ or ‘ types of bag ‘ when looking for an explanation about bags.

    d. Content Topic

    Google tends to place sites in the top rankings, if the content on the site is complete and interrelated. If you type the keyword ‘tips for making spicy macaroni’, a site that specifically discusses food recipes will be more likely to appear in the top rankings than a general site that discusses not only eating, but also automotive, lifestyle and so on. This is because sites that specifically provide food recipes tend to have more complete content about ‘ making spicy macaroni ‘.

    Therefore, to maximize SEO you need to build a website that has a clear purpose. If you want to focus on the topic of traveling, manage the website to only focus on discussing food, travel, lodging. Combine several sub-topics to make website content more complete and comprehensive.

    Also have the following book entitled “Good at Making Websites and SEO” to understand more about the world of SEO.

    e. Content Structure

    Google pays attention to the comfort aspect of its users or user experience . Websites that are usually on the top page have a structured content composition. The easier it is for readers to access content on the website, the more visitors the website will attract. Therefore, keep content as simple as possible so that it makes it easy for readers to find the answers they are looking for.

    One of the tricks to make the content structure on a website interesting is to pay attention to the headings and sub-headings .

    These two components will guide the reader to understand general to detailed or specific information. Another trick is to use bullet points so that visitors don’t get tired of reading text that is too long.

    f. Meta Tags

    A blog usually has a special section that requires the creator to include a special tag and will usually be displayed at the bottom or at the end of the post.

    The tags in question are keywords that represent the contents of the entire content. Tags usually consist of one to three words, for example the content you create is about corruption cases, the tags that are included can use ‘ corruption ‘, ‘ corruption in Indonesia ‘, or ‘ corruption history ‘.

    g. Off-Page SEO

    Backlinks are links that refer to your website, or more commonly understood another website quotes information that comes from your content. The more people who cite or backlink to your website, the more credible and original your status is, or in other words, the more likely you are to appear at the top of Google’s rankings.

    However, websites that link backlinks to your site must also come from sites that also have good quality or reputation.

    h. Performance & Speed

    An important indicator that many creators ignore is the loading speed of the website. Google for the last three years has included aspects of loading speed as a consideration to increase website rankings.

    This is also still related to user experience satisfaction, a website that takes too long to load will be boring and make visitors bored. Meanwhile, Google is very concerned about aspects of user satisfaction and comfort.

    3. SEO division

    There are two types of SEO implementation in maximizing website performance. The two types are on-page SEO and off-page SEO.

    a. On-Page SEO

    This type tries to maximize website performance through the application of a number of techniques in the content. Simply put, on-page SEO is the application of SEO in content that is created so that the writing can reach a large audience. So generally the implementation of on page SEO is done by changing some parts of the content and adjusting to ideal conditions.

    Some of the common ways of implementing on-page SEO are using simple permalinks that are the same age as the keywords, using attractive titles that contain several keywords as well, using headings and sub-headings, pasting images at the right size, putting keywords in 100 words. first on the content, and so on.

    b. Off-Page SEO

    This type tries to maximize website performance through the application of a number of provisions outside of content. Simply put, off page SEO is the implementation of SEO outside of content or external factors which of course can also support optimizing website traffic.

    These external factors are generally in the form of using backlinks or the more links to your website, the better the assessment from Google. Apart from that, other factors include the use of Google Business, rating or reviewing visitors to maximizing social media as a place for promotion.

    B. Know What is SEM?

    1. Definition of SEM

    Search Engine Marketing (SEM) is a technique for maximizing a website by way of advertising the website. This method is usually done by advertising to search engine companies such as Google Ads (adwords), ads on Bing, Yahoo! etc. The advertising methods used also vary, one that is widely used is pay-per-click (PPC). This method advertises a website, but the website owner will only be billed for advertising if the ad is clicked or a user accesses the website via an posted ad.

    The easiest example, when you type the keyword ‘car rental’, the website that appears on the top page is the website of several car rental companies that offer their services. These pages can appear on the top page because they advertise to search engine providers such as Adwords.

    SEM is almost similar to SEO, because both of them aim to optimize the performance of a website. However, the way the two work is very much different.

    2. SEM characteristics

    Here are a few things that can help differentiate SEO and SEM.

    a. Effectiveness of reaching audiences

    The SEM method is more effective at reaching audiences than SEO. This is because SEM utilizes advertising by search service providers, where when placing an ad they can set which target audience they want to reach, for example age, location, type of device, gender and so on.

    On the other hand, SEO tends to be more vague because to be able to analyze audiences, a creator usually has to upload content first and then analyze its performance to find out which audience to target.

    b. Speed ​​to hit the target

    The SEM method is simply to maximize the website through the help of third parties who are usually search engine owners, so this method tends to be more instantaneous to reach the desired target than using the SEO method.

    When implementing SEO, a creator must upload as much content as possible and then analyze and maximize it, on the other hand, thanks to the help of advertisements, websites can be filled with traffic more quickly.

    c. Time period

    The SEM method can indeed help maximize websites in a short time, but the consequence is that it only works for a limited period. This period is very dependent on the amount of paid advertising, the greater the advertising costs, the longer the chance for a website to appear on the top page.

    Conversely, SEO tends to take a long time to be able to maximize the website, but the optimization can last a long time because it is done without advertising and is carried out with strategies that can support website sustainability, such as improving content quality, website quality and so on.

    d. Click Potential

    The SEM method guarantees that the website can appear on the top page of search engines, although this does not guarantee that visitors will click on the website page.

    Psychologically, someone will not be interested in clicking on a website even though it appears on the top line, this is because there is an ‘advertisement’ sign on the page.

    People are usually not interested in visiting websites that advertise because they tend to have content that doesn’t match what they are looking for. They will perceive that the website is not much different from ordinary advertisements that are worth ignoring.

    e. Cost

    SEM methods require costs that tend to be more expensive, this is reasonable because they incur costs to pay for advertising providers. On the other hand, SEO is usually free because there are no specific expenses. Even so, SEO may also require costs through developing content by recruiting competent creators or digital marketing consultant fees.

    C. Know What is SMM?

    1. Definition of QMS

    Social Media Marketing (SMM) is a method for maximizing visits to a website by maximizing digital advertising functions through social media. Social media is now an important part of everyone’s life, and almost everyone must access social media.

    This trend is used by creators to market their content through social media so that the potential for visits to their website will also be higher. The most common example, news websites such as detik.com, tribunnews, kompas and others have social media to advertise their content. People prefer to read news through social media, therefore these news media companies usually share their content on social media and then link their website links so they can be visited.

    Even so, this SMM method does not only link website links on social media to reach a wider audience and then harvest traffic but also for other purposes.

    Usually website owners use social media as well to build social networks through the follow feature on Instagram or add on Facebook. In addition, social media is also used as a medium to represent the company that owns the website in cyberspace. The more fans you have, the more credible the account tends to be.

    Currently, there are many types of social media that are developed and used by the community. Starting from the type of social media to share messages, such as WhatsApp or Line. There are also types of social media sharing images, such as Pinterest and Instagram, sharing short videos such as TikTok and Snapchat or audio-visual sharing such as Youtube.

    The success of advertising a website through social media is greatly influenced by many things, such as strategies in SEO. Even SMM can be categorized as part of off page SEO , because optimization is done outside of content. However, there are a number of aspects that differentiate SMM from SEO and SEM.

    2. Characteristics of QMS

    a. Effectiveness of reaching audiences

    The SMM method is almost similar to SEO, it cannot specifically determine which audience you want to reach. This is because social media owners usually have to upload some content before they can analyze it. Conversely, the SEM method is more effective because they can immediately determine it the first time they are going to advertise.

    b. Speed ​​to hit the target

    The SMM method is slower than SEM but better than SEO. This is considering that social media is developing quickly, so reaching audiences will be even faster.

    c. Time period

    The SMM method takes quite a long time to build a follower base on social media, but several ways can also help to increase more instantly, for example by endorsing programs and so on.

    However, basically the time needed to maximize promotion on social media is the same as building consistency in SEO methods.

    d. Click Potential

    The SMM method tends to have less click potential than the SEM method. This is because most social media users are teenagers who have a tendency to prefer audio-visual content over writing. Therefore, even if you link a website link on social media, the number of visits via this method will not be very effective.

    No wonder many social media users often only read the title part of the news instead of reading the full news by clicking on the linked link.

    e. Cost

    The SMM method does not require a lot of money, this is because the advertising process on social media is carried out independently. However, in some cases website owners advertise to social media owners in order to reach more audiences, there will be additional costs.

    Related Book Recommendations

    1. Easy Steps to Understand the Latest SEO

    Also read articles related to “What is SEO, SEM and SMM” below:

  • What is Scout Emblem: History, Meaning, and How to Use it

    What is Scout Emblem: History, Meaning, and How to Use it

    The Scout emblem is an identification of the national scouting organization. Where, this Scout symbol is permanent and official as the identity of the Indonesian National Scout Movement. The symbol of the Scout movement is a shadow or silhouette of a coconut shoot. The symbol was created by one of the Scoutmasters in 1961 named Soenardjo Atmodipoerwo.

    Through this symbol, there are ideals and hopes for the scout movement and the members of the scout movement themselves. The word “Scout” is an abbreviation of the young praja Karana. The word means a young soul who likes to work. The term Scout was taken by Sri Sultan Hamengkubuwono IX which comes from the word Poromuko. Where, the word “paramuko” has the meaning of the front troops in the war.

    The organization first emerged from the Dutch branch of the Nederlandsche Padvinders Organisatie (NPO). This mpu branch was first formed in 1912 in Bandung. In 1916, the NPO changed its name to Nederlands Indische Padvinders Vereniging (NPV). Still in the same year, Mangkunegara VII helped form the first scouting organization in Indonesia.

    The organization was given the name Javaansche Padvinders Organisatie (JPO). Where, the JPO organization formed by Mangkunegara gave rise to another national movement to form the same organization. The organizations that emerged inspired by the JPO consisted of scouting Hizbul Wathon (HW) in 1918, Jong Java Padvinderij (JJP) in 1923, National Padvinders (NP), Pandoe Pamoeda Sumatra (PPS), National Indonesische Padvinderij (NATIPIJ).

    After the birth of many scouting movements, the merging of scouting organizations took place in 1926. This was preceded by the birth of the Indonesische Padvinderij Organisatie (INPO) which became a fusion of two scouting organizations, NPO and JPO. Because many Indonesian-owned organizations were born, the Dutch also banned organizations outside the Netherlands from using the name Padvinder. So after that, KH Agus Salim introduced the term “Scout” or “Scouting” as a characteristic of Indonesian scouting organizations.

    After having its own name, the Indonesian Inter Scout Brotherhood (PAPI) emerged on May 23, 1928. The Indonesian Inter Scout Brotherhood (PAPI) had members divided into INPO, NATIPIJ, SIAP, and PPS. After independence, a national scouting emerged. Scouting is called the Indonesian people’s Scout who was born on December 28, 1945.

    In the course of its journey, the Indonesian scouting organization, which numbered in the hundreds, was eventually divided into several federations. However, after realizing that this federation had weaknesses, the Indonesian Scout Association was formed or known as PERKINDO.

    Then in 1960, in order to improve scouting organizations in Indonesia, the government and the MPRS gathered leaders from each of them until finally on March 9, 1961, a meeting for Indonesian scouting was held and chaired directly by President Soekarno.

    At that time President Soekarno said that the existing scouting organizations in Indonesia had to be renewed. As well as educational activities must be replaced and all scouting organizations must be merged into one with the name Scout.

    After the proposal was sparked, President Soekarno also formed a committee to form the Scout movement. The committee consisted of Sultan Hamengkubuwono IX, Brigadier General DR. Aziz Salah, Prof. Prijono, and also A. Achmadi. Where, what happened then. He is known as the Scout Movement’s Budding Day because it is the basis for the formation of the Scout movement in Indonesia.

    The results of the work of the committee also led to a decision called the attachment to Presidential Decree No. 238 of 1961 concerning Scouting. The incident that occurred in May 1961, eventually became known as the Day of the Beginning of the Work Year.

    Several days later, on July 20, 1961, all Indonesian scout leaders began to gather at Istora Senayan. Then, they finally joined the national scouting organization, the Indonesian Scout movement. This historic event is also commemorated as the Scout Movement Pledge Day 3.

    After the Scout Pledge was carried out, on August 14, 1961 it was carried out by the National Leadership Council (MAPINAS). Where, this activity was known directly by President Soekarno with Sultan Hamengkubuwono IX as deputy chairman 1 and Brigadier General Dr. A. Aziz Saleh as deputy chairman II.

    The activity began and was marked by the handing over of the Scout Banner by President Soekarno to the Scout leaders. The event was also attended by leaders from thousands of Scout members who wanted to introduce the Scout movement to the community. Thus causing the event to be known as the Birthday of Scouts.

    History of the Scout Emblem

    The figure behind the Scout emblem is Soenardjo Atmodipuro. He is the inventor of the coconut shoot symbol in Scouting. Soenardjo Atmodipuro was one of the top officials in the Department as well as an Indonesian scout leader in 1961.

    This symbol was used for the first time on August 14, 1961. At that time, President Soekarno appointed Kwarnari, MAPINAS, and Kwarnas members at the presidential palace.

    Where, at that time President Soekarno also bestowed a token of appreciation and honor such as the banner of the Indonesian national scouting movement on the Scout movement through the Decree of the President of the Republic of Indonesia Number 448 of 1961. This was then handed over to the chairman of the National Quarter named Sri Sultan Hamengkubuwono IX.

    Since then, every August 14th is celebrated as Scouting Day and coconut shoots and designated as a symbol of the Indonesian Scout movement. Where, through the Decree of the National Scout Movement Kwartir No. 06/KN/72 of 1971, the Scout symbol in the form of a coconut shoot was officially designated as the symbol of the Indonesian Scout movement.

    The Decree regarding the Scout emblem was finally stipulated by Hamengkubuwono IX in 1971. Currently, Sultan Hamengkubuwono IX acts as the National Scout Movement Kwartir.

    The meaning of the Scout Emblem

    The Scout Movement is a non-formal educational organization that organizes scouting movements. As identification, the Scout movement has a symbol as an identity so that it is always easy to recognize. Where, the symbol of the Scout movement is a coconut shoot that looks like a shadow or silhouette.

    Knowledge related to the Scout emblem is also one of the mandatory materials in the General Proficiency Requirements, (SKU) of the Indonesian Scout movement. This has been stated in the Initial Alert SKU, the Assistance Alert SKU, the Tata Standby SKU, and also the Ramu Gatherer SKU.

    In the Initial Alert, Assistance Alert and also Administration, knowledge regarding this symbol is found in condition number 8. Meanwhile, the Ramu fundraiser receives the knowledge material in condition number 14.

    The Coconut Shoots symbol was chosen, of course, due to the consideration of its deep meaning. The meaning of the Scout emblem in the form of a coconut shoot is as follows.

    1. Coconut Shoots Have Another Name, Cikal

    Coconut fruit or also known as palm fruit. When the coconut fruit is sprouting, this fruit is known by another name forerunner. In Indonesian, cikal has the meaning of being the first native and passing down a new generation.

    If you are in scouting this can be interpreted as a beginner or the first to continue the next generation. Therefore, the Scout movement chose coconut shoots as its symbol because the Scout movement has a new generation that will continue Scouting’s goals and ideals. This also illustrates that every scout member is the essence of the survival of the scout movement and the nation in Indonesia.

    2. Coconut Has Strong Durability

    Not only coconut shoots which mean beginner, this emblem was also chosen because it has a strong durability. Because in fact, coconuts can live longer and can live in any condition.

    Therefore, this Scout emblem is used because it has the meaning that every Scout member is someone who is physically and mentally strong, resilient, and has great determination to face various challenges and tests. In addition, scout members are also expected to be able to use this ability to define themselves in their beloved homeland, namely the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia.

    3. Coconut Can Grow Anywhere

    Because the durability of coconuts is quite strong, coconuts can grow anywhere. Because of this power, they are ultimately expected to be able to continue their lives wherever they are.

    That way, the Scout movement has the hope that every scout member can face the various problems that come. Not only that, scout members are also expected for Jesus to adapt themselves to their environment wherever they are. Therefore, the Scout movement also wants to prove that all scout members are reliable and able to mingle with other people.

    4. Coconuts Can Grow Tall

    The determination of the emblem for the identity of the organization certainly has a deep meaning. It is like the Scout movement which determines the coconut shoot as its official symbol.

    The determination of coconut shoots to become Scout emblems must be taken according to the characteristics of the coconut tree itself. that the coconut tree has the characteristics of a tree that can grow tall and towering straight up. Because of that, through the coconut shoot symbol, the scout movement can give meaning if every scout member is obliged to have straight and high ideals. The Scout Movement also hopes that we will not be easily swayed from something and have an honest and noble attitude.

    5. Coconut Roots Can Firmly Embed the Ground

    In order to grow roots from coconut fruit or known as coconut fruit, it can stick firmly in the ground. This is one of the reasons why coconut shoots were chosen to become the symbol of the Scout movement.

    Because from the roots of this coconut fruit can develop the strong desires and beliefs of every Scout member. The desires and beliefs possessed by these scout members are of course based on things that are good, true, strong, and real.

    6. Coconut is a versatile plant

    The essence of determining coconut shoots as a symbol of the Indonesian Scout movement is because the coconut tree is a versatile plant. This coconut tree also has the title of a thousand-purpose tree because it has many benefits.

    From root to fruit, this coconut tree can be used by all humans on this earth. it means that every scout member is expected to be a useful and reliable human being. Scout members are also expected to be able to prove themselves to be ready to serve their homeland, nation, state, and all human beings. Therefore scout members are obliged to always be ready under any circumstances. The actions of scout members must also be based on humanity.

    Use of the Scout Emblem

    The scout emblem in the form of a coconut shoot is an organizational identity that has a permanent nature. This Scout emblem can also be used on flags, PANDI, unit or quarter nameplates, Scout uniforms, identification, as well as administrative tools for the Scout Movement and other matters relating to the identity of the Indonesian Scout Movement.

    The use of the Scout Emblem is intended as an educational tool to improve and instill the characteristics and conditions as stated in the meaning of the coconut shoot symbol. This is certainly shown for every member of the Scout movement.

    Every member of the scout movement is expected to be able to practice and practice the knowledge and technology they have in the surrounding community to help the development of civilization. Because the younger generation who joins the Scout movement are expected to be able to become cadres for the development of a country with the spirit of Pancasila.

    History of Scouting in the World

    Before Scouting in Indonesia was established, the Scout movement first appeared in 1907. Where, it was initiated by Robert Baden Powell or also called Baden Powell. This story begins when Baden Powel served as Lieutenant General of the British Army.

    Baden Powell at that time held a Scout camp in Brownsea, England. He also wrote about his camping experience in a book called Scouting For Boys. The book spread to all corners of England and a number of other countries.

    After that, the first Scout organization emerged. At first this organization was only followed by boys. However, in 1912, Baden Powell, assisted by her sister, Agnes Powell, founded a Scouting organization for women who were given the name Girl Guides. Then, the organization was continued by Baden Powell’s wife.

    Baden Powell further developed the organization. Where, in 1961 he formed a Scouting organization for children or Siaga named CUB. The organization is also equipped with a guidebook entitled The Jungle Book.

    After forming Scouts for children, Baden Powell also founded Scouting organizations for youth. In 1918, Rover Scout appeared which was a scouting organization for youth aged 17 years.

    Two years later, from 30 July to 8 August 1920, Baden Powell held the world jamboree for the first time. This Jamboree is a large gathering activity for scout members around the world.

    The Jamboree was first held at Olympia Hall, London with approximately 8,000 participants. participants who took part in the activity came from 34 countries around the world.

    In the event, Baden Powell was finally crowned as the Chief Scout of The World or the Father of World Scouts. In that year also formed the International Scout Organization Council consisting of 9 people.

    Currently, the world boy scouting bureau has secretarial offices in 5 (five) countries, namely the Philippines, Switzerland, Nigeria, Egypt and Costa Rica. Meanwhile, the world’s female scouting bureaus are headquartered in European, Asia Pacific, Arab, African and Latin American countries.

    So, those are some explanations regarding the Scout emblem. Hopefully the above information can add to the knowledge and benefits for readers.

  • What is Samawa? Often spoken to the bride and groom, it turns out this means

    What is Samawa? Often spoken to the bride and groom, it turns out this means

    Sakinah Mawaddah Warahmah – Sakinah mawaddah warahmah or commonly abbreviated as SAMAWA is a prayer expected by Muslims for those who have just entered into the sacred bond of marriage and building a family. All Muslims who are married certainly want a family that is sakinah, mawaddah, warahmah. That is the purpose of marriage, which is a blessing that Allah SWT gives to those who can build a family. The following is a further understanding of sakinah mawaddah warahmah.

    Definition of Sakinah Mawadah

    The sentence sakinah mawadah warahmah has actually been written in the Qur’an. This sentence is part of the function and purpose of marriage in Islam. This sentence is also often said when in wedding sermons or in wedding invitations. The following is an explanation from the Qur’an Surah Ar-Rum verse 21:

    وَمِنۡ اٰيٰتِهٖۤ اَنۡ خَلَقَ لَكُمۡ مِّنۡ اَنۡفُسِكُمۡ اَزۡوَاجًا لِّتَسۡكُنُوۡۤا اِلَيۡهَا وَجَعَلَ بَيۡنَكُمۡ مَّوَدَّةً وَّرَحۡمَةً ؕ اِنَّ فِىۡ ذٰ لِكَ لَاٰيٰتٍ لِّقَوۡمٍ يَّتَفَكَّرُوۡنَ

    Wa min Aayaatihiii an khalaqa akum min anfusikum azwaajal litaskunuuu ilaihaa wa ja’ala bainakum mawad datanw wa rahmah; inna fii dzaalika la Aayaatin liqaumin yatafakkaruun.

    Meaning: “And among His signs (greatness) is that He created partners for you from your own kind, so that you are inclined and feel at ease to him and He made between you feelings of love and affection. Indeed, in that there are signs (of Allah’s greatness) for people who think . ” (QSAr-Rum: 21).

    In this verse there is the word “litaskunu” or also sakinah, then mawaddah and rahmah. These three words are often combined into one sentence, namely sakinah mawadah warahmah. If translated into Indonesian, sakinah means calm or serene, mawaddah means love and warahmah means mercy. The sentence sakinah mawadah warahmah is in accordance with what is in verse 21 of Surah Ar-Rum. In this verse Allah SWT gives His word that humans are created to be in pairs, namely between wives and husbands to get calm, peace and also love.

     

    1. Meaning of Sakinah

    Sakinah comes from Arabic which can be translated into Indonesian with calm, serenity, safety and also peace . Meanwhile, the opposite of peace and serenity are unrest, destruction and shock. What is expected from marriage as in the meaning of sakinah is peace, calm, security and peace in family members. Whereas a family that does not have sakinah means a family full of unrest, destruction and turmoil, that is what must be avoided.

    For example, a family that is not sakinah is a family that is full of debates, fights and suspicions. With so many conflicts that occur in the family, it can certainly trigger a divorce. Distrust in a partner is one of the triggers for family breakdown. If the spouses are suspicious of each other and have no trust in each other, and there are other people who deliberately shake up the household or the wife’s resistance to her husband, then it is classified as a family that is not sakinah.

    By having calm, serenity, security and peace, conflicts in the family will not occur. With calm, family members will be able to think about how to solve problems calmly because they have a clear mind. Family conflicts will easily occur if there is no sakinah in the family.

    2. Meaning of Mawaddah

    Mawadah also comes from Arabic which means affection and burning love . The word mawadah has a special meaning for someone who has passionate feelings with their partner. This passionate feeling arises because of other aspects that are owned by the partner, including: beauty, good looks, morals, position, mindset and other things in the partner. In Islam, mawadah is also a nature possessed by humans. Having mawadah in the family will make the family full of love and affection. It’s impossible in a family not to have love, of course it will taste bland. The feeling of love gives a sense of belonging and caring between family members.

    A family that has mawadah in it must have positive things in that family. If you don’t have mawadah, your family won’t support each other because you don’t have love. In fact, infidelity can occur because there is no feeling of affection between partners. Families that have mawadah are not formed instantly, but are developed through a process of being nurtured through the love of husband, wife and children. Every family definitely wants a family that is mawadah, because it is a nature of every creature.

     

    3. Meaning of Warahmah

    Rahmah means sustenance, forgiveness, grace and mercy . The greatest blessing of course comes from Allah SWT. The family that receives the greatest grace is of course the family that has love, affection and also trust. A family that has warahmah is also not an instant process but a long enough process because it requires understanding to cover each other’s shortcomings and provide understanding.

    With patience and sacrifice from husband and wife, it will certainly make the family have warahmah or grace in it. From this process of patience, warahmah will be given by Allah SWT. as the highest form of love in a family. It should be noted that warahmah will not appear if in the family there is mutual disobedience between husband and wife. Families must be calm, peaceful, and have love so that warahmah can be realized.

    Characteristics of Sakinah Mawaddah Warahmah

    Families who have sakinah mawadah warahmah certainly have visible characteristics or characteristics. Here are some characteristics of a family that has sakinah mawadah warahmah, namely:

    • Have calm, serenity and peace in a family.
    • Have love, affection and a sense of belonging that is always maintained among family members.
    • Having love that leads to Allah SWT and also values ​​in religion, not just love of creatures or just lust.
    • Far from suspicion, distrust and also feelings of misgivings with your partner.
    • Can maintain association in Islam, no rules are violated in marriage including infidelity.
    • Have their respective roles as family members with sincerity and sincerity. The role that belongs to both the husband as the head of the family, the wife as the mother who carries out the mandate of the husband and children as a mandate from Allah SWT to be educated properly.
    • Can maintain aspects of faith and worship between each family member, not destroying or plunging each other.
    • Supporting work or profession between partners to be able to create a family that is built as a mandate from Allah SWT.
    • Can meet the needs of the family including sustenance, sexual needs and also a sense of belonging to one another.

    Tips for Sakinah Mawaddah Warahmah to Realize

    According to Kiai Djamaluddin, there are five things that husbands and wives need to do to achieve a sakinah, mawaddah and rahmah household. Namely as follows:

    1. Forgive each other so that marriage is sakinah mawaddah warahmah 

    If a husband or wife makes a mistake, or there is a misunderstanding between the two of them, they must be willing to forgive each other and not hold grudges. So that the relationship that was strained due to quarrels can return to harmony.

    2. Mutual respect 

    Respect each other to achieve a sakinah mawadah warahmah household. In this case, the wife respects her husband’s busyness at work and the husband respects his wife’s busyness in managing the household. Even if what your partner doesn’t like, you still have to respect it. Mutual respect also includes respecting the privacy of partners, friends of partners and treating partners well as equal partners in life.

    3. Protect and remind each other in kindness.

    If the husband or wife makes a mistake, it is the partner’s duty to remind and invite them back to the path of goodness. Likewise in terms of protecting against evil, our duty as husbands or wives is to protect our partners from falling into immorality or evil. As wives, we are obliged to keep the living that our husbands provide clean and blessed. Do not let him give us a living from work that is not lawful. Reminding and protecting each other may be easy to say but hard to do.

    4. Deliberation in finding solutions to problems

    In solving problems or doing something that concerns the common interest, it should be discussed in advance with your partner so that there will be no bickering in the future. Because the essence of marriage is to share life with the partner we choose.

    Benefits of Sakinah Mawaddah Warahmah for Families

    Family is the relationship between families, namely father, mother and children. But it’s not just that relationship in the family, there are relationships that are no less important too, namely the relationship in society and their duties. Allah SWT does not create anything unless there is a benefit. A family that is sakinah mawadah warahmah is of course a priority for realizing family goals in society. And of course also an Islamic family will be realized.

    1. Carry out the Mission of the Human Caliphate

    Humans were created by Allah SWT solely to worship Him. With a family that has sakinah mawadah warahmah, of course it can guide, condition and support the family to always worship Allah SWT. In a family like this, every member, both husband, wife and children, must guide each other in terms of religion and kindness. A family that is sakinah mawadah warahmah does not only love the world but also loves Allah SWT. This has been written in QS AZ Zariyat verse 56:

    Amen

    Wa maa khalaqtul jinna wal insa illaa liya’buduun.

    Meaning: ” I did not create jinn and humans except that they worship Me.” (QS Az-Zariyat: 56).

    Allah SWT also created humans as Khalifah fil ard. This means that humans were created to build and carry out several things that can provide benefits for prosperity on earth. Benefits can be given with the position you have now with the profession you have too.

    The mission of the caliphate can be carried out with enthusiasm if you have a family that is sakinah mawadah warahmah. If there is a career between husband and wife, they will not bring each other down, let alone distance them from Allah SWT. Having a career is of course beneficial for yourself and for other people who are affected by it from us.

    2. Lots of worship and pious charity

    Allah SWT commands humans to protect themselves and their families from the fires of hell. This means that humans are commanded to stay away from the fire of hell and to multiply good deeds and good deeds. This is not going to be easy if you do it yourself. Therefore, the existence of a sakinah mawadah warahmah family or a good family is certainly in accordance with the expectations of Allah SWT so that it becomes a field of worship and good deeds for because there are many things that can be done with the family. This has been written in QS At-Tahrim verse 6:

    يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ​​ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ قُوٓا۟ أَنفُسَكُمْ وَأَهْلِيكُمْ نَارًا وَقُودُهَا ٱلنَّاسُ وَٱلْحِجَارَةُ عَلَيْهَا مَلَٰٓئِكَةٌ غِلَاظٌ شِدَادٌ لَّا يَعْصُونَ ٱللَّهَ مَآ أَمَرَهُمْ وَيَفْعَلُونَ مَا يُؤْمَرُونَ

    Yā ayyuhallażīna āmanụ qū anfusakum wa ahlīkum nāraw wa qụduhan-nāsu wa-ḥijāratu ‘alaihā malā`ikatun gilāẓun syidādul lā ya’ṣụnallāha māarahum wa yaf’alụna mā yu`marụn.

    Meaning: “ O you who believe, protect yourselves and your families from the fires of hell whose fuel is humans and stones; guardians of angels who are rough, hard, and do not disobey Allah in what He commands them and always do what is commanded. ” (QS At-Tahrim: 6).

    Raising children in Islam is also part of the fields of worship and good deeds. Good deeds are only beneficial for families who are cared for with love, affection and sincerity in them. To do this, we need a family that has sakinah mawadah warahmah to be able to worship and do good deeds as much as possible.

    A father who makes a living for his family by working will become his own field of merit. Likewise, a mother who takes care of her family and helps her husband support his family is a field of merit and good deeds. Likewise, the husband’s obligation to his wife is a separate reward for the husband’s family.

    3. Place in Reaping Love and Compassion

    Allah gives good sustenance, one of which is to please his family and descendants. This is of course something that is expensive in family ties, because not everyone can enjoy it. In fact, family, a sense of security and affection are the natural needs of all human beings. a pious woman and a pious man, is one form of family happiness. As in QS An-Nahl verse 72.

    وَٱللَّهُ جَعَلَ لَكُم مِّنْ أَنفُسِكُمْ أَزْوَٰجًا وَجَعَلَ لَكُم مِّنْ أَزْوَٰجِكُم بَنِينَ وَحَفَدَةً وَرَزَقَكُم مِّنَ ٱلطَّيِّبَٰتِ ۚ أَفَبِٱلْبَٰطِلِ يُؤْمِنُونَ وَبِنِعْمَتِ ٱللَّهِ هُمْ يَكْفُرُونَ

    Wallāhu ja’ala Lakum min anfusikum azwājaw wa ja’ala Lakum min azwājikum banīna wa ḥafadataw wa razaqakum minaṭ-ṭayyibāt, a fa bil-bāṭili yu`minụna wa bini’matillāhi hum yakfurụn.

    Meaning: ” God made for you wives from your own kind and made for you from your wives, children and grandchildren, and gave you sustenance from the good. So why do they believe in falsehood and deny Allah’s favor?”

    A family that is sakinah mawadah warahmah can meet the needs of its members. These needs start from a calm soul, peace, sustenance in the form of wealth, love, sexual relations with a partner, honor and of course other forms of worship that can be practiced in family charity.

    The wife is the husband’s mission otherwise. Because marriage in Islam is based on the name of Allah SWT. So building a household is not only a husband’s or wife’s obligation, but an obligation to Allah SWT. The name of the household must have a test. Each household test is different. With religious values, the test can be overcome until the test disappears. Sakinah mawadah warahmah not only for the world but for the hereafter. Towards the happiness of Allah SWT, namely the happiness of the hereafter.

    If you want to have a Sakinah Mawaddah Warahmah family, then Sinaumed’s must have sufficient knowledge to start a household. Sinaumed’s can of course read the book as a reference and get the book which is available at www.sinaumedia.com. As #FriendsWithoutLimits we always try to give the best!

    Related Articles & Book Recommendations

    Author: Yufi Cantika Sukma Divine

  • What is Respiration in Plants and Humans

    What is Respiration in Plants and Humans

    Respiration is one of the systems in the human body. The respiratory system is also known as the respiratory system which has a vital role for humans. However, did Sinaumed’s know that the term respiration does not only occur in humans, but also occurs in plants.

    The term respiration can also be interpreted as a process to produce energy by breaking down complex molecules which can then be simple molecules, so that they can be used by cells. So what is the difference in respiration that occurs by humans and plants? What’s the explanation? Check out this article to find out more about respiration.

    Respiration is Taking Oxygen from Free Air

    Respiration can be interpreted as the process of taking oxygen or O2 from free air when someone inhales. The inhaled oxygen will then pass through the airways or bronchi to the walls of the air sacs or alveoli.

    In the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), respiration is the binding of oxygen by the blood droplets to provide materials for the whole body through the respiratory surface (lungs, gills) in animals while simultaneously releasing carbon dioxide.

    After arriving at the alveoli, oxygen will be sent to the blood vessels in which there is a flow of red blood cells to be carried to cells in other organs of the body as energy and also as a metabolic process.

    The rest of this metabolic process, especially carbon dioxide or CO2, will be carried by the blood to be thrown back into the air. Air removal will be carried out through the lungs when exhaling.

    Respiration is also defined as gas exchange between an individual and the environment or the whole process of gas exchange between the atmosphere and blood and between blood and body cells.

    The respiratory system is an organ system that has the function of taking oxygen from the atmosphere into the body’s cells with the aim of transferring the carbon dioxide produced by the body’s cells back into the atmosphere.

    In addition, the respiratory organs also function for speech production and play a role in acid-base balance, fighting foreign bodies, body defense and hormonal regulation of blood pressure.

    Anatomy of the Respiratory Tract

    The respiratory system is divided into two channels, namely the upper respiratory tract and the lower respiratory tract. The upper airway consists of the nasal cavities, larynx and pharynx. Meanwhile, the lower airways consist of the bronchi, trachea, and lungs. To be clearer, the following is an explanation of the anatomy of the respiratory tract.

    1. Upper Respiratory Tract

    The following is an explanation of the organs in the upper respiratory tract.

    a. Nose over naso

    The nose or naso is the first respiratory tract. When the breathing process occurs, the inspired air from the nasal cavity will undergo three processes, namely filtration, warming, and humidification.

    The nose consists of several parts, including the outer wall which is made up of skin, the middle layer which is made up of muscles and cartilage, and the inner layer which is made up of multiple mucous membranes or nasal corals (konka nasalis). There are three nasal turbinates, namely the middle, inferior and superior nasal turbinates.

    Between the nasal conchae, there are 3 meatal indentations, namely the superior meatus, inferior meatus and middle meatus. These three meatus are passed by breathing air. Then, on the inside there is a hole associated with the pharynx and is known as the choana.

    The base of the nasal cavity, formed by the maxilla to the top of the nasal cavity is connected with the paranasal sinus cavity and maxillary sinus in the maxilla, the frontal sinus in the forehead bone, the sphenoidal sinus in the wedge bone cavity and the ethmoidal sinus in the sieve bone cavity.

    In the ethmoidal sinus, the olfactory nerve endings will exit which lead to the nasal concha. In the nasal concha there are olfactory cells located at the top. In the nasal mucosa there are nerve fibers or receptors from the olfactory nerve or it is called the olfactory nerve.

    The left and right conchae as well as the top of the palate have a vascular opening that connects the pharynx with the middle auditory cavity. This channel is also known as the auditory eustachian tube which connects the middle ear to the pharynx and larynx. The nose is also connected to the tear ducts or is called the lacrimal tube.

    The nasal cavity is lined with a mucous membrane which contains blood vessels and is referred to as the nasal mucosa. Mucus will be secreted continuously by goblet cells that line the surface of the nasal mucosa and move backwards to the nasopharynx by the movement of the cilia.

    b. pharynx

    The pharynx is a muscular tube that runs from the base of the skull to its junction with the esophagus at the level of the cricoid cartilage. The pharynx itself consists of several parts, namely the nasopharynx, oropharynx, and laryngopharynx.

    The nasopharynx is located immediately behind the nasal cavity, below the cranial base and in front of the first and second cervical vertebrae. The nasopharynx opens anteriorly into the nasal cavity and downwards into the oropharynx.

    The oropharynx is where the oral cavity meets the pharynx. The oropharynx is a combination of the respiratory and digestive systems, food enters from the mouth and air enters from the nasopharynx and lungs.

    The laryngopharynx is the part of the pharynx that is immediately behind the larynx and the upper end of the esophagus.

    c. Larynx or throat

    The larynx or throat is the airway that acts as a voice former. At the base it is closed by a throat cavity called the epiglottis which consists of cartilage which has a function when swallowing food by covering the larynx.

    Located on the midline at the front of the neck, precisely under the skin of the thyroid gland and several small muscles that are in front of the laryngopharynx and the top of the esophagus.

    The larynx has 4 cartilages or cartilages and consists of thyroid cartilage, epiglottis cartilage, cricoide cartilage, arytenoid cartilage.

    The larynx is covered by a mucous membrane except for the vocal cords and the epiglottis which are covered by stratified epithelial cells.

     

    2. Lower Airway

    The following is an explanation of the organs in the lower respiratory tract.

    a. Trachea or windpipe

    The trachea, or windpipe, is a flexible tube about 10 cm long and 2.5 cm wide. The trachea runs from the cricoid cartilage down the front of the neck, then behind the manubrium sterni and ends at the level of the sternal angle or about the level of the fifth thoracic vertebra and here the trachea divides into two bronchi.

    The trachea is composed of 16 to 20 incomplete rings which are cartilaginous rings held together by fibrous tissue and complete loops behind the trachea. Apart from that, the trachea also makes up some muscle tissue.

    b. Bronchus

    Bronchus is formed from halves of two trachea and has a similar structure to the trachea which is lined by the same type of cells. The bronchi run downward and sideways towards the lung flaps.

    The right bronchus tends to be shorter and narrower and more vertical than the left, and is slightly higher than the pulmonary artery and gives off its main branches below the artery and is called the lower lobe bronchus.

    c. Lungs

    The lungs are an organ that consists mostly of small bubbles called alveoli. Alveoli is a place for gas exchange assinus which consists of bronchioles and respiratory which sometimes have small air sacs on their walls.

    Respiratory System Physiology: Respiratory Process

    Respiration is divided into two parts, namely the external respiration section, where the process of exchanging oxygen with carbon dioxide to and from the lungs into the oxygen enters the blood and CO2 + H20 enters the lungs towards the blood. Then excreted by the body.

    The second part is internal respiration or cellular respiration where there is a process of exchanging O2 with CO2 events at the biochemical cell level for life processes.

    Part of the Respiratory Process

    The breathing process consists of two parts, as follows.

    a. Pulmonary ventilation

    Pulmonary ventilation is the entry and exit of airflow between the atmosphere and the alveoli of the lungs that occurs through a breathing process, namely inspiration and expiration.

    Therefore, there will be diffusion of oxygen and carbon dioxide gases between the alveoli and the pulmonary capillaries as well as the transport of oxygen and carbon dioxide through the blood to and from the tissue cells.

    b. Breathing mechanic

    Respiratory mechanics can be interpreted as the entry and exit of air from the atmosphere to the lungs which is made possible by mechanical respiratory events, namely inspiration and expiration.

    Inspiration or inhalation is the entry of oxygen from the atmosphere and carbon dioxide into the airways. In abdominal breathing inspiration, the diaphragm muscle will experience contraction and the dome of the diaphragm drops or returns to a flat position.

    Furthermore, the external intercostal muscle space will pull the chest wall slightly outward, so that the volume of the lungs will increase and the pressure in the lungs will decrease and be lower than the outside environment. That way, air from outside will enter into the lungs.

    Expiration or exhalation is the release of carbon dioxide from the lungs into the atmosphere through the airways. If abdominal breathing occurs, the diaphragm muscle will rise back to its original position or bend.

    Then, the internal intercostal muscles relax. As a result, pressure occurs and the space inside the chest shrinks, so that the chest wall enters the air, then exits through the lungs. This is because the pressure in the lungs increases.

    Respiration Process in Humans and Plants

    Respiration according to biology is a mobilization process carried out by living things through the breakdown of High Energy Compounds (SET) and is used to carry out living functions.

    The term respiration can be equated with breathing, but the term respiration includes processes that are not only covered by the term breathing. Respiration occurs at all levels of living organisms, from the individual to the smallest unit, namely the cell.

    If breathing is usually associated with using oxygen as a breakdown compound, then respiration need not involve oxygen. In general, respiration is an oxidation process experienced by SET as a chemical energy storage unit in living organisms.

    SET is like a sugar or fatty acid molecule and is usually broken down with the help of enzymes and some simple molecules. Because this process is an exothermic reaction or releases energy, then the released energy will be captured by ADP or NADP and form ATP or NADPH.

    Then, an endothermic biochemical reaction takes place which requires energy to be supplied to meet its energy needs from the last two groups of compounds. Most of the respiration that can be witnessed by humans requires oxygen as an oxidizing agent. This reaction is known as aerobic respiration.

    However, many respiration processes do not involve oxygen and are usually known as the process of making alcohol by the yeast Saccharomyces cerevisiae . Various types of anaerobic bacteria use sulfur or compounds or some metals as oxidizing agents. Respiration is also carried out in unit cells. The process of respiration in eukaryotic organisms occurs in mitochondria, among others.

    Respiration in Humans

    Respiration in humans is a step in the process of taking in oxygen and removing the remains in the form of carbon dioxide and water vapor. Oxygen is needed by all body cells in biochemical reactions or biological oxidation to be able to produce energy in the form of Adenosine Tri Phosphate or ATP.

    This reaction can produce residual substances in the form of carbon dioxide and water vapor which are then exhaled. So basically, the purpose of respiration is actually to form ATP which is needed for all activities in human life.

    Based on the place, the exchange of oxygen gas with carbon dioxide can be divided into two, including external breathing or also known as external respiration, namely the exchange of oxygen in the alveoli with carbon dioxide in the blood.

    Then the second is deep breathing or internal respiration, namely the exchange of oxygen gas with carbon dioxide from the bloodstream with body cells.

    Respiration is related to the regulation of breathing and humans have two separate neural mechanisms that regulate breathing. One system is responsible for regulating voluntary breathing while the other system is responsible for controlling automatic breathing.

    Control by the central nervous rhytminitis in the medulla oblongata directly regulates the respiratory muscles. Medullary activity is influenced by the apneustic center as well as pneumotax. A person’s awareness to breathe is controlled by the cerebral cortex.

    The respiratory center is in the Medullary Rhythmicity Area, namely the area of ​​inspiration and expiration that regulates the basic rhythm of respiration, the pneumotaxic area which is located at the top of the pons and functions to help coordinate the transition between inspiration and expiration, sending inhibitory impulses to the inspiratory area of ​​the expanding lungs and apneustic The area whose function is to help coordinate the transition between inspiration and expiration and to transmit exhibition impulses to the area of ​​inspiration.

    Respiratory control chemically, influenced by PaO2, pH and PaCO2. The chemoreceptor center, medulla, responds to chemical changes in the CSF due to chemical changes in the blood.

    Respiration in plants

    As has been explained that respiration occurs in every living thing and does not occur only in humans, but also in plants. Respiration reaction is a catabolic reaction capable of breaking down sugar molecules into inorganic molecules in the form of CO2 and H2O.

    Respiration is a process of taking in oxygen to break down organic compounds into carbon dioxide and H2O and energy. However, respiration is essentially a redox reaction, in which a substrate is oxidized to carbon dioxide. Meanwhile, oxygen absorbed as an oxidizing agent will experience reduction to H2O.

    Respiration in plants can also be interpreted as a process of releasing energy stored in energy source substances through chemical processes using oxygen. From respiration, it will produce chemical energy in the form of ATP for life activities such as anabolism or synthesis, movement and growth.

    That is the explanation of respiration is a respiration process carried out by living things through the breakdown of high-energy compounds or SET used by living things to carry out their life functions.

  • What is repost: Understanding and how to do it

    What is repost: Understanding and how to do it

    What is repost – Now social media is a place to connect with outsiders online, and is also used for various things, such as entertainment, seeking information, and looking for work. So, it’s not surprising that the use of terms in social media is already familiar, for example, the term ‘repost’ . So, does Sinaumed’s know what repost means?

    Yes, maybe someone already knows, but there are also those who don’t understand what repost is. In social media platforms, repost has the same function. Social media users often use this repost for a specific purpose, the platform that is often used is usually Instagram , although several other social media are also actively used.

    Repost itself has several functions for its users. Quoted from the Cambridge Dictionary , the word repost means an activity carried out by social media users, such as posting something on social media. For example, by reposting something belonging to a social media user.

    Maybe almost everyone has memorized the workings of this repost feature , but there are also some people who don’t understand the use of repost on social media.

    So, for those of you who are curious, what exactly is a repost? The following is a review of the meaning of repost in general and the use of repost in every social media. And how? Come on, let’s look at the following explanation!

    Meaning of Repost

    As many people already know, the repost function on various platforms is almost the same. The meaning of repost is an activity or activity carried out by social media users by selecting a particular post to be reloaded or redistributed.

    Even though almost everyone already knows how the repost feature works , there are still many who don’t understand what repost means. To make it easier to remember, repost activities, for example, someone has posted writing or uploaded videos or photos in the past. Then, in the future, he wants to re-upload his post, so he needs to mark the post with a repost or re-upload at a different time.

    However, in its method, the repost function is not exactly the same as the term used in general, because the use of each social media is different in how to post or how to repost it, but overall repost is done in almost the same way. So, you can see every function and understanding of repost on every social media that you will use.

    Because, in this digital era, social media is already attached and widely used by many people for various activities and alternative media , such as entertainment, searching for information, and looking for job vacancies.

     

    How to Repost on Several Social Media

    pixabay

    1. Repost on Instagram (IG) & How to Post it

    After knowing the meaning of repost in general, then what is the meaning of repost in the world of social media? What function and meaning are the same?

    Yes, like social media Instagram, repost means a feature provided by IG for its users, which later functions to re-upload other people’s or friends’ posts.

    So, the repost function on Instagram doesn’t upload old posts, right, which might be the repost function on other applications in the form of reposting old posts. However, on Instagram media, reposting also means re-uploading posts belonging to friends or other people, whether in the form of video posts, photos, screenshots, writing, both old and new.

    Here’s how to repost on Instagram media that you need to know.

    A. Repost Instagram Feed to Story

    1. Choose the video, photo or article that you will repost on the feed .
    2. Then, click on the paper airplane icon below, this icon is next to the comments and likes.
    3. Then, several options will appear for sending, so you click Add post your story.
    4. After that, the page will be brought to the IG story view, where you can edit the content to be uploaded, such as adding text, stickers, gifts, and so on.
    5. Then, select send to , the icon is in the lower right corner. Then select your story , and the content has been uploaded.

    B. Repost Instagram Stories 

    To create an IG story, first, you open your Direct Message or DM.

    1. Look for messages that go into DMs, messages that mention you or you can also see them directly on the notification icon.
    2. Select Add to your story which is under the Ig story of your account, then the page will appear in the story view, and you can add stickers, text, and so on.
    3. Then, press send to and click your story

    2. Repost on Twitter & How to Post it

    Then, the use of social media such as Twitter also has the term repost . Not much different from IG or Instagram, a repost on Twitter is an activity of re-uploading or commonly called a retweet . This retweet allows you to be able to share it with your followers or other users. There is also a built-in retweet feature which can be used to share other people’s tweets with everyone.

    Here’s how to repost via Twitter social media that you can do:

    1. The first step, open the Twitter application or official access from Twitter.
    2. Then, log in using your account.
    3. choose the post that will be reposted or retweeted on your Twitter homepage.
    4. Then, click the icon in the middle (retweet), on the post to be retweeted.
    5. After that, click the icon in the middle, then automatically, the post has been reposted on the homepage of your Twitter account.

    3. Repost on Facebook & How to Post it

    Then, the last on Facebook media. The meaning of repost on social media is almost the same as Twitter. This repost feature is also available on the Facebook app. So, how it works, you only need to copy first then repost the content.

    With this feature, of course it makes it easier for users to deploy it practically and quickly. You can repost a photo, video, or link. Here’s how to repost on Facebook that you can do:

    1. First, open the Facebook application on your cellphone, or you can access it on the official Facebook website to log in .
    2. Then, choose which posts you will copy and repost on your FB feed.
    3. Then, click the ‘share’ button below the post.
    4. Then, click ‘share this status’ , if you want the post to be in text form.
    5. You can also manage who can see your repost, by clicking the ‘custom’ icon below the post menu. Then, select or click ‘share this status’.
    6. Then, in the next step, you can set other users, namely setting other people to be able to see reposts, or hiding reposts from other users.
    7. Then, click ‘ share status’ to repost, then the content will be uploaded again.

    So, those are some of the meanings of repost that you need to know, both the meaning in general and the meaning in several social media applications, as well as how to use repost in social media applications such as Instagram, Twitter and Facebook.

    How to Share Posts on Instagram

    IG media or Instagram has indeed become the most popular social media among the others, now many people use Instagram as a medium for various things, such as doing business, and doing promotions.

    Now, Instagram is never empty of users, in fact it is increasing, every day, many people post on Instagram media. Not only on feeds, but uploading on Instagram stories is also very popular.

    Through stories, you can share posts such as videos or photos within 24 hours, after that the posts will disappear. You can also share Instagram posts to Stories for many people to see.

    So, how to share Instagram posts to Story can be used for a product or business promotion. From posts on Instagram stories, posts on the feed are also very easy to reach for all Instagram users. Because, the appearance of posts on the timeline usually changes frequently, and can sink faster due to piles of posts by other users.

    Then, how do you share Instagram posts to Stories? Let’s look at the reviews below.

    1. Sharing Instagram Post to Story

    Now, various posts exist on Instagram, but the fact is, there are still many people who don’t really understand how to use it. When in fact, sharing Instagram posts to Stories is very easy and simple, with just a few steps.

    This method can be used for both new and old posts. If you want to try it, you can follow the steps below:

    1. Open Instagram social media on your smartphone , then make sure you have logged in with the correct account.
    2. Then, you will be on the Instagram homepage, then the profile section, and select the post you want to share, you can also make it directly from videos or photos.
    3. After determining the selected post, also pay attention to the image icon or options below the video or photo post.
    4. Then, click the paper airplane icon at the bottom right.
    5. Then, there will be a notification or notification, which provides several options to choose from, such as add to story or send to other users.
    6. Select the add post to your story option or add to story.
    7. Then, your smartphone screen display will access the story feature according to the post to be uploaded in the story, and its position is in the middle. In this step, you can add various edits, such as tagging other users, adding text, locations, gifts, and so on.
    8. After the editing process is complete, you can immediately send the post like posting the usual IG Story. You can also set Instagram story posts for only a few people or all followers.

    2. Sharing Instagram Posts From Other Accounts to Story

    Generally, users post in their own feed, sharing Instagram story posts can also be done for other accounts. That is, you can share other people’s posts on your Instagram story.

    Things like this can be used if you do business via Instagram. You can promote something on your business Instagram account. It can reach many followers and users.

    How do you post other users’ content on our Instagram story?

    The method is very easy, maybe some people already know a lot. For those of you who might want to try it, try to follow the steps below:

    1. The first step, log in to Instagram on your smartphone, then make sure you are logged in with the correct account.
    2. If the post is in the form of a timeline , you can immediately click on the paper airplane image, which is below the content.
    3. However, if what you are going to post is not on the timeline , you can first visit the personal account of the post owner. To make the search easier, just type the account name in the search field. Then, click on the intended account to go to their profile page.
    4. If you have entered the person’s profile page, select or search for the content you want to share on Instagram Story.
    5. If you have found it, click again on the paper airplane image below the post.
    6. Then, a notification will appear along with other options, such as add post to your story or add to story, or send another user.
    7. Then, you select the add post to your story option or add to story.
    8. That way, the display on your smartphone screen will open by accessing the story feature in the middle with the content to be uploaded. In this step, you can carry out the editing process such as adding stickers, gifts, locations, text, and so on.
    9. After the editing process, you can immediately send the content like posting Instagram Stories in general.
    10. You can also set the content to be shared only for close friends or for all followers.

    However, it should also be noted, this method of sharing content from other people’s accounts may not be possible, if the account owner does not allow it to be shared, so it depends on the account owner’s settings. If the account owner restricts other users from sharing their content.

    3. Posting Other People’s Instagram Stories on Your Own Account

    Apart from the two methods above, you can also share other users’ stories by reposting . How to repost Instagram stories is also fairly easy, but reposting on Instagram media can only be done if the story maker’s account marks your account or tags it. Here’s how to repost other people’s IG stories to your own account:

    1. The first step, open a story that mentions you or tags your account.
    2. Automatically, the display on the story screen will have the option ‘Add This To Your Story’ or ‘Add to Your Story’ , so click that option.
    3. Then, you will be in the IG story view of your own account. Then, as usual, you can do the editing process, add stickers, text, gifts, emojis, and so on.
    4. When you’ve finished editing, you can immediately post the content like making a normal IG story.

    Those are a few reviews and how to share content or posts on Instagram media practically and easily. Hopefully this information is useful.

    Apart from being easy to use, now the Instagram application has indeed been used by many people for various purposes, one of which is to do business and carry out product promotions, and get profits through online media.

     

    Closing

    Yes, social media does have a myriad of benefits for our daily lives, it can even help you interact, get information, add insight, as entertainment, to do business to benefit from social media.

    However, excessive use of social media also has a negative impact on its users. Therefore, we as users of social media must be wise and remember the time and interact directly with the environment, so that we are not overly influenced by social media.

    If you want to find books about using social media as a whole, then you can get them at sinaumedia.com . To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

    Author: Veronika Novi 


    Reference:

    • https://www.allstars.id/blog/2022/05/28/repost-artinya/
    • https://plus.kapallagi.com/arti-repost-pengertian-generally-dan-caranya-di-every-media-social-bcbace.html
    • https://www.gubukpintar.com/2020/12/arti-repost.html?m=1
    • https://communication.binus.ac.id/2017/12/29/media-social-dalam-kehidupan-sehari-hari/
  • What is POV? What’s the Difference between POV in Fictional Stories and Social Media?

    What is POV? What’s the Difference between POV in Fictional Stories and Social Media?

    What is POV? – The term POV has recently become more and more used on any social media. Then what exactly does POV mean on social media? Let’s check out the following reviews!

    Social media continues to grow with all its technology and also in terms of literacy. Social media does have its own language or terms that are popularly used by its users.

    Of the many languages ​​used on social media, from Facebook, Twitter, Instagram to Tiktok, all of them can quickly become viral and are increasingly being used by everyone.

    One of the terms that is often used on Tiktok is POV. At first glance, hearing POV, we can understand that POV is a term that is in a film or a story, so what does POV mean in Tiktok? Here’s the review!

    What is POV? POV meaning

    Ever heard of the term POV? If you still remember Indonesian language lessons or you often watch movies, then you must be familiar with the term point of view or point of view.

    In language, point of view has the meaning of point of view, which is usually the point of view of a writer for his writing or work. This is done with the hope that the audience understands the intent and feeling of the writer or creator of the work.

    POV in social media means the point of view from the creator’s side through the videos and photos uploaded. Judging from its use on social media, in general, content owners want to position the audience in the position of the content owner.

    For example, a video post shows a concert situation with the owner of the video and his girlfriend. Then the creator of the video wrote the POV caption : When everything is fine .

    From this situation, it can be concluded that the creator’s intention in writing the POV was so that the audience could feel the times before the pandemic and could still watch concerts freely. In addition, if it is known that the creator is no longer dating, then there is a possibility that the POV in question is when he has not broken up with his girlfriend.

    The term that started going viral from Tiktok is now also often found in captions on any social media. Of course the term POV is not new anymore, even Ariana Grande, the famous singer from America, also made a song with the same title and tells about loving yourself from another person’s point of view.

    In a literary work, POV itself has several different types depending on how it is depicted according to what the author wants.

    POV Types In Fictional Stories

    If you look at it in terms of literary works such as novels and other stories, POV is divided into 3 types. Determining the point of view in a work is entirely at the will of the author.

    1. First Person Viewpoint (POV 1)

    What is meant by POV 1? If you often read novels, both fiction and non-fiction, then you are certainly no stranger to seeing the use of the first person point of view. POV 1 is a story that tells itself or the story of the author. In the first person point of view use ‘I’ as the main role.

    This first-person point of view usually builds a feeling as if the reader is experiencing something similar to the main character, because it uses ‘me’ as the center of the story.

    The following is an example of a story fragment using the first person point of view.

    I already feel calm and safe in Wonokromo. Robert was never seen. Mama and Annelies paid him no heed. Even so that does not mean I should feel I have replaced his position. I put all my power into impressing outsiders, I’m not a bandit, nor do I intend to bandit. And that I’m just a guest who has to go every time.

       And the night after studying this I deliberately did not write. There is a desire to continue studying after the break. I don’t know why I study hard now. Want to get ahead in school. Certainly not because of family pressure or Annelies.

       The encouragement was also not due to Mother’s letters which always asked if this self was hampered by difficulties. I replied to his fourth letter, to express my leeway, so that my monthly allowance should go to my younger siblings.

    – Earth of Mankind, Pramoedya Ananta Toer

    From the piece from Pramoedya Ananta Toer’s Earth of Mankind story above, it can be concluded that the writer uses ‘I’ as the main character who succeeds in making the reader feel like Minke throughout the story.

    2. Second Person Point of View (POV 2)

    If in POV 1 the author is involved in the story a lot by using ‘I’, then on the other hand in POV 2. The second person point of view uses ‘you’ as the main role, so it is very rare for a story to use POV 2, but some works like in the article will often use POV 2 with you, you, or even you.

    There are not many examples of stories from a second person point of view, especially in Indonesian novels. Several novels such as Lorrie Moore’s with his book How to Become a Writer and Camping Out by Ernest Hemingway still use POV 2. Another example of a story with POV 2 is as follows.

    The sun was starting to rise, calling for hot air that was increasingly blowing. You look at your watch and it’s eleven in the afternoon and now you’re not even halfway to Central Park. There are still many more blocks that must be taken with your old vehicle that looks like it can’t run anymore. What a long and frustrating day! you say.

    Some articles that discuss tutorials on how to do something will tend to use the second person point of view.

    Living in a developed country like countries in Europe there does seem fun and even a desire for some people, both for careers and for education. Are you one of them? If you are interested in continuing your career, studying and even living abroad, then you might need tips on how to migrate to other countries with a minimal budget. Here are the tips for you!

    From the example article above, it can be concluded that the use of the second person point of view, namely ‘you’, will feel much better in an article than in a story that feels stiff. The pronoun ‘you’ which is the reader itself will seem to make the writer communicate with the reader, so it will feel more real when applied to works such as articles, speeches and others.

    3. Third Person Point of View (POV 3)

    In the third person point of view, the author positions himself as if he knows everything that happens in the whole story. In POV 3, the author generally uses the name of the main character and several other characters.

    POV 3 is also divided into two types, namely limited and all-knowing third-person perspectives.

    Limited POV 3

    In this point of view, the writer really knows everything that happens to the characters throughout the story, but the writer does not know the details and is only based on outside observations.

    The following is an example of a story fragment with a limited third point of view.

    When Natan entered the apartment where he had been living in New York for four days, Akbar was already there. Watching soccer news on TV while eating premium eel chips that he managed to find, even though as Natan recalls, he had hidden the jar of chips in his desk drawer in his room.

    “Hey! Nathan Circumcised!”

    Rehanda Harris appeared from behind Natan’s back, then looked inside.

    “Wei Bar! Akbar Surakbar! Just arrived!” Rehan exclaimed again.

    And indeed that was how Akbar called the two men of Sundanese ethnicity. He originally gave the formula for the name Dungung Tekudungdung to both of them. The problem is that the name Natan doesn’t feel good.

    “Help me carry it, Nat! Come on in! Rehan said again, handing one of the plastic groceries he was carrying to Natan.

    -The Case We Met, Flavia

    POV 3 All Know

    Almost the same as the limited third point of view, the author knows everything that happens to each character, but in a much more detailed context. In this POV, the writer can know the thoughts and hearts of all the characters in the story as if the writer were a god.

    Gadis Parasayu, a public relations manager at a branch of Biocell Pharmacy Indonesia (BPI), got a new position that required her to move to their head office in Jakarta. As a public relations manager for BPI’s newest flagship product called Dhemoticyl, he is required to be able to work with the BPI celebrity who holds the title of The Most Eligible Bachelor in Indonesia.

       Troy Mardian, Dhemoticyl’s senior marketing manager, didn’t like the newcomer one bit. He was sure this Girl’s new career would end up like the previous PR managers who resigned in no time because they couldn’t work with her.

       The girl and Troy hate each other from the first sight. In the eyes of Troy’s white-headed style girl who is dandy and song aristocratic, making the man very artificial. Not to mention Troy’s infatuation with designer label items, as well as his habit of always speaking in English, making girls increasingly disgusted with the man’s behavior.

    As for Troy, the girl’s infatuation with local fashion products, made his forehead furrow sharply at how untrendy her tastes were. Not to mention her love for Indonesian food, which managed to make her stomach churn when she had to witness eating Padang food on the side of the road using her hands, without spoons and forks. How unhygienic that is!

    -Love, Hate and Hocus Pocus, Karla M. Nashar

    The use of POV 1, POV 2 and POV 3 often confuses novice writers, because in some stories the author sometimes uses more than 1 point of view. For example, at the beginning of the story the writer uses POV 1 to tell the story of the main character, then to explain the other characters the writer uses POV 3.

    Is it OK to use more than 1 point of view? Of course you can, as long as the story remains interesting and you can apply it accordingly. Some talented writers sometimes use several points of view to get a ‘feel’ in the stories they write.

    This is also sometimes not realized by the readers, because the readers have entered into the story regardless of the point of view used. That means the story is successful in making the reader feel the same way as the author of the story.

    How to Choose a Viewpoint?

    Want to write your own story? then it’s time for you to start thinking about which point of view you will present in your story later. For beginners, maybe determining the point of view is a little complicated and confusing.

    Therefore you can use the first person point of view (POV 1) to tell your story. This POV 1 is easy to apply and also effective for drawing readers into a story.

    Because in his narrative you explain in detail what the main character feels, sees and thinks, and you don’t have to bother observing other people’s points of view because it’s enough to use your point of view.

    If you feel that you are getting more adept at writing stories, then you can start trying to use POV 3 to provide a much more detailed description of the characters or other figures in the whole story.

    However, compared to POV 1 which can easily invite the reader to dive into the story, POV 3 tends to require more effort to be able to make the reader really feel the story like a writer. Because, there are many characters that break the focus of the reader.

    However, this does not rule out the possibility for novels with POV 3 to remain interesting and much-loved. Just mention a few examples of interesting novels by Tere Liye in the Earth, Moon, and other series using POV 3 but still being able to invite readers to fall into Tere Liye’s typical fantasy world.

    POV Differences in Social Media and Fictional Stories

    At first glance, you might already have a POV picture on these two different media. In social media, the point of view is usually written clearly ‘POV’ and then written together with the intention that the content creator wants.

    Whereas in fiction, POV is written using the pronouns ‘I’, ‘you’ and also the names of the characters that are written throughout the storyline. Even though the two have different ways of writing, POV in general has the same goal, namely to invite the reader to feel the same way as the author or creator of the work.

    Book Recommendations & Related Articles

    Do you know what POV is?

    Now you know more about POV both in fictional stories and as social media expressions. To better understand the writing style of point of view in a story, the only way is to read a book or novel. From there you can feel the difference between novels that use the first person point of view and those that use the third person point of view. In English-language novels, POV 1 and POV 3 are often used to tell the story.

    If you are interested in reading novels or books in English, or even interested in the language, you can get recommendations for novels and books for learning English at sinaumedia!

    Or want to be a writer like Tere Liye, Dee Lestari, Ika Natassia. You can get a range of interesting novels with unique points of view! here are the recommendations for you!

  • What is Passion? Definition, Types, and Examples

    What is Passion? Definition, Types, and Examples

    Knowing Passion: Definition, Types, and Examples – Doing anything based on our self-generated interests and passions makes something more fun and exciting when we do it, whether it’s work or just a hobby. Doing a job that fits your passion makes us very happy in doing the job regardless of the severity of the task or the pressure of the work given, as long as we like the job, it makes us more comfortable doing the job.

    All of these things are fun because we live them in accordance with the passion that is within us, so anything feels fun and exciting. Someone who does things according to passion will do things with totality and wholeheartedly because this is indeed related to passion in themselves. However, not everyone can work or live their life according to their passion due to various factors and demands of life that we cannot live according to our own ideals.

    And, do you know what passion means? Or have you found the passion you want? If you don’t know what passion means and want to know how to find passion within yourself, then in this discussion we will try to summarize the discussion about the meaning of passion and how to find passion within each of you.

    Furthermore, we will review the discussion below!

    Definition of Passion

    Passion means passion, passion, great desire, joy, emotion, anger and anxiety

    Basically, the concept of passion is not ambition, desire, dream or wish. However, passion is something that begins with awareness.

    Passion because it’s someone’s desire to do something or activity that he likes or thinks is important. Those who already have passion are willing to do various things to achieve something. In fact, they are willing to use their time, energy, and mind to achieve something.

    This is something we consider to be a passion. So if you find something or activity that makes you ready to ignite things in your life, it means you have found a passion that you enjoy.

    According to Vallerand and Houlfar, passion is a strong tendency to perform pleasurable actions.

    Although according to Covey, the definition of passion is a burning desire, a strong belief and desire that can make a person disciplined to achieve his vision.

    Pertula also stated that passion is a psychological state characterized by positive and strong emotional feelings, inner desire and high commitment to an activity that is considered meaningful by someone.

    Gani and Priambodo stated that passion is a strong desire or passion that is aroused when a person believes that he will achieve pleasant results. Gani and Priambodo also interpret the opinion about passion that he who has no hope also loses passion. Passion or passion also refers to a state of mind, according to Gan and Priambodo.

    Augustine gives his opinion about the meaning of passion. According to Augustine, passion is a passionate and passionate spirit to achieve a goal, a great desire and willingness to suffer for that goal. According to Augustine, passion is driven by feelings of love, which then creates passion to achieve goals and desires. Apart from this joy, according to Augustine, there is also suffering in desire.

    Passion (from the Greek “suffer, endure” and from the late Latin (particularly Christian) passio “passion; suffering” (from the Latin pati “suffer”; participle: passus)) is a term denoting a feeling of strength and violence. or tendencies or nearly uncontrollability in relation to certain people or things. Passion can vary from a strong interest in, or admiration for, an idea, proposal, or goal; enjoy an interest or activity with enthusiasm; strong attraction, excitement or feelings for someone. It is used primarily in the context of romance or sexual desire, although it usually conveys a deeper or broader range of emotions than the term lust, often including the notions of ecstasy and/or agony.

    Denis Diderot (1713-178) described passion as “desire”. We call inclinations, desires, and aversions brought to a certain intensity, by vague feelings of pleasure or pain, caused or followed by the disordered movements of blood and animal spirits, lust. . They can be so strong as to prevent the exercise of all personal liberties, a state in which the soul is somehow passive; hence the name lust. These tendencies, or so-called inclinations of the soul, arise from our understanding that great good or great evil is contained in the object of passion itself.

    Passion Types

    For some people, passion can be something very unique, both in type and intensity. But in general there are 3 types of passion, namely:

    • Passion for knowledge

    The first type of passion is the desire to know. It is the kind of passion one has to have to have the desire to learn a new skill or knowledge. Knowledge is the first pillar one must master.

    Because if someone has adequate skills, he can optimally develop himself or help others optimally.

    One example of a person who has a passion for science is David Attenborough. He is a British national who works as a broadcaster and natural historian. David is known for his writing and programming for the BBC’s Natural History Unit. David loved collecting fossils, rocks and other natural objects from an early age. As an adult, he continued to study geology and zoology.

    He started his career as an editor of children’s science books and joined the BBC on television. He currently hosts a science program related to animals and vegetables. From this we can conclude that David has and lives his passion for wild animals and nature.

    • Passion for Business

    Another type of passion is the passion for business. This kind of spirit is highly recommended so that everyone is motivated to be independent and not burden others financially. Moreover, they can even help others by making meaningful donations either directly or indirectly.

    • Passion to serve/people

    This kind of passion is necessary because humans are basically social beings. So naturally, the urge to connect with each other arose. Whether we realize it or not, people in various interactions want to provide services to others. They seem motivated to be more considerate of others.

    Examples of Passion We Can Have

    People who do things with passion tend to keep trying even when they fail. An example of passion is that we continue to be excited and passionate about what we want.

    Other examples of Passion can be seen, for example, there was a professional dancer who was very sad, even desperate, because she couldn’t appear on the big stage with other dancers, because of illness, for example.

    • Such a strong feeling

    Passion is a feeling of extraordinary enthusiasm that comes from doing a job or task. An example is the excitement of participating in a soccer competition for the 17th time. Another example is the feeling of immense pleasure when you do something you love.

    • Strong emotions

    Passion is a state of high concentration and seriousness. People who work for their passion, like a computer that uses maximum memory.

    As a simple example, many children who were fond of computers or IT in their childhood were curious to invent or create new things. Why? because he has their wants and desires. It might motivate him to create something useful in the future.

    • Terrible Enthusiasm and Desire

    Passion are things that can add great enthusiasm and high hopes. If work excites you, wastes time and interrupts your day, you can say it’s your passion.

    You never stop talking, thinking and discussing. In fact, you feel like no day is complete without interacting with him. You do your job cheerfully, sincerely and willingly do it, even if you don’t get paid.

    Tips for Finding Passion

    Everyone has their own way of finding their passion and it takes time to find it. So, how to find passion is as follows:

    • Know your strengths and weaknesses

    Of course, everyone has their own strengths and weaknesses. This is the first process you need to learn about your passion.

    Try doing a SWOT analysis or, if necessary, ask your partner for help in assessing your personality. Try to remember what you have done so far. Based on the frequency of your routine, what stands out the most?

    In addition, you should also think about what things are causing you the most trouble.

    • Hobby

    The next way to find your passion is to know your hobbies. It helps you see what is hidden inside you. Childhood is the beginning of knowing your life.

    Many things you have loved since childhood may be passions that you don’t fully understand.

    Besides, as a child, you can also ask your closest relatives. Then try again to check if something you enjoy is still related to your current hobby.

    • Knowing the greatest hope

    Everyone must have hopes for the future or ideals. When we were young, we probably knew our ideals based on what we found attractive. But it was definitely different from today.

    Only you decide your future, if you know the opportunities and possibilities that open today.

    This means that you already know the passion that indirectly makes you think about this hope, but you don’t understand it.

    • Know your favorite activity

    Based on your daily schedule, are there other activities that make you feel good besides your hobbies? This is how you know your character.

    What you loved as a child is also very closely related. Think about it and answer this question, are the things you are enjoying right now a part of something very important in your life?

    If yes, then this activity is your passion. This allows you to refine it to get what you wanted before. This way you can achieve your expectations in a unique way, namely through what you love.

    • Ask the closest people

    The way to find another passion is to ask the people closest to you, for example, your spouse, parents, friends, friends.

    You can ask the following questions: “What kind of person do you think I am and what are my abilities?”

    • Don’t Limit Yourself

    One thing you have to do if you want to find your passion is to be creative rather than limiting yourself. You can “adventure in every activity of your life. Remember, to find passion, stay away from fear as long as it has a positive effect on your life.

    Benefits of Finding Passion for Yourself

    Here are 5 benefits of passion that you will get if you do it with passion:

    • Build a strong character

    Passion makes a person a strong character. How could that be? So when someone does something with passion, he still tries to reach his goal.

    No matter how many people underestimate it. It encourages persistence. This character makes a person a strong person.

    • Teaches about time estimates

    A person who knows his passion automatically knows what his goal is. For that, he knows which activities should be prioritized. Don’t waste time on useless things.

    • Increase people’s joy in life and work

    There is a big difference between people who recognize their passions and those who don’t. A person who recognizes his desires clearly knows what he wants.

    Another case with people who have no passion. He tends to do things for other people or on other people’s orders. Hence, he does not live a contented life because he acts according to the wishes or orders of others.

    At the same time, passionate people are satisfied with what they do. He enjoys every process, and even though obstacles often arise, he tries to find a way out. It is believed that passionate people enjoy life and work more.

    • Improve concentration

    On the other hand, passion drives a person to do something wholeheartedly. It’s also what separates people who have passion from those who don’t. Someone who doesn’t have passion tends to do something half-heartedly because they don’t do it voluntarily.

    Passionate person knows very well what he is doing. What are the goals and objectives. This makes it easier to concentrate. It’s easier to focus on what you want.

    • Reduce stress

    Other benefits based on research published in The Annals of Behavioral Medicine. Passion can remember stress. In addition, passion also increases passion and happiness. This is because passion affects the purpose of life. He feels his life is full of meaning.

    According to Ika Indriasari and Noni Setyorini, passion is related to work. The benefits described above are generally the benefits of passion. So, Ika Indriasari and Noni Setyorini’s research specifically looks at the impact of passion in work.

    Two of the three planned hypotheses are correct, namely passion has a positive effect on work performance. Second, the meaning of work affects morale. The higher the importance, the stronger the relationship between morality and performance.

    So the benefits of passion in the world of work are not just a figment of the imagination. Passion affects performance and morale. Therefore, a workplace that supports and supports the morale of employees is very necessary to keep them motivated and excited.

    This fact shows the importance of passion in a career. Before you enter the world of work, you must identify your passion from now on. This will make it easier for you later when you graduate and finally go to work, because working with passion is much more fun than working without passion.

    Conclusion

    So a brief discussion of the definition of passion. The discussion this time does not only discuss the definition of passion but also discusses the types, examples, and benefits of passion itself. Understanding the meaning of passion makes us learn to understand ourselves and look deeper into our passions and the direction of life goals that are in accordance with our own desires.

  • What is Oxidation and the Redox Concept in It

    What is Oxidation and the Redox Concept in It

    Oxidation is one of the chemical reactions that you need to understand and know about in chemistry. Where, this oxidation certainly can not be separated by reduction. Both form a reduction-oxidation reaction or commonly called redox. The redox reaction itself is a reaction of releasing and binding of oxygen.

    Redox is the term used to describe changes in the oxidation number or oxidation state of atoms in a chemical reaction. This can include simple redox processes, for example the oxidation of carbon to produce carbon dioxide or the reduction of carbon by hydrogen to produce methane (CH4).

    Redox reactions themselves can also include complex processes, for example the oxidation of sugar in the human body through a series of complicated electron transfers. Where, oxidation and reduction precisely refer to changes in oxidation number because the actual transfer of electrons will not always occur. So oxidation is better defined as an increase in oxidation number and reduction as a decrease in oxidation number.

    So, so that you understand and understand more clearly about oxidation and redox you need to pay attention to the full explanation. The following is an explanation regarding oxidation and redox, starting from the definition of oxidation to examples of redox.

    Definition of Oxidation

    Oxidation is a term that you need to understand, especially in studying chemistry based on the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), which states that oxidation is the combination of a substance with oxygen. Where oxidation itself is the release of electrons by a molecule, atom, or ion, this is different from reduction, which is the addition of electrons by a molecule, atom, or ion.

    In chemistry, the oxidation state is an indicator of the degree of oxidation of an atom in a chemical compound. The oxidation state includes an integer consisting of a positive, negative or zero value. Where for pure compound elements themselves the oxidation state is zero.

    These oxidations and reductions of course refer to changes in oxidation number because the actual transfer of electrons will not always occur. So oxidation is better defined as an increase in oxidation number and reduction as a decrease in oxidation number. Such reactions involve the transfer of electrons.

    So if it is based on the transfer or transfer of electrons, the reduction reaction is a point electron capture reaction. Meanwhile, the oxidation reaction is a reaction of releasing electrons. In practice, the transfer of electrons will always change oxidation number, but there are many reactions that need to be classified as redox even though there is no transfer of electrons in the reaction, such as something involving covalent bonds. Non-redox reactions that do not involve a change in formal charge are known as metathesis reactions.

    Get to know the concept of Redox

    So, in order to know more clearly about redox, in the following a discussion on the concept of redox has been presented. Where, chemical reactions involving redox or oxidation-reduction reactions are often used in titrimetric analysis rather than acid-base reactions, complex formation or precipitation. The ions of various elements exist in different oxidation states, which is why there are so many possible redox or oxidation-reduction reactions.

    The development of the redox reaction concept resulted in 3 (three) concepts, namely classical theory, modern theory, and the concept of numbers. Then, what are the differences between the two? Let’s pay attention to the full discussion below.

    Classical Theory

    The classical theory says that oxidation is a process of capturing oxygen and losing hydrogen. However, on the other hand reduction is a process of losing oxygen and capturing hydrogen.

    Modern Theory

    The concept of redox has developed through various experiments, giving rise to the modern theory. Where, this modern theory says that oxidation is a process that results in the loss of one or more electrons from a substance. Substances that undergo oxidation will turn out to be more positive.

    Meanwhile, reduction itself is a process that results in the acquisition of one or more electrons by a substance. Where, substances that undergo this reduction process will become more negative. From these two theories and reduction which is not only seen from the capture of oxygen and hydrogen but as a process of transferring electrons from one substance to another.

    The concept of Oxidation Numbers

    The concept of a redox reaction involving the transfer of electrons can only occur in ionic compounds. Meanwhile, in covalent compounds it is not. For this reason, a third redox concept emerged, which is based on changes in oxidation numbers or also called oxidation states.

    Oxidation number is the positive and negative charges on an atom. The positive oxidation number element itself is generally an atom of a metal element, for example Na, Fe, Mg, Ca, and other metal elements. Meanwhile, elements with negative oxidation numbers are generally atoms of non-metallic elements, for example O, Cl, F, and other non-metallic elements.

    According to the concept of change in oxidation number, states that a reduction reaction is a reaction in which the oxidation number decreases. Meanwhile, the oxidation reaction itself is a reaction that experiences an increase in oxidation number.

    Where, there are 8 (eight) rules in determining the oxidation number of an atom that you must know, including the following:

    1. The concept of the oxidation number of free elements in the form of atoms and molecules, namely O

    Atomic free samples.
    C, Ca, Cu, Na, Fe, Al, Ne = 0
    Free examples are molecules.
    For example H2, O2, CI2, P4, S8, = 0.

    2. The concept of the oxidation number of monoatomic and polyatomic ions according to the type of ionic charge

    For example:
    The oxidation numbers of monoatomic ions Na+, Mg2+, and AI3+ are +1, +2, and +3, respectively.
    The oxidation numbers of polyatomic ions NH4+, SO42-, and PO43- are +1, -2, and -3, respectively.

    3. The concept of the oxidation number of elements in metal groups IA, IIA, and IIIA according to group

    An example of the oxidation number of Na in a NaCl compound is +1
    Such as: IA = H, Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs, Fr = +1.
    An example of the oxidation number of Mg in the compound MgSO2 is +2.
    Such as: IIA = Be, Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, Ra = +2.
    An example of the oxidation number of Al in the AI203 compound is +3.
    Like IIIA = B, Al, Ga, In, Tl = +3.

    4. The concept of oxidation numbers for more than one transition group or group B elements

    Example:
    Oxidation numbers of Cu = +1 and +2.
    Au oxidation number = +1 and +3.
    Sn oxidation numbers = +3 and +4.

    5. The concept of the total oxidation number of the elements that form ions = the total charge

    For example: NH4+ = +1

    6. The concept of the sum of the oxidation numbers of the elements that form compounds = 0

    For example: H2O = 0

    7. The concept of Hydrogen Oxidation Number (H) When Associated with Metals = -1 But when H is related to non-metals = +1

    For example: The oxidation number of H in AIH3 = -1

    8. Concept of Oxygen Number (O) in Peroxide Compounds = -1 and Oxidation Number of O in Non Peroxide Compounds = -2

    For example: The oxidation number of O in the compound BaO2 = -1.

    How to Determine Reduction and Oxidation (Redox) Reactions Based on the Concept of Increasing and Decreasing Oxidation Numbers

    In reduction and oxidation (redox) reactions, there are several elements that act as reducing agents and oxidizing agents. Where, the substance that is being oxidized is called a reducing agent, while the substance that is being reduced is called an oxidizing agent.

    Try to look at the following example:
    Reaction Mg(s) + 2HCl —–> MgCl2(aq) + H2(g)
    Because Mg is a free element, so the oxidation number of Mg = 0. Then, the oxidation number of H in the 2HCl compound is +1 because H elements are related to other elements and H is a group of IA. Furthermore, because H = +1, it means that Cl = -1 so that the total oxidation number of 2HCl = 0.

    On the right-hand side, the oxidation number of Mg in the compound MgCl is +2 because Mg is bonded and is a group IIA element. This is because Cl has an index of 2, so the oxidation number of Cl = -1 so that the total oxidation number of MgCl2 = 0. In addition, because H2 is a free element, the oxidation number has a value of 0. Where, the element Mg experiences an increase in oxidation number from 0 to +2 So it will undergo an oxidation reaction.

    So that the element Mg can be said to be a reducing agent. Meanwhile, element H will experience a decrease in its oxidation number from +1 to 0, so it will undergo a reduction reaction. Therefore, HCl is called an oxidizing agent.

    Definition of Oxidizing and Reducing

    An oxidizing agent is a compound that has the ability to oxidize other compounds or is commonly known as a compound that accepts electrons. Where, the oxidizer itself is a compound that has elements with high oxidation numbers, for example H2O2, MnO4-, CrO3, Cr2O72-, OsO4, and other very electronegative compounds.

    Meanwhile, a reducing agent is a compound that has the ability to reduce other compounds or is commonly known as an electron donating compound. Compounds in the form of reducing agents are found in metal elements. For example Lu, Na, Mg, Fe, Zn, and Al. Another type of reducing agent is a hybrid transfer reagent, such as NaBH4 and LiALH4.

    Examples of Redox Reactions

    One example of a redox reaction is between hydrogen and fluorine:
    H2 + F2 a 2 HF

    You can write all these reactions as 2 (two) half reactions:
    Oxidation reaction: H2 a 2H+ + 2e-
    Reduction reaction: F2 + 2e- a 2F-

    Analyzing each half reaction will make the whole chemical process appear more clearly. That is because there is no change in total charge during a redox reaction, the total excess electrons in an oxidation reaction must equal the number consumed in a reduction reaction.

    Elements even in this molecular form often have an oxidation number of zero. In the above reaction hydrogen is oxidized from 0 to +1, while fluorine is reduced from 0 to -1. When oxidation and reduction reactions are combined the electrons involved reduce each other:

    H2 a 2H+ + 2e-
    F2 + 2e- à 2F-
    ______________________
    H2 + F2 a 2H+ + 2F-
    And the ions will combine to form hydrogen fluoride:
    H2 + F2 a 2H+ + 2F- a 2 HF
    This is the discussion about oxidation. Hopefully the information about oxidation above can be helpful and useful for readers.

  • What is Ospek: Definition, Benefits, and Series of Activities

    What is Ospek: Definition, Benefits, and Series of Activities

    What is ospek – For students who have just graduated from high school or vocational school and are prospective new students, of course they are already familiar with the term ospek. It can be said that this ospect activity is one of the things that is quite anticipated or even a scourge among prospective new students.

    These ospect activities usually consist of various kinds of activities that can make prospective new students or new students understand how life is on campus.

    But unfortunately, there are still some prospective students who don’t understand what the ospek is like on campus. Therefore, it would be better if you first understood the information about prospective exams so that you can prepare yourself well when you enter college.

    In this article, we will discuss what prospecting is, its benefits, and also the sequences that are usually carried out during exams.

    What is an Ospect?

    The question that often arises from prospective new students is what is ospek? So, ospect itself is Study Orientation and Campus Introduction, which is an activity that aims to introduce new students to college life.

    The campus world has many differences from the education we take at school, starting from learning methods, clothes, class schedules, to the culture. That is what new students will be introduced to when attending ospek.

    The hope is that, after attending ospects, new students can understand the lecture system and can adapt to campus life which is very fast and dynamic. There are lots of benefits that can be obtained by participating in ospek activities.

    Starting from being able to know the lecture system, getting to know the culture around campus, making new friends, and also getting to know seniors. This series of ospect activities must be carried out by new students or better known as freshmen with a schedule that has been prepared by the committee. This ospect activity is also very synonymous with various kinds of special events that will become memories for students.

    Ospect History

    Did you know that Ospek is a colonial heritage? In Indonesia, the Ospek system existed from 1898 to 1927 at an educational institution called STOVIA. At that time, hazing had already been carried out, where the status of senior as well as junior was highly respected.

    These juniors will be used as subordinates by the seniors to do various things. This system continued until 1927 to 1942 at the GHS Educational Institution, Ospek was implemented more formally and student participation was voluntary.

    Along with the development of the times, Ospek continues to be enforced and is required by the institution. Several modifications to the implementation of this Ospek continue to be implemented, starting from the use of strange costumes and carrying items that are difficult to find, which is one of the modifications of the implementation of the Ospek itself.

    Hazing is part of the Opek tradition. This tradition has even been carried out from generation to generation. Many people criticize this hazing system. Because, there are so many cases of hazing that have fatal consequences. Ranging from violence to cause death.

    Many people ultimately criticized this activity. The government itself finally made an appeal to the tertiary institutions to change the Ospek system. The use of strange attributes has begun to be abolished, hazing and seniority have also begun to be eliminated. Ospek has begun to be changed towards its main purpose and main function.

    A series of activities that are usually carried out during Ospek

    During the orientation period, usually the activities that will be carried out are in line with the aim of implementing the Ospek itself, namely to introduce the campus world. The following are some of the series of activities that are usually carried out during Ospek, including:

    1. Teaching and Learning Orientation

    One of the activities during Ospek is teaching and learning orientation. In this activity, new students will take part in a series of teaching and learning processes as if they were attending a lecture.

    This one activity is a provision to prepare new students to take part in actual lectures. There will be lecturers who teach material like in lecture classes. Generally, the material that will be taught is in the form of information about the academic system and also personality development.

    New students will generally also be asked to make assignments and present them so they are familiar with the assignments in lectures. When teaching and learning orientation, never hesitate to ask about the lecture system so you don’t get confused when facing the actual lecture.

    2. Campus Life Orientation

    In addition to teaching and learning orientation, new students will also be introduced to campus life. These orientation activities are generally organized by seniors on campus with the aim of informing new students about activities outside of academic or lecture activities.

    These new students will be given assignments to do and also be collected during the Ospek. The assignments are in the form of personal or group assignments such as making videos or interviewing seniors.

    When the orientation takes place, new students will also be asked to bring a number of attributes. Activities during this orientation were also quite diverse, ranging from talk shows, seminars, games, to singing yells.

    3. UKM Exhibition or Student Activity Unit

    During the Ospek period, new students will also be introduced to UKM on campus, such as organizations to extracurriculars. There are various kinds of organizations that exist at the university, faculty, and study program levels.

    In addition, there are also extracurricular activities in various fields such as sports and arts. Each organization and also this extracurricular will present the activities they usually do in front of new students.

    At this time, you should look for organizations or activities that match your interests and talents. Look for activities that can support lectures and also develop your abilities outside of academia.

    Several extracurricular activities have opened registration for new students during the exhibition. That way, you can register immediately if you have made a choice which activity you will take part in.

    4. Faculty and Department Outlook

    After carrying out Ospek at the university level, new students will also take part in Ospek activities at the faculty and department levels. Generally, the time for Ospek at the department and faculty level will be longer than the orientation at the university level.

    If the university level only lasts for a few weeks, then at the faculty and department level it can take up to 2 months or even one semester, depending on the applicable policies.

    The purpose of this Ospek which is held at the faculty and department level is so that every new student can get to know each other with friends from the same class. In this Ospek activity, students will be divided into groups to work on several assignments given by seniors.

    Aspect’s attributes, from the name tag to the dress code, will also be determined. New students are expected to be compact with their peers.

    In this orientation session, you often find seniors who are fierce. However, you don’t need to be afraid, because after this orientation activity is over, it is possible that you and your seniors can become friends. This Ospek activity is indeed the right time to get to know new friends and also seniors on campus.

    Benefits of Ospek for Students

    The Ospek activity itself actually has many benefits, especially for new students who are entering the world of lectures for the first time. The following are some of the benefits that you can get from participating in Ospek activities, including:

    1. Make New Friends

    The ospect activities which are quite intense require new students to always communicate with other people from different backgrounds. Making good friends and also being selective will make new students have relationships in the world of lectures. Be it at the study program or study program level and also at the campus level. They will help each other in terms of information on lectures, ukm, organizations, and also scholarships.

    2. Get to know the Campus Environment and Conditions

    A fairly large campus environment with various facilities and uses can help us support lectures. Through this Ospek activity, the environment and campus conditions will be introduced to new students.

    3. Understand the Lecture System

    The lecture system is very different from the existing education system in secondary schools. Therefore, in this Ospek activity, new students will be given direction and also an understanding of the academic system and administration in lectures.

    Of course, new students don’t know what a chancellor, dean, head of study program, technician, GPA, short semester, compre, and so on are. In this Ospek, especially the Ospek majors, new students will be introduced to it all.

    4. Mental training

    As a new student, you will be faced with many new things. From that, you will be mentally trained to dare to communicate, move, be responsible, adapt, and others according to the existing situation and conditions.

    5. Practicing Cooperation and Communication

    A lot of ospect activities are filled with assignments, either individually or in groups. Group assignments will be done in groups. From this assignment, student cooperation is trained.

    6. Practicing Discipline and Confidence

    Discipline of new students will be trained by applying the entry schedule, collection of assignments, and also various rules that are applied during the Ospek which have been determined by the committee. In addition to discipline, new students must also practice being confident with the assignments given and having the courage to voice their opinions in public places.

    7. Add Experience

    There are lots of experiences and also various impressive things that you can get from Ospek activities. For example, getting to know people with different regional languages, meeting campus idols, meeting great speakers, and of course it can be a reference for becoming a dream in the future.

    Things New Students Usually Do During Ospek

    The following are several things that are synonymous with the implementation of Ospek. Maybe there is an Ospek tradition that is still positive and still worth maintaining today.

    1. Using clothes with unusual knick-knacks

    Prior to the day of the Ospek, new students will be gathered by the seniors to be given various directions, one of which is regarding the rules of clothing that they must wear while undergoing the Ospek.

    Not only are the colors and models of the uniforms regulated, but also the knick-knacks that adorn their clothes will usually be determined by the seniors. Starting from hats, necklaces, bracelets, nameplates, and so on.

    While in the campus environment, these various attributes cannot be removed by new students until the Ospek period is over. The time period itself is quite varied, some are three to seven days, some can hold Opek up to one month.

    2. Uniform Hairstyle

    Not enough with various unusual knick-knacks, seniors also usually assign new students to uniform their haircuts. Usually, men are told to make their hair uniform and women are told to tie their hair in small pieces. Meanwhile for female students who wear headscarves, the Ospek committee will ask them to decorate their hijabs with various kinds of colorful ribbons.

    3. Eating Together Full of Rules

    This inspection will usually take place from the morning until the afternoon. When lunch time arrives, it is not uncommon for seniors to order new students to have lunch together with the excuse of strengthening intimacy. However, this lunch moment was not free from various rules made by the seniors. For example, eating time is limited, sitting cross-legged and upright when putting food into the mouth, no sound is allowed, and no food is allowed to be left.

    4. Play Various Kinds of Games

    Even though the rules regarding uniforms until mealtime are synonymous with the impression of hazing, it turns out that Opek’s activities are not all annoying. On the sidelines of Ospek activities, the committee will usually invite new students to play various creative and exciting games. There are games that aim to train concentration and also teamwork, there are also games that are played to simply get rid of sleepiness.

    5. Get acquainted with Lecturers and Various SMEs

    It is not uncommon for people to think that Ospek activities are a waste of time, energy and materials. This impression is not entirely correct. During Ospek activities, new students will also be given the opportunity to get acquainted with several lecturers who will teach them in lectures.

    By knowing the character of the lecturers and a glimpse of the lectures, of course this is very useful to minimize the anxiety that new students feel before the first day of class.

    Apart from getting to know the lecturers, new students will also be introduced to various UKM or Student Activity Units at university, faculty, department, or study program levels. These various UKM are very useful in helping students to develop their interests and talents.

    6. Familiarity Night

    The last day of Ospek is usually the time most students look forward to. In addition to feeling relieved, the closing of this Ospek is usually accompanied by various fun celebrations or ceremonies, such as an evening of intimacy.

    In this event, usually there is no uniform or hairstyle that is required. All new students can be free to express themselves. The impression of seniority that was attached during Ospek also began to fade and disappear in the evening of intimacy.

    This is an explanation of what Ospek is, a series of activities, benefits, and also some things that are synonymous with Ospek activities. For Sinaumed’s who want to know more deeply about life on campus, you can read related books by visiting sinaumedia.com .

    To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

    Author: Umm

    reference:

    • https://danacita.co.id/blog/ospek-Jadi-info-terlengkap-untuk-mahasiswa-baru/
    • https://deepublishstore.com/ospek-kuliah/
  • What is Organization Theory?

    What is Organization Theory?

    Organizational Theory – In studying and getting to know knowledge about organizations or even those of you who are currently affiliated and active in various forms of organizations. You can read this article to understand more about the organization itself.

    In full, this article will discuss what an organization is, the meaning of organizational theory, various forms of organizational theory, and much more that can help Sinaumed’s in enriching information about organizations. Check out the following information.

    Definition of Organization

    Organization is a social unit that is formed from the existence of a group of individuals who interact with each other which forms a pattern that is structured in a certain way so that each member in it has the duties and functions of each, becomes a unit that has a specific purpose and have clear boundaries so that the organization can be strictly separated from its environment.

    According to Burky and Perry, the notion of an organization is a unit consisting of several individuals who act together to achieve common goals.

    Based on the book Organizational Theory, an organization is formed because of encouragement from within a group of people to achieve certain goals. This book also discusses how to work together in an organization and how the organization can run well.

    Definition of Organizational Theory

    Organizational theory itself is a theory used to study the process of cooperation between individuals. The nature of the group that exists within the individual in achieving goals and the various ways that are taken by using theories that can explain the form of behavior, such as the motivation of an individual in carrying out the process of collaboration in an organization.

    The definition of organizational theory according to Lubis and Husaini in 1987 itself is a collection of knowledge that talks about the mechanism of cooperation between two or more people which is carried out systematically in achieving common goals that have been determined beforehand.

    Meanwhile, Stephen P. Robbins (1994) put forward the notion of organizational theory as a scientific discipline that studies organizational structure and design. Organizational theory refers to various descriptive aspects and perspectives of the discipline. Organizational theory is also often used in explaining how organizations are actually made or structured and offers about how an existing organization can be constructed in order to increase organizational effectiveness.

    Based on the above understanding, it can be concluded that organizational theory has a function to explain the activities and dynamics of cooperation in an organization as well as to provide guidance and guidance in the decision-making process based on predictions made as a result of the decision making.

    To better understand what organizational theory is, a book entitled Organizational + Organizing Theory can be used by Sinaumed’s as a reference because it was compiled by experts on organizational theory topics which will definitely be useful for you!

    Organizational Theory Based on Analysis Level

    The types of organizational theory themselves vary based on literature and library sources. Based on Scott in Legard (2010), organizational theory is divided into three levels of analysis, which consist of a socio-psychological level, a structural level, and a macro level which will be explained as follows.

    1. Socio-psychological level

    The first organizational theory, namely the socio-psychological level, is an organizational theory that focuses more on individual and interpersonal relationships within an organization.

    In this group of theories, organizational experts make efforts to explain how people in an organization relate to each other in achieving their respective goals.

    2. Structural Level

    The second organizational theory, namely the structural level, is an organizational theory that focuses more on an organization in general and subdivisions of an organization such as departments, teams, and so on.

    In this group of theories, organizational experts also explain how the units within the organization such as departments, sections, sections, and the like are related to each other in achieving the goals of each of these units.

    3. Macro Level

    The third organizational theory, namely the macro level, is an organizational theory that focuses more on the role of an organization in establishing relationships with other organizational groups and communities.

    At this level, organizational experts make efforts to explain the relationships between organizations in achieving their respective goals.

    With so many different organizational theories, it becomes very difficult to study them without references. One of the reference books entitled Organization Theory, 4th Edition which is below discusses Scientific Management, Motivation Theory, Structural Contingency Theory, and many more.

    Organization Theory

    In its development, organizational theory itself has undergone various changes that have occurred from time to time which can be seen through the various variables that are the focus of its attention, which are classified into three, namely scientific management theory, human relations theory, and quantitative flow theory.

    Consider about organizational theory which is classified into three, as follows.

    1. Scientific or Classical Theory of Management

    In this scientific or classical management theory there are variables that are considered, namely:

    • The importance of the role of the manager
    • Utilization and appointment of labor
    • Responsibility and employee welfare
    • Favorable climate

    There are also various principles in the division of labor in scientific management or scientific management that relate to the experts, which consist of:

    1. Robert Owen in 1771 to 1858, in principle emphasized the role of human resources or HR which was the key to success for a company.

    There are also assumptions regarding Robert Owen’s theory which is motivated by inadequate or inadequate working conditions and requirements, where the previous working conditions and the life of the workers at that time were very bad.

    2. Charles Babbage in 1792 to 1871, in principle advocated for holding a division of labor that had something to do with the division of work, so that each existing worker could be taught or educated to have a special skill.

    Every existing worker is only required to carry out special responsibilities according to the expertise or specialization they have.

    3. Frederick W. Taylor, in principle, states the starting point for the application of management which is carried out scientifically as a result of research on time and motion studies.

    With the emphasis on time, the completion of existing work can be correlated with the wages or payments received. The existing method is referred to as the differential wage system.

    4. Henry L. Gantt in 1861 to 1919, in principle he issued ideas that had similarities with Taylor’s ideas, namely: Mutually beneficial cooperation that occurs between managers and employees, recognizes proper selection methods and bonus systems as well as instructions.

    Henry L. Gantt also rejected the differential wage system, where he considered it had little impact on existing work motivation.

    5. Frank B. Gilberth and Lillian M. Gilberth in 1868 to 1924 and 1878 to 1972, which in principle based on the idea of ​​research results regarding the relationship between movement and fatigue at work.

    According to Frank, movement and fatigue are related to one another. Where every movement that is eliminated also causes fatigue. Meanwhile, according to Lilian, in the setting to achieve effective movements can reduce fatigue levels.

    6. Herrington Emerson in 1853 to 1931, who in principle said that the disease that interferes with existing management systems in industry is waste and efficiency.

    Therefore, he also recommends that an organization has clear objectives, logical activities, sufficient staff, has work discipline, fair remuneration, credible or reliable reports, sequences of instructions, standardization of activities, standard conditions, standard operations. , standard instructions as well as incentive rewards.

    2. Human Relations Theory

    In the theory of human relations, the approach taken is in the form of a psychological approach to subordinates, whereby knowing the behavior of a subordinate as a group of human relations aims to support the level of productivity of that person at work.

    This is what makes a recommendation for managers in an organization, where the organization is a social system that must pay attention to the social and psychological needs of the employees in it so that productivity can be higher.

    The following are the originators or theorists of human relations. Check out the following information.

    • Abraham Maslow as the first human relations theorist said about developing a hierarchy of needs for his explanation of human behavior and the dynamics of motivational processes.
    • Douglas McGregor as the second human relations theorist describes it with theory X and theory Y.
    • Frederick Herzberg as the third human relations theorist elaborates on the hygienic theory of motivation or what is known as the two-factor theory.
    • Robert Black and Jane Mouton as the fourth human relations theorists discuss the five leadership styles in a managerial condition.
    • Rensis Likert as the fifth human relations theorist identified and conducted intensive research on the four existing management systems.
    • Fred Fiedler as the sixth human relations theorist suggests a contingency approach in the study of leadership.
    • Chris Argyris as the seventh human relations theorist views an organization as a social system as well as a system that exists between cultural relations.
    • Edgar H. Schein as the eighth human relations theorist who examines group dynamics that occur within organizations.

    3. Quantitative Flow Theory

    In the theory of quantitative flow, management decisions are more focused on calculations that can be accounted for by their scientific level. This approach is also known as the management science approach which generally has the following steps.

    • Formulate the problem
    • Constructing an arithmetic model
    • Get the solution from the existing model
    • Reviewing models and model results
    • Establish results-based oversight
    • Conduct implementation

    There are also tools that are generally used in this method, namely statistical and computerized methods to see possibilities and opportunities as information needed by management.

    4. Bureaucratic Theory

    The theory of bureaucracy was first put forward by Max Weber in his book entitled The Protestant Ethic and Spirit of Capitalism.

    The word bureaucracy itself originally came from the word legal-rational. Where an existing organization is legal, because it has authority that comes from a set of procedural rules and roles that have been formulated clearly and in detail. Organizations are also called rational in setting goals and organizational design in achieving these goals.

    According to Max Weber, bureaucracy also has the following six characteristics.

    • The bureaucracy has a clear division of labor
    • The bureaucracy has a well-defined hierarchy of authority
    • Bureaucracy has a rational program to achieve organizational goals
    • The bureaucracy has a system of procedures for handling work situations
    • The bureaucracy has a system of rules that includes various rights and position obligations for office holders within it
    • Bureaucracy has interpersonal relationships that have an impersonal nature

    5. Administration Theory

    This administrative theory was largely developed on the basis of contributions from Henri Fayol and Lyndall Urwick who came from Europe and also Mooney and Reiley who came from America.

    As an industrialist from France, Henri Fayol lived from 1841 to 1925 and proposed and discussed fourteen principles of management which until now have become the basis for the development of administrative theory. The fourteen management principles consist of:

    • The division of labor or what can be called the division of work
    • Authority and responsibility or what can be called authority and responsibility
    • Discipline or what can be called discipline
    • Unity of command or what can be called the unity of command
    • Unity of direction or what can be called the unity of direction
    • Prioritizing public interests over personal interests or what can be called the subordination of individual interests to general interests
    • Remuneration or what can be called the remuneration of personnel
    • Centralization or what can be called centralization
    • Scalar chain or what can be called a scalar chain
    • Rules or what can be called an order
    • Justice or what can be called equity
    • Perpetuation of personnel or what can be called the stability of tenure of personnel
    • Initiative or what can be called the initiative
    • The spirit of the corps or what can be called the esprit de corps

    Henri Fayol also details the various functions of administrative activities which are used as various elements of management and is also known as Fayol’s Functionalism or Fayol’s theory of functionalism which consists of: planning, organizing, giving orders, coordinating, and supervising.

    Organization Theory According to Stephen P. Robbins

    An organization expert named Stephen P. Robbins (1995) suggests the division of organizational theory which is divided into four categories consisting of the following.

    1. Type 1 theorist

    • The group of type 1 theorists is known as the classical school
    • The efforts made by this group of theorists are to develop a universal organizational model
    • Seeing an organization as a closed system in achieving goals efficiently
    • Experts such as Frederick W. Taylor who made scientific management, Henry Fayol who made organizational principles, Max Weber who made bureaucratic theory, and Ralph Davis who made rational planning theory

    2. Type 2 theorists

    • In the efforts made by this group of theorists, they made adjustments that were socially organizational in nature, as well as forming a flow of human relations that could be called a human relations school.
    • Theorists also view the organization as consisting of various tasks as well as people
    • Experts such as Elton Mayo who created the Hawthorne theory or study, Chester Barnard who created the theory of cooperative systems, McGregor who created the X and Y theory, and Warren Bennis who created the anti-bureaucratic theory.

    3. Type 3 theorists

    • This theorist has a contingency approach which means choosing between mechanistic and humanistic
    • Experts such as Katz and Kahn who made the theory of environmental perspectives, the case of technology, and the Aston group who made the theory of organizational scales.

    4. Type 4 theorists

    • These theorists focus on the political nature of an organization.
    • Experts such as March and Simon who made cognitive limits on rationality and Jeffrey Pfeffer who made political arena theory

    Well, that’s an explanation of organizational theory and the various forms in it . Based on the information above, it can be concluded that organizational theory is a number of thoughts and concepts that can explain and predict how an organization behaves, which can be formed from various types of structures and certain conditions in achieving its goals.

    Book Recommendations & Related Articles

  • What is Online? Types, Components, Strengths and Weaknesses

    What is Online? Types, Components, Strengths and Weaknesses

    What is Online – The term online has been used a lot lately. Many activities are carried out online. But what is online?

    Sinaumed’s, maybe you are already doing something online without realizing it. But do not know the meaning of the word online. This article will discuss things about online, from understanding to benefits.

    What is Online? Definition of Online

    Types of Online Communication

    1. Synchronous Chat Communication

    For those of you who use applications such as whatsapp, line, sms, telegram, and the like. That means you have done synchronous chat communication. Synchronous chat communication is communication made via the internet but only in the form of text messages or other chats which are only in the form of text messages.

    2. Chat Asynchronous Communication

    Chat asynchronous communication with chat synchronous communication has the same function, namely sending text messages to someone you want to communicate with.

    However, the difference between the two is that chat asynchronous communication is delayed online communication. Chat or text messages sent are not immediately replied to by the recipient.

    An example of asynchronous chat communication is like a question session during a webinar or discussion. Questions will be accommodated and answered at the appropriate session or time.

    3. Synchronous Call Communication

    This type of online communication is communication where someone can communicate via a telephone line that must use the internet. This communication is not limited by time and distance. The applications used vary, of course there must be a telephone feature.

    4. Video Call Synchronous Communication

    This type of online communication is not much different from synchronous call communication, because you can communicate with someone via voice.

    But what distinguishes this synchronous video call communication is that there is a video feature that can show the face of the person you are communicating with. There are also various supporting applications for synchronous video communication.

    5. Video Asynchronous Communication

    Video asynchronous communication is online communication that is the same as video synchronous communication. But the difference from asynchronous video communication is that someone only sends a form of communication in the form of video.

    Two-way communication does not occur in asynchronous video communication. So that the person who sent the video cannot know how the response from the recipient of the video is.

    This video asynchronous communication is usually used for teachers who make learning materials in video form. The teacher will send the video to his students.

    In addition, there is online communication based on how to communicate, namely formal online communication, informal communication, non-formal online communication, group communication, and communication for work. Here’s the explanation:

    6. Formal Online Communication

    Formal online communication is communication that takes place in formal situations. Usually this communication is carried out when there is an interest or an obligation to carry out formal online communication. Examples of formal online communication such as conducting webinars, lessons, or meetings.

    7. Informal Online Communication

    Informal online communication is the exact opposite of formal communication. This communication is done to carry out interactions that do not always have a purpose or purpose. Usually this communication also does not have a definite topic or is not planned. For example, like a mother who contacts her child because she wants to ask how her child is or is.

    8. Non-Formal Online Communication

    Non-formal online communication is communication that takes place outside of formal or official events. If non-formal communication is carried out in an official situation, usually the person being invited to communicate is a relative or someone who has a close relationship.

    9. Group Online Communication

    The next type of online communication is group online communication. As the name implies, this communication is done in groups. This communication is usually done within a group of groups on an application or platform.

    10. Online Communication for Work

    Online communication for work is personal and important. This communication is done for work purposes. This communication can use a personal application or platform, or it can also use a private platform provided by the company. Such as an application, website, or email on behalf of the company.

    Components to Support Online Communication

    Before online communication can run, components are needed to support it, including the following:

    1. Software components ( software )

    This component is useful for running the system for online communication purposes. This component serves to bridge the other components. Programs used for this software component such as google, sky, webconferencia, and so on.

     

    2. Hardware components (hardware)

    Hardware components are components that are visible and usable by humans. Examples of hardware components for online communication are laptops or computers, cellphones, microphones, headsets, and other supporting devices.

    3 . Components of reasoning or reasoning devices (brainware)

    The component of the device of reason or reason is a human being. Humans are the ones who run the other components, so the presence of this component is really needed for online communication.

    Advantages and Disadvantages of Online Communication

    1. Advantages of Online Communication

    There are several advantages of online communication that can be found, including:

    a. Saving time

    Online communication certainly requires the internet to work. The advantage of online communication is that it saves time, it doesn’t take long to send messages or videos to someone when using online communication. In addition, online communication knows no time, you can use it at any time.

    b. Can be done anywhere

    Online communication is communication that can be done anywhere, as long as the internet is connected. This is one of the advantages of online communication. So there is no need to meet to communicate.

    c. Save costs

    To communicate online, you don’t need to pay a lot of money. Compared to communicating in person, especially if the distance is great, online communication is very helpful. Because it can reduce costs, only internet costs are needed.

     

    2. Disadvantages of Online Communication

    Besides the advantages, online communication also has disadvantages. Are as follows:

    a. Requires a specific device or application

    If you want to communicate online, certain applications are needed to support this communication. This can be said to be a drawback of online communication, because not all applications can be installed or used in general.

    b. Difficulty expressing emotions

    The disadvantages of online communication in this case are clearly visible when using online communication of the text message type. Misunderstandings often occur between the sender and the recipient of the message, because it is difficult to guess the expression received by the recipient of the message from the sender of the message.

    c. Widespread data privacy threats

    When you want to communicate online using certain platforms or applications, personal data is required. This is actually dangerous, because if private personal data is spread, it can be misused by irresponsible people.

    Online Benefits

    Following are some of the many benefits of going online:

    • To communicate
    • As a trading medium
    • Can be used for business
    • Facilitate learning
    • As a means of e-banking
    • Entertainment media
    • Can access information from anywhere and anytime

    That’s information about online, from understanding to benefits. For Sinaumed’s who want to know more, there’s no need to worry, because sinaumedia as #SahabatUnlimits will always help by providing books on sinaumedia.com .

    Book Recommendations & Related Articles

  • What Is Ohm’s Law? Definition, Formulas, and Examples

    What Is Ohm’s Law? Definition, Formulas, and Examples

    What is Ohm’s Law? – Basically, in a closed circuit there will be a flow of electric current. Where the electric current flows because of a potential difference between two points in an introduction, for example on a flashlight, television, radio, and others. The equipment can turn on or function if there is electricity that comes from the voltage connected to the equipment itself. So it will produce a potential difference.

    Ohm’s law is one of the basic sciences of electronics. This one science is very useful to help us in calculating the current, voltage, or resistance of an electric circuit. Where ohm’s law states the relationship between mathematical and current, voltage, and also network resistance. The name of the law is taken from a German physicist and mathematician named Georg Simon Ohm. Ohm was the first to examine the relationship between electric current strength and potential difference in a conductor. In that research, Ohm found a mathematical relationship between electric current strength and potential difference, which eventually became known as Ohm’s Law.

    It is known that the greater the potential difference that appears, the greater the current flowing. The magnitude of the ratio between the potential difference and the electric current strength is always the same or constant. So that the potential difference is equivalent to the current strength (V ~ I). When viewed mathematically, it can be written that V = mxl, m is a constant ratio between the potential difference and the current strength.

    One of the formulas that describes Ohm’s Law is that it reads, “the current flowing in a conductor is proportional to the potential difference that exists between the ends of the conductor provided that the temperature is constant or constant.

    In everyday life, sometimes we will find an electrical device that reads 220 V/2 A. This writing was not written without a purpose. Where the purpose of this article is to inform that the electric device will work optimally and for a long time if it is installed with a voltage of 220 V and a current of 2 A. Then, what if it is installed at a higher or lower voltage? For example, if there are two lamps that say 220 V/2 A, they are installed at 440 V and 55 V. So what will happen?

    For lamps that are installed at a higher voltage, it will result in the lamp shining brighter but not lasting long. Meanwhile, for lights that are installed at a lower current voltage, it will cause the lights to become dim. Therefore, you should always pay attention to the instructions for using power tools.

    Understanding Ohm’s Law

    According to Wikipedia, Ohm’s Law is an electric current which is proportional to voltage and inversely proportional to resistance. Meanwhile, according to Collins Dictionary, Ohm’s Law is the principle of an electric current flowing through a conductor that is proportional to the potential difference. However, the temperature remains constant. The proportional constant is the resistance of the conductor.

    Ohm’s Law equations and Ohm’s Law formulas describe how current flows through any material when a voltage is applied. One thing you need to remember is the difference between low resistance and high resistance. An electric cable or other conductor has low resistance, meaning that current will flow easily. Conversely, if the resistance is high, the current will be difficult to flow.

    Understanding Ohm’s Law above will not help much if we don’t know what variables we use, what are the equations, and how to use them. If based on the American English Dictionary, Ohm’s Law has a ratio that is proportional to the current in the dc circuit given the voltage and inversely proportional to the resistance. Not only dc, Ohm’s Law also applies to ac circuits.

    Ohm’s law is usually described by graphing the linear relationship between voltage (V) and current (I) in an electric circuit. We can imagine how Ohm’s Law looks like with a pipe illustration.

    a. The water pipe is the resistance (R) in the circuit, calculated in Ohms (Ω).
    b. Water is an electric current (I) flowing in a circuit, calculated in amperes (A).
    c. The difference in height between the water is the voltage (V) in the circuit, calculated in volts (V).

    From the explanation above, the illustration goes like this:

    a. If the water pipe is narrow or the resistance is high, this will limit the water or electric current flowing in the circuit.
    b. If the water pipes are wide or have low resistance, this will increase the water or electric current flowing in the circuit.

    Ohm’s Law sounds

    At first, Ohm’s Law consisted of two parts. The first part is the definition of resistance, namely V = IR. This relationship is often called Ohm’s Law. However, Ohm also said that R is a constant that does not depend on V or I. The relationship V =IR can be applied in any resistor, where V is the potential difference between the two ends of the resistance and I is the current flowing through it. While R is the resistance or resistance of the resistor.

    Ohm’s law itself reads, “The strength of the current flowing in a conductor or resistance is proportional to the potential difference or voltage between the ends of the conductor. The statement can be written as follows, namely I ∞ V.”

    In everyday life, current strength is needed like electric current strength. For example, when connecting a wire to a 6 V battery, the current flow will be doubled compared to when connecting to a 3 V battery.

    From here, let’s say we take an example of electric current with the flow of water in a pipe or river which is affected by gravity. If the pipe and river are almost flat, the water velocity will be relatively small. However, if one end is higher than the other, then the flow velocity or current will be greater. The greater the difference in height, the greater the current. That said, the amount of current flowing in the wire does not only depend on the voltage. But it also depends on the resistance provided by the wire to the flow of electrons. Pipe walls or river banks and also the rocks in the middle, can provide obstacles to the flow of currents. In the same way, electrons will be slowed down due to interactions with the atoms of the wire. The higher the resistance, the smaller the current in a voltage V.

    Electrical resistance

    According to Ohm’s Law equation, electrical resistance can be interpreted as the quotient of the potential difference between the ends of the conductor and the current flowing in the conductor itself. To commemorate the services of Georg Simon Ohm, his name is used as a unit of electrical resistance that we know as Ohm or (Ω) or the conductor is said to have a resistance of one ohm if an electric current of one ampere flows in the conductor. Where it is due to the potential difference between the ends of the conductor of one volt.

    Types of Barriers

    In everyday life, there are several types of resistance or resistors that are often used according to their needs. The types of obstacles are as follows:

    a. Fixed Resistors

    In fixed resistors which are generally made of carbon or thin nichrome wire, the value of the resistance is symbolized by various colors that circle on the outer shell. The color symbol has a meaning according to its location.

    b. Variable Resistors

    There are two types of variable resistors that we know on the market, namely rotating and shifting type variable resistors. Basically, the way the two resistors work is the same, namely by shifting or rotating the sliding contacts to increase or decrease the resistance value as needed. We can find these variable resistors in the volume system on radios, tape recorders, and other electronic equipment.

    Measuring Barriers

    From the explanation above, we already know how to measure the amount of current or potential difference in a conductor. Now, we will discuss how to measure the amount of electrical resistance. Where to measure electrical resistance there are two ways that we can use, namely directly and indirectly.

    a. Measuring Barriers Directly

    Most people must have known a multimeter, which is a tool that can be used to measure current strength, potential difference, and resistance. To measure resistance using a multimeter, we must first turn the switch inside the multimeter in the direction marked R. That way, the multimeter already functions as an ohm meter or resistance meter. Connect the ends of the multimeter terminals with the ends of the objects whose resistance will be measured. Then pay attention to the scale displayed on the multimeter.

    b. Measuring Barriers Indirectly

    Apart from using a multimeter, we can also combine voltmeters and ammeters together in the electrical circuit where the resistance will be measured. The voltmeter is connected in parallel, while the ammeter is connected in series with the object whose resistance is to be measured.

    c. Barriers to the Conducting Wire

    The conductor wire used in electric wire will certainly have resistance, even though the value is small. To determine the factors that affect the amount of resistance of a conductor.

    Ohm’s Law formula

    Mathematically, Ohm’s Law formula is V = I x R. Where I is the electric current flowing in a conductor in units of amperes. While V is the electric voltage at both ends of the conductor in units of volts. Then R is the value of the electrical resistance or resistance in a conductor in units of Ohms. The relationship between electric current, resistance, and voltage in a circuit is in Ohm’s Law.

    When making experiments on electricity, Ohm found the following things:

    a. If the resistance is constant, the current in each circuit is directly proportional to the voltage. But if the voltage increases, the current will also increase and if the voltage decreases, the current will also decrease.
    b. If the voltage remains constant, then the current in the circuit becomes inversely proportional to the circuit. But if the resistance increases, the current will decrease and if the resistance decreases, the current will increase.

    In a constant resistance, the current as well as the voltage will vary.

    Ohm’s law itself can be expressed in the form of a formula. Where the basic formula is stated as follows.

    R = the amount of electrical resistance
    I = the amount of electric current flowing
    E = the amount of electric voltage that is in a closed circuit

    Ohm’s Law circuit

    Below are several circuits in calculating Ohm’s Law, including:

    a. How to Calculate Series Resistors

    In a series of resistors arranged in series, the total resistor value can be obtained by adding up all the resistors arranged in series. This refers to the notion that the current strength at all points in a series circuit will always be the same.

    b. How to Calculate Parallel Resistors

    In a series of resistors arranged in parallel, the calculation of the total resistor value refers to the understanding that the magnitude of the current entering the branch is equal to the magnitude of the current coming out of the branch.

    c. How to Calculate Series Capacitors

    In a series of capacitors arranged in series, the total capacitor value is obtained by the calculation above.

    d. How to Calculate Parallel Capacitors

    In a series of several capacitors arranged in parallel, the total capacitor value is the sum of all the values ​​of the capacitors arranged in parallel.

    Example of Ohm’s Law Problem

    Three resistors are arranged in series, each value is 4 ohms, 3 ohms and 5 ohms. This resistance is then installed at 120 volts. Calculate the magnitude of the voltage across the 3 ohm resistance.

    Answer:
    R1 = 4 ohms
    R2 =3 ohms
    R3 = 5 ohms
    V = 120 volts

    Rtotal = 4 ohms + 3 ohms + 5 ohms = 12 ohms
    V = I . R
    I = V/Rtotal = 120 /12 = 10 A
    V on R2 (rated 3 ohms) is
    VR2 = IX R2
    = 10 X 3
    = 30 volts

    Book & Article Recommendations

  • What is Observation? The following is the definition, characteristics, purpose, and types

    What is Observation? The following is the definition, characteristics, purpose, and types

    What is Observation – Observation is one way to get any information from an event by observing it directly. As is known, science is the basis of all events or activities that occur either in a small or a larger scope.

    Basically, all of this knowledge is then obtained from learning about events that occur around us or obtained indirectly by reading or listening to explanations from other parties. To find out more about observation, then you can see this review, Sinaumed’s.

    Definition of Observation

    In general, the definition of observation is an activity of observing a particular object carefully directly at the research location. In addition, this observation also includes recording activities that are carried out systematically about all the symptoms of the object being studied.

    There are also other opinions which say that the notion of observation is an act or process of observing something or someone carefully in order to obtain some information or simply to prove the truth of a study.

    It can also be said that the observation process as a data collection technique is in accordance with the research objectives. This activity is also planned and recorded in a systematic way and can be controlled in terms of reliability and validity.

    Definition of Observation According to Experts

    In addition to the general understanding, experts also have their own opinions about what is meant by observation activities. Here are some of them:

    1. Kartini Kartono

    In Kartini Kartono’s opinion, observation is testing with a specific purpose to find out something, especially those aimed at collecting facts, data, scores, and the value of a verbalization. It can also be called the disclosure of words about everything that has been observed and further investigated.

    2. Nurkancana

    Meanwhile, the definition of observation according to Nurkancana is a way of making an assessment by means of direct and systematic observation. The data that has been obtained in these observations are then recorded in a special observation note. This recording activity is also part of the observation activity or an object.

    3. Seville

    Not much different from the two previous experts, Seville also argues that observation or observation in a simple sense is a process in which the researcher looks at the situation of a research being conducted. The method must also be in accordance with what is used and in the form of observing interactions or conditions of teaching and learning, behavior, and group interaction.

    4. Gibson RI and Mitchell MH

    Observation according to Gibson RI and Mitchell MH is a technique that can be used as degree selection. The goal is to determine a decision and conclusion on the observed object. So, it is clear that observations like this cannot be done alone, but must be assisted by using various other research methods.

    5. Patton

    Patton said that observation is an accurate and specific method. Data collection techniques must also have a purpose and be able to find all kinds of information about all ongoing activities to then be used as an object of study in a research.

    6. Arifin

    Furthermore, the definition of observation according to Arifin is a process of observing and recording systematically, logically, objectively, and rationally which talks about various phenomena. The phenomenon in question is something that occurs in an artificial situation to be able to achieve a certain goal or actually.

    7. Nawawi and Martini

    Finally, the definition of observation according to Nawawi and Martini. Both agree that observation is an observation and recording in sequence. This observation also consists of all the elements that appear in a phenomenon regarding the various objects of research. Then, the results of these observations will also be reported in a systematic manner and in accordance with applicable rules.

    Observation Features

    Basically, observation is an activity that aims to find information from objects. However, this observation activity has its own characteristics. In general, there are three characteristics of observation, including:

    1. Objective

    Objective, or carried out based on the state of a single real object that is directly observed.

    2. Factual

    Factual, or observations made in accordance with the facts derived from observations that are proven to be true without various unclear allegations.

    3. Systematic

    Systematic, this observation activity is carried out in accordance with a method that has been determined from the start and not haphazardly.

    Observation Benefits

    For those of you who are going to observe objects, it is mandatory to also make plans related to the most optimal observation method. The results of these observations can then be conveyed in the form of real data which will provide information and learning to the reader.

    After knowing the function and purpose of the above, then what are the benefits of making observations? The various benefits of observation include:

    • Record an event or event in a coherent and chronological manner
    • Describes an incident or event with a high degree of accuracy
    • The findings can then be interpreted easily.
    • Observation results can also help interpret a situation in the real world.
    • Can be combined using other techniques to generate reports.

    Observational Purpose

    Observers or researchers have the goal of observing objects or phenomena including:

    1. Describing Objects and Everything Related to Observation of the Five Senses

    The observers then have trained their five senses so that they can observe all events or objects carefully. Of course the ability of these trained five senses will be different from the ability of ordinary people. Everyone also has a different point of view. Observations with the five senses must also be supported by other observation techniques, namely extracting accurate data from the field directly.

    2. Drawing a Conclusion

    Objects that have been observed for a certain time will then provide conclusions about observations. This conclusion is then presented in the form of a report that can provide information or learning materials for readers.

    3. Obtaining Data or Information

    The purpose of making observations or observations is to obtain data or information from an object being observed. This data or information will then be shared with other parties in the form of scientific or non-scientific work. In addition, works that have been shown to the public will also receive praise and criticism.

    So, this researcher also needs a lot of time to make a work. In the sense of observation, the observer has a general purpose and depends on the various objects being observed.

    Observation Strengths and Weaknesses

    Observers then make observations about various methods such as tests, questionnaires, recorded images, and sound. Complete the observation by using blanks regarding the events or behavior of the various objects observed.

    Then, the observer only needs to give a check mark to the contents of the column according to the results of the observation. Conducting research on objects using the observation method also has advantages and disadvantages that you must understand. Below are the advantages and disadvantages of observation that you need to know:

    1. Excess Observation

    The following are the advantages of observation.

    1. Noting growth behavior and things related to object phenomena when an event takes place.
    2. Can obtain data from the subject directly either verbal communication or not.
    3. Observation of young children is also easier than adults. The reason is, children can reveal honest behaviors or answers while adults can give invalid or pretend answers.

    2. Lack of Observation

    Not only advantages, observation or observation also has disadvantages that need attention, namely:

    1. It takes a long time to make observations for certain events or events.
    2. This observation then takes longer and cannot be done directly.
    3. This observation activity can also be disturbed for incidents, incidents or things that are personal.

    For example, in observing the behavior of children who experience problems with parental quarrels or certain conflicts. In addition, the personal domain is also a weakness of observation, so that this activity cannot be observed optimally.

    Observation Example

    One example of observation is conducting research in an elementary school. Then, observations were made in the form of observations of student behavior towards the way of teaching a teacher. You can observe every learning process in class for a certain period of time by applying several methods.

    For example, by applying group methods for one week and individual methods at other times. Then, later you will draw conclusions about the behavior of students during the teaching and learning process.

    Observation Type

    In a book entitled Accurate in Indonesian (2019) by Sutarno, there are three types of observations that are often used in research. This is an explanation of the types of observation:

    1. Participatory Observation

    Participatory observation is a type of observation that is carried out by being actively involved in the things being observed. The observer must also go directly and carry out the process he directly observes. So then get a clear picture of what is observed.

    2. Systematic Observation

    Systematic observation is a type of observation that is also carried out with appropriate procedures or provisions that have been designed beforehand without violating these provisions. In order to be able to carry out systematic observations, observers must also determine in advance what factors underlie their observations.

    3. Experimental Observations

    Experimental observation is a type of observation that is carried out by holding an action to control the situation, and then making this observation of the phenomenon or phenomenon being studied.

    After reading this article to the end, has the question of what observation is answered? If not, you can find further information in books about research that can be found at sinaumedia.com .

    Hopefully all the discussion above is useful as well as adding insight to Sinaumed’s.

    To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

  • What is Ngabuburit? Activity Ideas To Wait For Iftar Time

    What is Ngabuburit? Activity Ideas To Wait For Iftar Time

    What is Ngabuburit – In this country, Indonesia, ngabuburit activities have become a tradition that is usually carried out when the month of Ramadan arrives. Both children, young people, adults, and even the elderly must have followed this special tradition of the month of Ramadan. In addition, not only Muslims who actually observe the fasting month of Ramadan follow this tradition, but also those who do not fast during Ramadan.

    They ngabuburit together as a form of preserving traditions that have existed for generations. There are many activities that can be done during this ngabuburit, from evening walks, takjil hunting, to listening to cults at the mosque.

    Then, what the heck is drowning? How is this ngabuburit tradition carried out in various parts of Indonesia? What activities can you do during this ngabuburit time?

    Let’s look at the following reviews!

    What is Ngabuburit?

    Based on the Sundanese Language Dictionary which has been published by the Sunda Language and Literature Institute (LBSS), the word ‘ngabuburit’ comes from ‘burit’ which means ‘ afternoon ‘.

    Meanwhile in Sundanese, ‘ngabuburit’ is ‘lakuran’ from the phrase ‘ ngalantung ngadagoan burit ‘, which means ‘ relaxing while waiting for the afternoon ‘.

    In contrast to the Minang language, this ngabuburit is often called ‘ malengahsahasao ‘ which means ‘ to do activities to divert hunger and thirst during fasting ‘.

    So, it can be concluded that ngabuburit is an activity carried out to wait for the Maghrib call to prayer before breaking the fast during the month of Ramadan.

    Well, the term ‘ngabuburit’ gradually spread to all corners of Indonesia before the 1990s until it finally became a tradition today. Usually, this ngabuburit activity will be held at 15.30 to 17.30 (depending on when the Maghrib call to prayer will resound).

    In the process of its implementation, ngabuburit is often filled with traveling, takjil hunting, participating in cults, playing kites, and some even playing football. Therefore, when the month of Ramadan arrives, there will be many sellers selling traditional food and snacks either on the side of the road or at the market just before breaking the fast.

    This ngabuburit phenomenon has been carried out since ancient times, but of course the activities carried out can be different. In the past, especially in remote villages, people would hang out by plaiting pandan leaf mats, joking around with their families and neighbors, and reading the Koran in the surau (tadarusan).

    As time progresses, the ngabuburit tradition also develops. Nowadays, young people usually do ngabuburit by hanging out in cafes, riding motorbikes together, walking around the town square, playing football, looking for takjil snacks, and cooking food for breaking the fast later.

    Ngabuburit Tradition in Several Regions of Indonesia

    1. Sailboat Racing

    The ngabuburit tradition, which is filled with sailboat racing activities, can be found in the Surabaya area. The local community, to be precise those who live around Kenjeran Beach, will do a miniature sailboat race. Not only that, the mini sailboat will be decorated with a variety of colors to add to the beauty of the competition.

    2. Kumbohan

    Kumbohan is a ngabuburit tradition in Lamongan. The activity is in the form of hunting munggut fish around the Bengawan Solo River. There are many types of fish that are hunted, ranging from shrimp, lobster, bader, keting, to milkfish.

    The way to catch it is to wait for the water in the river to become cloudy. The fish will be ‘drunk’ because of new water shipments or changes in water that was originally clear to cloudy. In addition, the water in the river will recede so fish will be easy to catch. Later, people will wait for the fish to rise to the surface and catch them.

    3. Relax on the Beach

    Ngabuburit activities by relaxing on the beach are usually carried out by people who live around the beach. For example, at Taman Pandan Beach in Sukabumi, West Java.

    On these beaches there will also be sellers selling takjil food to breaking fast food so that relaxing time will be enjoyable.

    4. Morning romance

    Unlike its name, this ngabuburit activity has absolutely nothing to do with finding a mate. The ngabuburit activity which is usually carried out on the Ampera Bridge, Palembang, is in the form of setting off a number of firecrackers along the bridge while waiting for the Maghrib call to prayer to ring out.

    5. Hunt for Takjil at the Surprised Market

    Ngabuburit is not complete without takjil hunting. In various parts of Indonesia, there are many surprised markets that provide a variety of takjil snacks at various prices.

    This surprised market is called ‘shocked’ because on average the sellers appear suddenly only at certain times, for example when the month of Ramadan is approaching breaking the fast.

    6. Getting Around Using a Chart Boat

    This ngabuburit activity is usually often carried out in Bangka Belitung. A number of young people will later go around the Bangka Belitung area using a charter boat while waiting for the time to break their fast.

    7. Bleguran

    The ngabuburit tradition, which is filled with bleguran activities, has been carried out since the 1970s around the Jakarta area.

    In this bleguran activity, later the young people will make bamboo cannons and blow them up so that the sound of the boom sounds like a cannon. Even so, this traditional game does not use bullets and does not produce dangerous explosions.

    Activities That Can Be Done To Fill Ngabuburit

    In this month of Ramadan in 2022, like it or not, we will still have to coexist with the Covid-19 pandemic again, like last year. Even so, we can still do ngabuburit to wait for the time to break the fast.

    There are many activities that can be done to fill the time spent hanging out, and can even be done at home to avoid the risk of contracting the Covid-19 virus. What are these activities? Let’s look at the following description!

    1. Make Your Own Takjil Cuisine

    If in previous years, we used to buy takjil food at the market during ngabuburit, this year will be different. That is, you can make your own takjil dishes in your style.

    For example, you like banana kolak takjil. Of course, you can spend your ngabuburit time while waiting for the time to break your fast by making this banana compote, with your family, relatives, or boarding house friends if you are boarding a boarding house .

    Besides being more economical, you also get a larger portion than buying at the market. Of course it will be hygienic as well.

    2. Watching Movies

    When you have finished helping your mother cook food for breaking the fast, then you can wait for the Maghrib call to prayer to resound by watching a movie. Try not to make films that contain indecent scenes, because they can interfere with fasting. It’s better to watch comedy or animation (cartoon) genre films.

    Currently, there are many platforms that provide films from various countries and genres, namely Netflix, WeTV, iQiyi, and many more.

    3. Participate in online cults

    During Ramadan, there will be many cults held by well-known ustadz and ustadzah online. Even though it is done online, it does not prevent us from getting useful lectures and advice for the life of the world and the hereafter.

    4. Afternoon Stroll

    Most Indonesians usually do Ngabuburit with evening walks to fill their spare time waiting for the time to break their fast. These afternoon walks are usually in the town square while hunting for takjil food.

    5. Playing Kites

    Even though it looks like a simple children’s game, playing with kites can also be an option to fill your iftar time, you know…

    If you want to fly a kite, try to do it in a wide field, not in an area full of electric cables because it can be dangerous. In addition, the kite strings that have been broken are immediately cut and thrown away, so as not to endanger other people passing by.

    6. Exercise

    You can exercise in the afternoon while waiting for the time to break your fast. For example doing an afternoon run, basketball, volleyball, soccer, or badminton. Apart from health reasons, the free time before the Maghrib call to prayer will also not be felt.

    So, that’s a review of what ngabuburit is and how the ngabuburit tradition is carried out in various parts of Indonesia. The ngabuburit activity is absolutely no prohibition in its implementation because it has become a tradition. However, as good Muslims, don’t forget to pray the Asr prayer before leaving for ngabuburit….

  • What is Multitasking? Pros and Cons and Tips!

    What is Multitasking? Pros and Cons and Tips!

    Multitasking – Actually, the term “multitasking” has various definitions, especially in the field of computer programs and everyday human abilities. If in the field of computer programs, the term leads to the notion of a method of processing programs simultaneously while using CPU resources. However, in terms of human ability in everyday life, of course the term will have a different definition, namely the human ability to carry out several tasks simultaneously.

    If you look at the brief definition, Sinaumed’s will definitely think that this is natural and not impossible because many people have succeeded in doing it. When in fact, humans cannot have good multitasking abilities, you know… Then actually, what is multitasking? Why can’t humans have good multitasking abilities? Does this ability actually have a negative impact on our daily productivity?

    So, so that Sinaumed’s doesn’t misunderstand this, let’s look at the following review!

    Definition of Multitasking

    Basically, multitasking is the human ability to cope with the many tasks received, by carrying out activities in the form of changing tasks. Many experts have formulated the definition of this multitask. According to Applebaum and Marchionni (2008), stated that multitasking is a condition when the task becomes double (dual task) or more, then done together at one time. Then there is also the opinion of Salvucci and Tangen (2011) who argue that multitasking is when there are multiple tasks that are done simultaneously in just a short time.

    In short, multitasking is human behavior when working on tasks simultaneously at one time with the hope that they will be completed quickly, usually the number of tasks is more than two. When carrying out this multitasking behavior, individuals tend to give longer attention to one task, before finally moving on to another task. Although in fact, this behavior will actually occur due to overlapping attention to the tasks.

    These assignments can vary , not only in the form of scientific assignments from schools, campuses, or offices. Homework in the form of cleaning the bathroom tub, ironing clothes, sweeping, washing dishes, these are also tasks that are usually carried out by housewives through this multitasking behavior.

    Although in fact, this behavior is considered unhealthy, especially in the mindset of the human brain. But in fact, this behavior is much needed in completing tasks in everyday life. Even in this behavior, many people try to regulate their “actions going forward” so that they can immediately complete several tasks properly and efficiently.

    This phenomenon is actually not a new phenomenon, it is even possible that Sinaumed’s often does it in an effort to complete daily tasks. This behavior is usually carried out by individuals in every activity, be it when working, eating, even in relaxed conditions. Without realizing it, this multitasking behavior can actually cause distraction. According to a survey conducted by Russ and Crews in 2014, when carrying out this multitasking behavior, it took them an average of about 9.28 minutes to switch back from the side task to the main task.

    According to Salvucci and Tangen, this multitasking behavior can indeed help and increase human productivity to make it more efficient and effective. Especially if the number of tasks or work is more than two and must be completed at the same time. Unfortunately, this behavior actually greatly affects the ability of human memory.

    Types of Multitasking

    Previously, it was explained that multitasking is human behavior to do tasks simultaneously at one time. Salvucci and Tangen (2011) have classified this behavior into two types, namely concurrent multitasking and sequential multitasking.

    1. Concurrent Multitasking

    Namely human behavior in carrying out tasks simultaneously with short “time cuts”, so that it does not hinder the work process of the main task at all. Activities in this type of multitasking allow individuals to carry out their tasks simultaneously and efficiently, in order to improve work performance. For example: taking notes while listening to discussions during meetings, driving while reading maps from Google Maps, listening to learning videos while taking notes.

    2. Sequential Multitasking

    In this type of multitasking, it is in the form of individual behavior to switch tasks after doing one main task. In order to be able to carry out Sequential Multitasking, it requires the ability to focus and full attention. For example: typing assignments and then moving on to other tasks in the form of correcting work, waiting for water to boil while reading a book.

    Advantages and Disadvantages of Multitasking

    Advantages of Multitasking Behavior

    1. Work gets done faster. Because, you will be working on two or more different jobs at the same time.
    2. Save more time. So that you can complete other activities when your task or work has been completed.

    Disadvantages of Multitasking Behavior

    1. It can actually reduce performance and productivity. This is because concentration and focus will be split while working on two tasks simultaneously. There is even a possibility that you will get a lot of mistakes, so like it or not you also have to repeat your work again.
    2. Can trigger stress on the mind.
    3. Reducing self-ability in creative thinking. This of course will be critical, especially if your assignment is related to things that require creativity.
    4. Disturbing memory. Because, you don’t do your job in detail so you will most likely encounter a lot of mistakes.

    The Impact of Multitasking That Turns Out to Reduce Human Productivity

    Reporting from Sehatq.com , this behavior actually has a negative impact, both on health and on the results of the job. So, here are some of the impacts that might be taken into consideration by Sinaumed’s when they want to do multitasking.

    1. Lowering Focus

    When doing multitask activities, surely our thoughts and focus will be divided for one task with another. Especially if these two tasks require high focus. An example is calling while driving a motorized vehicle.

    In these activities, the focus will be divided on calling activities and driving vehicles. If you only look away for a moment, then one of the tasks will have the potential to experience an error so that it can be shaky and even dangerous.

    2. Work Takes Longer to Complete

    Even though many people believe that multitasking can make us save more time when doing tasks, it turns out that this is not entirely true, you know . Especially if these two tasks do take a long time to complete.

    There is even research from the University of Utah which states that driving a vehicle while chatting on a cell phone actually takes longer to arrive at their destination, compared to those who focus on driving only.

    3. Make Creativity Power Decrease

    You need to know , Sinaumed’s , that multitasking behavior can actually make your brain work harder. Although it is true that the capacity of the brain is large, if it is used to perform multiple tasks simultaneously, of course it will burden the brain. If that’s the case, then the power of creativity in the brain will also decrease so that the results of our work are not optimal.

    4. Interfere with Brain Memory

    When multitasking, surely you will forget the details of one or even the two tasks you are doing. For example, if you read a novel while watching television, surely your memory for both the contents of the novel and television will be disturbed. Therefore, try to focus and complete one task first, then move on and complete other tasks.

    Especially if you are an adult, you must be able to make a priority scale to determine which work to do first, okay?

    5. Adding Stress

    Based on research conducted by the University of California Irvine, states that multitasking can make individuals alert and at the same time have a higher heart rate. The research subjects are office workers who apply multitasking behavior in the form of doing work while accessing work email.

    Not infrequently, this multitasking behavior can lead to depression and other anxiety disorders.

    Multitasking Tricks For Office Workers

    1. Always use a to do list on the work to be done. Then identify which jobs are easier and schedule your work time according to the targets on the job list.
    2. Choose similar tasks. The way to find out which tasks are similar is to see if these tasks have the same process or not.
    3. Avoid distraction alias diversion of focus while doing the task. Usually by avoiding using a smartphone while focusing on doing tasks.
    4. Take advantage of existing technology. An example is by turning on the automatic reply feature on your e-mail or social media. Especially if you’re on vacation.
    5. Always evaluate the results of work. Before you turn in your assignments, try to check them again for errors. If there is, you can reduce your multitasking behavior in the future.

    State of the Brain in Multitasking Behavior

    Based on research in a journal article entitled “Memory in Multitasking” by Ni Made Swasti Wulanyani, states that the brain’s ability to act more and more in this multitasking behavior, especially in aspects of memory as well as human cognitive control.

    In terms of human memory, this multitasking behavior will definitely be related to the role of prospective memory and working memory . Prospective memory is the brain’s ability to remember what things to do in the future. We often use the existence of this prospective memory , for example there is a child trying to remember that he has to borrow books from the library to use in doing homework.

    The role of prospective memory in multitasking behavior can also be proven by individuals who experience problems in the application of strategies and organizations, for example when they are unable to meet deadlines and keep promises simultaneously. In the brain, there is a Brodmann Area 10 or commonly called the frontal pole which plays an important role in multitasking situations. Then working memory is a memory resource that has limited capacity and duration, especially when processing information. The function of working memory is to temporarily store information when completing a particular task.

    The involvement of prospective memory and working memory in multitasking behavior actually requires a slow response time, especially when the need arises to perform prospective tasks. The slow response is related to the working memory capacity of each individual.

    Multitasking Ability In Guiding Children Activities

    Based on research from a journal article entitled “The Multitasking Role of Parents in Guiding Children’s Learning” conducted by Metros Prihatin, states that multitasking behavior does not always have to be done to complete multiple tasks at one time, but can also be done when guiding children. Sinaumed’s must have known that children’s learning patterns are not always carried out at school, but also at home, so that the role of parents will also act as big as the teacher. In accordance with the Educational Trilogy put forward by Ki Hajar Dewantara, that education is a shared responsibility between families, schools and society.

    Parents are also obligated and fully responsible for participating in educating and preparing their children so that they can later lead a social life. To carry out the role of an ideal parent, it sometimes requires multitasking behavior, namely by dividing the focus between daily work and educating children. Both the father and mother also play a major role in parenting.

    In this day and age, many fathers are multitasking by doing their daily work while accompanying their children. Let’s say there is a father who sells while accompanying his son who is doing his homework. There are also those who are taking care of fish ponds while accompanying their children who are doing PAS. Then there is also a father who is preparing fertilizer and agricultural tools while teaching his son to do math assignments. Meanwhile for mothers, there is also no difference in this multitasking behavior. Usually, however, mothers have a stronger managerial role, while fathers have stronger supervisory abilities.

    So, from this it can be concluded that multitasking behavior is not fully carried out in carrying out office tasks, but also in matters of taking care of children. Especially during the Covid-19 pandemic as it is today where work and school patterns are carried out with the Work From Home system . So that it will make parents have a bigger role in terms of multitasking, namely in carrying out their daily tasks while educating children.

    So, that’s a review of what multitasking is and its impact on the results of the work being done. Does Sinaumed’s often do this multitasking? If so, it’s better to reduce it because it turns out to have a negative impact on the ability of the brain.

    Source:

    Wulanyani, NMS (2015). Memory in Multitasking. Psychology Bulletin , 23 (2), 112-116.

    Concerned, M. (2022). The Multitasking Role of Parents in Guiding Children’s Learning. Mandala Education Scientific Journal , 8 (2).

    Arini, DP (2020). Multitasking As A Lifestyle, Can It Improve Performance: A Literature Review. Journal of Psychology MANDALA , 4 (1).

    Also Read!

    • What is Healing?
    • Cognitive Ability To Think
    • Characteristics of Computational Thinking
    • Synchronic Thinking Concept
    • Definition of Design Thinking
    • Definition and Function of Ideology
    • When is the Right Time to Read a Book
    • What is Mindset?
    • Understanding IQ, EQ, and TQ
  • What is MOU: Definition, Characteristics, Types, and Purpose of Making it

    What is MOU: Definition, Characteristics, Types, and Purpose of Making it

    What is MOU – Memorandum of Understanding, this phrase which is often abbreviated as MOU is one of the important components in making an agreement between two parties, usually used in business.

    Through this letter, the parties involved in the agreement can express key points that are important in order to make the negotiation process run smoother. Because of that MOU cannot be made just like that.

    Before making it, Sinaumed’s must understand the position of this letter in the law and what must be in it. Therefore, in this article we will discuss what an MOU is, starting from its definition, characteristics, how to make it, to examples.

    What is an MoU?

    According to Munir Fuady (1997), a Memorandum of Understanding is a preliminary agreement which will be followed up and explained in more detail in another agreement. Therefore, the MOU only contains the essentials.

    Equivalent to three money, I Nyoman Sudana, et al (1998) view the MOU as a preliminary agreement that will be followed by other agreements. In other words, a Memorandum of Understanding is an initial agreement in the form of a formal document in making an agreement between two or more parties.

    In practice, there are two views regarding the binding strength of MOUs. The first view considers the MOU as a mere procedural document that has no legal force at all. Meanwhile, the second view considers the MOU as a legal document that has binding legal force and can be used as a basis for claiming or defending rights.

    In short, the first side views the MOU as part of the contract formation process while the second side sees the MOU as a form of basic agreement. According to the regulations, there really is no law that specifically regulates this MOU. As a result, the binding is only based on the commitment and moral responsibility of the parties involved.

    Thus, if the MOU that is made fulfills the legal requirements of the agreement set out in the Civil Code, then the MOU is considered valid in the eyes of the law.

    By the way, a Memorandum of Understanding in Indonesia is also known as a memorandum of understanding, memorandum of understanding, cooperation agreement, or preliminary agreement. So don’t be confused if you find these names, OK?

    The difference between an MOU and a Letter of Agreement

    After reading the meaning of the MOU above, maybe you are a little confused because it turns out that an MOU is quite similar to an agreement. In fact, both are different letters. Here’s the difference:

    Difference MOUs Agreement letter
    Legal force There is no legislation that regulates specifically so that the binder is only the responsibility and commitment of the parties involved. It is regulated specifically in the Criminal Code and has a clear legal binding
    Document content It only contains matters that are essential and must be known by the parties involved. Load detailed information. Such as obligations, rights, consequences, responsibilities, and others.

    MOU features

    A Memorandum of Understanding  or MOU has different characteristics from a letter of agreement in general. This difference then makes the MOU an alternative to create a collaboration. The characteristics of the MOU are as follows:

    1. Contains a statement of willingness to cooperate with each other
    2. It is a preliminary which will be followed by other, more detailed agreements
    3. Generally made concise, even just one page
    4. It only contains the main things that are general in nature as an expression of willingness to cooperate with each other
    5. Usually there is no coercive obligation on the parties involved
    6. It is temporary, meaning that if there is no follow-up in the form of an agreement, the MOU will be canceled by itself. However, if all parties agree, the validity period of this MOU can be extended.
    7. Not emphasizing the application of legal sanctions to each party involved
    8. Usually made in the form of an underhand agreement.

    Types of MOUs

    Based on the residence of the parties making the collaboration, MOU can be divided into two types, namely:

    National MOUs

    This is a type of MOU where all parties live in Indonesia, are Indonesian Citizens and Indonesian Legal Entities. For example, an MOU made by the local government with a company or an MOU between a native of Bandung and a resident of Surabaya.

    International MOUs

    The second type is an MOU made by parties living in different countries. That is, one party lives in Indonesia and is an Indonesian citizen while the other party comes from another country.

    Generally, this MOU is made when the Indonesian government wants to cooperate with foreign governments, legal entities, or companies.

    Purpose of Making MOU

    1. Avoid cancellation difficulties

    The MOU can be used to avoid the difficulty of canceling an agreement in the future. For example, if the business prospects are unclear or it is not certain whether the cooperation will be followed up.

    2. Temporary binder

    Sometimes signing a contract can take a long time because the negotiations are quite tough. Therefore, instead of having no ties before the contract was signed, an MOU was made that was valid for a certain time.

    3. Give time to make a decision to the parties involved

    When the parties involved feel that they still need time to think before signing a contract, the MOU will be made as a temporary agreement.

    4. To be followed up by more skilled staff

    Usually MOUs are made and signed by executives from a company, while for more detailed agreements will be designed and negotiated specifically by staff who are more technically skilled.

    Things that Must Be in Mou

    Actually, the things that must be in an MOU are a statement of agreement between two or more parties who agree to cooperate in order to achieve a goal.

    Even so, there are parts that must be included in the MOU according to the technique for preparing a Memorandum of Understanding that is published on the BPKP’s official website. Here’s the full explanation:

    Title

    The MOU title must be made precisely so that it is clear who the parties are involved and the nature of the MOU being made. In addition, the title must also be short, concise, and in accordance with the applicable EYD rules.

    Finally, the MOU must be agreed upon by all existing parties and if necessary include the logo of the agency involved.

    Opening

    The preamble is written after the title and forms the first part of the MOU. This section consists of titimangsa (day, date, month, year), place of signing of the MOU, existing positions of the parties, and considerations.

    In the position section, the parties are usually referred to as the FIRST PARTY and SECOND PARTY which can be individuals, private legal entities, or public legal entities.

    In the consideration section, it must contain a brief description of the main ideas behind the making of the MOU. Usually this section begins with the sentence “By considering the following matters” and then continues with the main ideas that exist.

    Each main idea is written in a sentence which is a unified meaning and always begins with a letter of the alphabet, begins with the word “that”, and ends with a semicolon (;).

    The substance (contents) of the MOU

    Each party that will make the MOU can determine its contents together. Usually the contents represent what they really want and can be written in a short or long way, depending on the agreement. However, often this substance is written briefly and a more detailed formulation will be written in the contents of the contract.

    What must be included in the substance of the MOU are:

    • The intent or purpose of the parties in carrying out mutually beneficial activities.
    • The scope of activities that contains an overview of the activities to be carried out.
    • Realization of activities in the form of implementation and details of activities from the MOU.
    • The timeframe indicating the validity period of the MOU.
    • The costs of implementing activities incurred to carry out activities. This fee can come from one of the parties or all parties or even other sources that are legitimate and have been mutually agreed upon.
    • Transitional rules that contain changes that can occur and can only be made if agreed by all parties.

    Closing

    Closing sentences should be kept simple and not verbose.

    Signature of all parties

    The signature is below the closing section and is the place for all parties involved to put signatures and full names.

    MOU example

    Simple MoU example

    MEMORANDUM OF UNDERSTAND

    (MEMORANDUM OF UNDERSTANDING)

    On this day …………….. date …………….. month …………….. year …………….., each of the undersigned parties:

    1. Name : ……………..……………..……………..……………..……………..

    Work : ……………..……………..……………..……………..……………..

    Address : ……………..……………..……………..……………..……………..

    Number: ……………..in this case acting for and on behalf of himself, hereinafter referred to in this agreement as the FIRST PARTY. 

    2. Name : ……………..……………..……………..……………..……………..

    Work : ……………..……………..……………..……………..……………..

    Address : ……………..……………..……………..……………..……………..

    Based on Identity Card/KTP: ……………..…………….. Number: …………….. in this case acting for and on behalf of himself, hereinafter referred to as the SECOND PARTY. 

    Both parties agree to carry out the cooperation as outlined in the text of the cooperation agreement with the following conditions:

    1. ……………………..

    2. …………………….

    3. ……………………..

    FIRST PARTY SECOND PARTY

    (…………………..) (…………………)

    Example of MoU between agencies

    MEMORANDUM OF UNDERSTANDING

    MEMORANDUM OF UNDERSTANDING )

    BETWEEN

    LEGAL AID

    WITH

    INDONESIAN ADVOCATE ASSOCIATION (PERADI)

    Number: …………………………….

    On this day …………date ………… month …… year ……, THE PARTIES who have signed below:

    1. Name : ……………..……………..……………..……………..

    Position : ……………..……………..……………..……………..

    Address : ……………..……………..……………..……………..

    In carrying out this position acting for and on behalf of the Legal Aid Institute/LBH…………….. hereinafter referred to as the FIRST PARTY.

    2. Name : ……………..……………..……………..……………..

    Position : ……………..……………..……………..……………..

    Address : ……………..……………..……………..……………..

    Carrying out this position and therefore acting for and on behalf of the Indonesian Advocates Association (PERADI), hereinafter referred to as the SECOND PARTY. 

    THE FIRST PARTY and THE SECOND PARTY , hereinafter referred to as the PARTIES, agree to enter into cooperation based on the principle of partnership and provide mutual benefits with the following conditions:

    article 1

    OBJECTIVE

    This collaboration aims to develop legal knowledge and provide legal aid services to the public.

    Section 2

    FORM OF COOPERATION

    THE SECOND PARTY provides professional training in providing legal consulting services and/or legal assistance as long as required by the FIRST PARTY

    Article 3

    SCOPE OF COOPERATION

    The scope of this cooperation includes:

    1. Provision of free training related to legal consulting services.
    2. Mutual cooperation in providing legal aid to the community.
    3. Other matters deemed necessary and agreed upon by the parties.

    Article 4

    TIME PERIOD

    1. This cooperation is valid for 1 (one) year from the date of signing of this Memorandum of Understanding and can be extended in accordance with the agreement of THE PARTIES.
    2. The implementation of this cooperation will be evaluated every 3 (three) months.
    3. This Memorandum of Understanding on cooperation will be followed up by THE PARTIES by issuing cooperation agreements/contracts to determine the implementation of the program of activities as stipulated in Article 3 above.
    4. All differences of opinion and/or disputes arising in the implementation of this cooperation will be resolved by the PARTIES by deliberation.

    Article 5

    CLOSING

    1. Any changes and other matters that have not been regulated in this Memorandum of Understanding will be further regulated in writing and carried out by deliberation to reach a consensus by the PARTIES which will become an integral part of this Memorandum of Understanding.
    2. This Memorandum of Understanding on cooperation is drawn up in 2 (two) copies on sufficiently stamped paper and has the same legal force, one copy each for the PARTIES.

    Thus this Memorandum of Understanding on cooperation was drawn up and signed by THE PARTIES in good faith and full of responsibility.

    …………….., …………………………….

    FIRST PARTY SECOND PARTY

    (…………………) (………………..)

    Example of a business cooperation MoU

    MEMORANDUM OF UNDERSTANDING

    MEMORANDUM OF UNDERSTANDING )

    BETWEEN

    PT. BANK ……………..……………..

    WITH

    PT. ……………..……………..

    Number: ……………..……………..……………..

    On this day, …………….. dated …………….., a Memorandum of Understanding was signed, hereinafter referred to as the MoU by and between:

    Name : ……………..……………..……………..……………..

    Position : PRESIDENT DIRECTOR OF PT BANK ……………..……………..

    Address : ……………..……………..……………..……………..

    In this case acting for and on behalf of PT BANK …………….. domiciled at ……………..…………….. according to Deed No. …………….. date ……………. made by Notary …………….. domiciled at …………….. and hereinafter referred to as the FIRST PARTY. 

    Name : ……………..……………..……………..……………..

    Position : Main Director of PT ……………..……………..

    Address : ……………..……………..……………..……………..

    In this case acting for and on behalf of PT ASURANSI TAKAFUL …………… domiciled in …………….. and hereinafter referred to as the SECOND PARTY.

    Furthermore, each party hereby explains in advance the following matters:

    1. THE FIRST PARTY is a financial institution in the form of a bank, where the products offered are in the form of raising funds, channeling funds, and other banking services.
    2. THE SECOND PARTY is a financial institution that offers insurance business services.

    In relation to the above, the parties agree to implement the provisions of this MoU as follows:

    article 1

    PURPOSE AND OBJECTIVES

    1. Both parties agreed to work together for mutual benefit in order to improve services to the community.
    2. Both parties agreed to become a riba-free financial institution.

    Section 2

    TIME PERIOD

    This cooperation is valid for a period of …………….. years commencing from …………….. to …………….. and can be extended according to the agreement of both parties.

    Article 3

    RIGHTS AND OBLIGATIONS

    Each party has the following rights and obligations:

    (1) The FIRST PARTY’s obligations include:

    1. Providing investment-based capital in the form of mudharabah financing.
    2. Marketing Takaful Insurance products ( Bancassurance ) to every interested customer
    3. Issuing a mudharabah deposit account as an investment medium for the SECOND PARTY.
    4. Conduct routine training related to socialization of banking products

    (2) The obligations of the SECOND PARTY include:

    1. Providing profit sharing for the FIRST PARTY if the insurance company makes a profit.
    2. Providing convenience to customers of PT. BANK …………….. who wants to buy an insurance policy.
    3. Conduct training ( training ) on ​​a regular basis related to socialization of insurance products.

    Article 4

    ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS

    Whereas regarding matters that are not or have not been sufficiently regulated in this MoU, will be provided in the form of an addendum that is an integral part of this MoU.

    Article 5

    CLOSING

    This agreement is made in 2 (two) copies, each of which is sufficiently stamped as evidence which has the same legal provisions.

    FIRST PARTY SECOND PARTY

    (………………….) (…………………)

    Thus the discussion of what is an MOU to an example of an MOU. Hopefully all the discussion above is useful for you. If you want to find books on business law, then you can get them at sinaumedia.com .

    this city limit

    batas kota ini
  • What is Mindset? Definition, Types, and Tips for Developing It

    What is Mindset? Definition, Types, and Tips for Developing It

    Understanding Mindset – Young people are often asked to improve their mindset or mindset so that they are successful in the future. So far, what we know, mindset or mindset is about what we believe. But, will this really affect our success or failure?

    Indeed, beliefs play an important role in determining what we want and whether we will achieve it. But what is a real mindset and how deeply does it influence our success?

    Definition of Mindset

    Sinaumed’s , it seems that mindset is very important for our present and future. However, we certainly have to know the meaning before implementing it in life. What is mindset ?

    These mindsets are the various beliefs that coalesce and ultimately shape the way we perceive things, the world, and ourselves. Given this definition, it makes sense that mindset will ultimately influence the way we think, feel, and behave in various situations. Consciously, we always act according to what we understand, right?

    Mindset is defined as a set of attitudes or beliefs that we hold. This mindset will influence our perception and how we live in the world. Even though we have one overall mindset , it can be made up of many smaller thought patterns.

    Some of those little mindsets might help us increase our well-being and success. Meanwhile, other mindsets hinder our ability to do so. Therefore, developing a certain mindset can go a long way in helping us achieve our goals, enjoy life, and be more successful.

    According to Literature

    There are various passages that define mindset . Here are some of them!

    According to M. Yunus SB in the book Mindset Revolution: Optimizing Unlimited Brain Potential (2014: 38) explains the definition of mindset . “Mindset—also known as a mindset—is the way the brain and intellect receive, process, analyze, perceive, and make conclusions about information that enters through our senses. That mindset works like a horoscope in our head. When we drift in the ocean of information, the mind seeks direction by holding on to preconceived thought patterns. That mindset is to keep the mind on the path that has become our belief and supports the achievement of the goals we choose.”

    Whereas in the book Mindset Revolution for Smart Teen by Fani Kartikasari (2009:11) it is stated that ” mindset is a mindset that will determine action. This action will bring us closer (or even further away) from our dreams and goals. So, it is very important for us to have a ‘star mindset’, which will lead us to become real stars!”

    Why is Mindset Important?

    Mindset alias mindset is often regarded as the most important factor that will affect our lives. The reason is, things that become a mindset or that we always think about from time to time will have a direct impact on our character and attitude, not the other way around.

    Therefore, it is important to know how important the right mindset is .

    Seemingly small things can make a big difference, mindset is the main difference between those who succeed and those who don’t. So, if you are serious about achieving success in any area of ​​life, you must learn to master that area and set the right mindset .

    Here are the main reasons for the importance of mindset in life:

    1. Develop healthy self-esteem
    2. Formulate the perspective of a winner
    3. Take advantage of self-motivation
    4. Helping to face adversity in some way
    5. Achieve the underlying goals

    Kinds of Mindsets

    There are two types of mindset that are most popular today: fixed mindset and growth mindset ( fixed and growing mindset ). When we have a fixed mindset , we believe that all the abilities we have are basic and fixed so that they cannot be changed. This mindset also leads to the belief that we don’t have to try because the present intelligence is enough to help us become successful.

    Meanwhile, having a growth mindset means we believe that effort and persistence can change ourselves and our abilities. Generally, people who have this mindset don’t immediately believe that everyone can become a genius like Einstein or Mozart. It takes effort and persistence to get it.

    Here’s an example of the difference between a fixed and growth mindset :

    Fixed Mindset Growth Mindset
    I don’t know if I’m smart or not. If not, then yes. I can learn to do whatever I want.
    That is me. I and no one else can change it. I am a person who continues to grow in the process.
    If you have to work hard, you actually have no ability. The more you challenge yourself, the smarter you will become.
    If I don’t try, then I won’t fail. I only fail when I stop trying.
    The job position was completely beyond my capabilities. The job position looks challenging. I will try to apply.

    Apart from the fixed mindset and growth mindset , actually there are still various kinds of mindsets that we need to learn. What are they?

    1. Positive Mindset

    From its name, we can immediately know that a mindset like this means a mindset that focuses on positive or good things instead of thinking about negative things. People who have this mindset can use strategies such as gratitude, introspection, and finding good things that can increase their positive emotions.

    Sinaumed’s, this kind of attitude usually tends to be optimistic and expects the best. Of course this is good for your own well-being and success. Because, building and expanding positive emotions can lead us to success in professional life and social relationships.

    2. Entrepreneurial Mindset

    Entrepreneurial Mindset is clearly defined as an entrepreneurial mindset. This is very helpful for those who want to become entrepreneurs, but it is also a very useful mindset for all of us in the modern world.

    This is because modern life often experiences almost constant changes. Certainly, the kinds of skills required for entrepreneurship are those that are most useful in adapting to and coping with rapid change and uncertainty. That’s why an entrepreneurial mindset is an important mindset to develop.

    According to the book on the entrepreneurial mindset (Gold & Rodriguez, 2018), this mindset consists of several important skills including:

    • Do not feel strange with the risk
    • Creative & innovative
    • Think critically & be able to solve problems
    • Initiative & independent
    • Have communication and collaboration skills
    • Future oriented
    • Acknowledge opportunities
    • Flexible & have the ability to adapt

    These skills are thought to aid academic and career success. Of course, this was a wide range of skills and most likely no one would have the high level of all of them. Because of this, it is perhaps most beneficial to develop the skills we are weak at.

    3. Scarcity Mindset

    Apparently, the idea of ​​this mindset emerged as a mindset of scarcity, which is an experience found to be common among those living in poverty. A scarcity mindset is the belief that something will never be enough. It arises as a result of past or present experiences when nothing is sufficient.

    Researchers believe that scarcity changes how people allocate attention. For example, when money starts to run low, every bill that comes to the house seems more pressing and threatening. This can happen because humans are designed to pay more attention to threats and negative things than positive things.

    As we know, lack of money can take a lot of people’s mental resources. In short, having less of something leads to a greater focus on it (Shah, Mullainathan, & Shafir, 2012).

    In fact, this scarcity mindset is changing the way we make decisions and solve problems. When we focus so much on present deficiencies, we can fail to allocate attention to the long term. As a result, we make decisions that prioritize immediate needs at the expense of long-term needs.

    Eventually, we get so caught up in this cycle of short-term thinking that in the long-term plan, we’re worse off.

    Even though research on the scarcity mindset has been around poverty, there’s no reason that it shouldn’t apply to other areas of life. If we lack other basic needs such as safety, health, love, self-respect, freedom, or respect, we may focus too much on unmet needs, and we may focus less on ensuring other needs are met in the future.

    Some studies have even shown that scarcity of time results in a scarcity mindset . When we are really busy, we meet immediate needs at the expense of time for the long term. More specifically, busyness produces a crisis mentality that leads people to resolve current crises while failing to prevent future crises.

    All wrong, right? So, overall, the scarcity mindset continues to focus on how to have a better future.

    4. Abundance Mindset

    An abundance mindset is the opposite of a scarcity mindset. This can be helpful when we are no longer in a crisis situation. The more crises we experience, the more our brains can get stuck thinking in ways that have protected us in the past, even if these mindsets no longer serve us.

    For example, it is useless if we are no longer in poverty but are still constantly worried about paying the bills.

    There is no point if we have found a good partner and are still worried that they don’t love us. It doesn’t help if we have had lighter lives and are still focused on dealing with crises rather than planning for the long term. These are the times when a mindset of abundance or contentment is necessary.

    ​When we have successfully overcome challenges and pressures, then we learn that the scarcity mindset strategy is successful. However, if we are in a lower stress context, the same strategy is less likely to be the best. We need to recognize that we are safe and that our needs are being met so we can focus on the future and how to ensure that our needs continue to be met.

    How to Develop a Growth Mindset

    Sinaumed’s , we already know the kinds of mindsets that many people can have. What do you think is the dominant mindset in you?

    We know that the growth mindset is often echoed as the perfect mindset and must be developed. So, how do you develop a growth mindset? Here’s the review!

    1. Reflect Yourself

    Take time to acknowledge, reflect on, and embrace all of our failures. Recognizing the areas we need to improve is a stepping stone in cultivating a growth mindset . Hiding all our shortcomings will only hinder the ability to achieve success.

    2. Find Purpose

    A growth mindset coupled with strong goals and unwavering determination will convince us that there is always another way to achieve our goals. So, take some time to reflect and find our purpose!

    3. Find a Challenge

    Part of developing a growth mindset is destroying negative perceptions of a challenge. Embrace the challenges that exist and see them as useful learning experiences that we will never get again. Elbert Hubbard once stated, “The biggest mistake you can make in life is to constantly fear that you will make one.”

    4. Grow Enthusiasm

    Stoicism is the ability to persevere through obstacles to achieve a meaningful end goal. Hang on. It gives us that inner urge to keep moving forward and fulfill our commitments!

    5. Record Goals

    People with a growth mindset realize that once one goal is accomplished, they have another goal to pursue. Set clear and realistic goals based on passion and goals. Also make sure to give yourself enough time to thoroughly conquer those goals.

    6. Change Attitude

    The fixed mindset tends to harbor negative attitudes, is pessimistic, and can’t do anything about it. Stop those thoughts now. The power of positive and optimistic thinking can instantly change moods that not only inspire us, but also those around us.

    7. Ask for Constructive Feedback

    People with a growth mindset will proactively seek feedback from their co-workers, friends, and leaders. This is an opportunity to discover lessons, learn from mistakes, and work on skills that will help in the long term.

    8. Train Yourself

    Mental and physical activity is another part of the growth mindset recipe . Meditation, walks, or even stretching allow us to focus on the moment, blend in with our surroundings, and bring clarity to cloudy thoughts.

    9. Appreciate Our Journey

    An important factor when building a growth mindset is seeing the value in the journey. When we get hung up on results, we miss valuable learning moments that can enhance overall professional development. Someone with a growth mindset sees beauty in struggle.

    Conclusion

    Having a growth mindset within is very important for the ‘development’ process itself. Moreover, if Sinaumed’s is a young person who wants a lot of experience in a career or even starting a business. Certainly, we must have a growth  mindset that

  • What is Metamorphic Rock, Formation Process, and Examples

    What is Metamorphic Rock, Formation Process, and Examples

    The existence of various kinds of rocks that are around us does have benefits for human life itself. Without realizing it, we need the presence of these stones. We can use the presence of these stones to make building materials which will be very useful to us later. There are also those that are used directly as building materials or just for aesthetics. In ancient times, these rocks were actually widely used by humans.

    Not only useful for building materials, the stones around us can also provide aesthetic value or beauty. The stone is generally used to decorate the house or garden. These types of rocks are also used as part of the interior design of a building.

    In fact, there are many kinds of rocks. One of them is metamorphic rock. The term metamorphic is one of the names of the types of rocks that complement igneous rocks and also sedimentary rocks. This metamorphic rock is a type of rock that changes shape. Where this rock is the result of the transformation of the previous rock type into a rock that complements igneous and sedimentary rocks.

    Rock itself is a solid object made naturally from mineraloids or minerals, which can be found on the surface of the earth wherever these objects are located. Therefore, in this article we will discuss more deeply about metamorphic rocks and their various forms.

    What Is Metamorphic Rock?

    Understanding or definition of metamorphic rock is often associated as metamorphic rock. This is because this metamorphic language is more towards a foreign language, while the metamorphic language looks more like Indonesian. This metamorphic rock is a group of rocks that have undergone a transformation or change in shape due to the lifting or erosion of the soil, then transformed into new rocks.

    Soil erosion that lifts rocks into metamorphic rocks requires high temperatures and pressures. Therefore, we often encounter these metamorphic rocks in volcanic soils around volcanoes. Where rocks that are eroded by low temperatures do not turn these rocks into metamorphic rocks, but become sedimentary rocks.

    Broadly speaking, metamorphic rock is a class that results from changes in existing rock in response to changes in environmental conditions, such as variations in temperature, pressure, and also mechanical stress and the addition or reduction of chemical components. The existing rock may be sedimentary, igneous, or other metamorphic rock.

    Definition of Metamorphic Rocks According to Experts

    Here are some definitions of metamorphic rocks according to experts, including:

    1. American Geosciences Institute

    According to him, metamorphic rocks are rocks that have been changed by intense heat or pressure when they were formed. Under conditions that are sufficiently hot and depressed deep in the earth’s crust, either sedimentary or igneous rocks can be converted into metamorphic rocks. One way to think about the process of metamorphism or metamorphism is to consider what happens when soft earthen objects are placed in a furnace and then heated to very high temperatures. Then the ground will change from being slippery to hard. The object cannot be changed back to its original form, because the material itself has changed. That’s what happens on a large scale underground to produce metamorphic rocks.

    The Process of Occurrence of Metamorphic Rocks

    As previously explained, this metamorphic rock will only form when a special metamorphic process occurs on the earth’s surface. These rocks will not form directly, but must go through this process of metamorphism. Where the process will change the parent rock in the form of igneous rock or sedimentary rock into metamorphic rock with different shapes and characteristics and colors compared to the original rock. In general, the process of forming metamorphic rocks can be simplified into several stages, namely:

    a. Available main rock or protolith
    b. Protolith has been exposed to the process of metamorphism
    c. The protolith rock begins to change its characteristics
    d. Formation of metamorphic rock

    Initially, all metamorphic rocks originate from a parent rock known as a protolith. Where these rocks are then exposed to metamorphic processes which are influenced by high pressure and high temperatures as well. This metamorphism process will slowly change the characteristics of the protolith rock into another rock that is metamorphic. At the end of the long process of metamorphism, this protolith rock will turn into a complete metamorphic rock that already has certain characteristics and forms of foliation. In that section, we will learn about the factors that influence the process of metamorphism and also the type of metamorphism that occurs in the formation of these rocks.

    Examples of Metamorphic Rocks

    The following are some examples of metamorphic rocks that need to be understood, including:

    1. Slate Metamorphic Rock

    This slate rock is a metamorphic rock in which the process of formation is from the transition process of Shale or Mudstone sedimentary rock or claystone at very low pressure and temperature. Where this slate metamorphic rock has a foliated structure consisting of various types of very fine grains. Slate rock itself was previously a type of shale and mudstone rock. The colors of this slate rock are black, gray, brown, red, yellowish, and others. Meanwhile, the grain texture of this slate rock has very fine grain. This slate rock can easily split into very thin sheets. The function of the thin-shaped slate is usually used for slate, while the thicker ones are used for sidewalks and roofs.

    2. Philite Metamorphic Rock

    This phyllite rock is a type of metamorphic rock which usually consists of quartz, sericite mica, and also chlorite. Where this phyllite rock comes from the continuation of the transition process from slate rock. Because, the origin of phyllite rocks comes from slate rocks, therefore the main material for the formation of phyllite rocks is shale rock. The colors of phyllite are silver, red, white, purple, brown and greenish. The grain size of phyllite tends to be smoother than slate. So when viewed directly, the stone is very neat.

    Meanwhile, the structure of this phyllite rock is foliated. The composition of the material itself is made of mica and quartz. The temperature and pressure during the formation of phyllite rocks are from low to medium. This phyllite rock has characteristics that divide following the wave surface. Where phyllite rock is useful as an insulator or a good conductor of electricity. In addition, this type of stone can also be used as an additional material for building construction, floors, roofs, and others.

    3. Gneiss Metamorphic Rock

    Gneiss rocks are rocks that originate or metamorphose from an igneous rock that exists at high temperatures and pressures. Usually, these gneiss rocks have colors such as black, gray, brownish, silver, blue, greenish, and also yellowish. The grain size of this gneiss stone tends to be medium and has a foliated structure. While the composition in this gneiss rock is quartz and feldspar. The most prominent characteristics of this gneiss rock are quartz and feldspar which are seen alternating with layers similar to mica. Generally, this gneiss rock is widely used as a building material.

    4. Schist Metamorphic Rock

    Schist is a metamorphic rock derived from basalt. Generally, these schist rocks are black, purplish, greenish, brownish, golden, yellowish, and reddish in color. For the grain size of medium or medium sized schist rocks. The composition contained in this schist rock is mica and granite. Meanwhile, the structure of the schist itself is foliated. The temperature and pressure during the process of forming schist rocks is very high. Therefore, schist rocks have wavy characteristics and sometimes garnet crystals are present in them. For its own use, usually this type of rock is used as a building construction material.

    5. Marble Metamorphic Rock

    Marble rock is formed from the metamorphism of limestone which gets pressure and also high hot temperatures. So that it changes shape and also crystallizes calcite. The main ingredient of this marble rock is calcium carbonate. Marble rocks usually have a light yellowish brown color. As for its nature, marble rock has solid, compact, and non-foliated properties. Marble rock is one of the materials for buildings, floors, walls, and is also sometimes used as a craft material.

    6. Quartzite Metamorphic Rock

    Quartzite rock is one part of the metamorphic rock that has a strong texture. Where this rock is formed when sandstone gets hot pressure and high temperatures. Quartzite rocks have colors that are yellowish gray, red, and brown. For the stone structure itself, namely nonfoliation. While the composition of quartzite as a whole consists of quartz rocks. The main function of this quartzite rock is as the main ingredient for the glass and ceramic industry which can be used as household furniture.

    7. Millonite Metamorphic Rock

    Milonite rock is a metamorphic rock that contains a lot of compact minerals. Where this milonite rock crystallizes dynamically following the mineral carrier substance that forms metamorphic rocks. The colors of these rocks are gray, brown, black, and also slightly bluish. This milonite rock has a structure that is not foliated. What is unique about this milonite rock is that its composition varies for each rock. Generally, milonite rocks are formed at high temperatures and pressures. In addition, what is interesting about milonite rocks is that a function has not been found for the utilization of these rocks.

    8. Filonite Metamorphic Rock

    Filonite rock is a metamorphic rock that forms at higher temperatures and pressures than slate. So, this phylonite rock is formed from the metamorphism of shale rocks and mudstones. This phylonite rock has little resemblance to milonite, it’s just that the difference is in the grain of the rock. Where the grains of phylonite rock are coarser than milonite rocks. The color characteristics of this phylonite rock are gray, greenish, bluish, preferring silver, brownish, and also blackish. This rock has a structure that is not foliated. While the composition of this phylonite rock is quartz and mica.

    The characteristic of phylonite rock is that it has a surface that looks shiny. The function of this rock is to be used as the main material for making statues and also decoration because it has good characteristics to use it.

    This is an explanation of various examples of metamorphic rocks and their characteristics. Hopefully useful.

  • What Is Meant to Condense and Examples of Events

    What Is Meant to Condense and Examples of Events

    Have you ever observed a change in the shape of an object? Apart from what we have learned from the subject matter at school, changes in the shape of objects are quite close to our daily activities. That’s why we need to understand the material, starting from the understanding of each form of an object, its nature, causes, and so on. By understanding this material, it will be easier for us to benefit from his theory in everyday life. In this article, we will discuss more about what condensing means.

    Events of changing the form of objects occur a lot in everyday life and there are various events of changing the form of objects that occur, such as the process of making ice cubes in the refrigerator, boiling water, and drying wet clothes in the morning. Changes in the shape of this object cannot be separated from solids, liquids, and gases. Where basically the change in the shape of the object is based on the release of heat or absorption of heat. All substances that exist in this world certainly have the opportunity to change form and this is based on their boiling point. One of the many changes in the form of objects that we find is condensation.

    What Does Condensation Mean?

    Condensation is an event of changing the form of a substance or object to a more solid form, such as changing a gas or vapor into a liquid. Where this change in condensation is often referred to as condensation and this process can occur due to several factors such as steam that is cooled deliberately to become liquid, steam or gas that is increased in pressure to become a liquid and the combination of compression with cooling. The term condensate is a liquid that has condensed from a gas or vapor. Meanwhile, the condenser is a tool used to condense vapor into a liquid. Basically, the condenser is made for cooling or heat exchanger which is used for a specific purpose and usually has a variety of designs.

    Condensation is a change in the state of matter that occurs when a gas releases heat energy due to a decrease in temperature. In addition, condensation can also occur in a natural way. The most common occurrence of condensation that we encounter is the dew that appears in the morning on the leaves. Even though there is no rain at night, the dew will still be visible from the water droplets that fall from the leaves. In daily activities, there are many damp places that contain water and this can happen because of water vapor that reaches the surface of the air. Condensation is not something strange, because it can be proven clearly in physics.

    Example of a Condensing Event

    The following are some examples of condensation events that we can encounter and occur around us, including:

    1. Ice Filled Wall

    A glass is a tool made specifically to make it easier for humans in the drinking process, where we will definitely pour drinking water into a glass before drinking it. Basically, glasses are made with various variations, because they will be adjusted to their fans and the majority of glass shapes certainly have a handle to make it easier to hold. The purpose of this handle is to make it easier for the user to move the glass from place to place. The glass itself is made from various materials, ranging from glass, plastic, wood, and others.

    Glass filled with ice generally has a material that is easily wet on the outside. This is an example of the condensation process. Where the ice that had been solid slowly began to melt. This is what causes evaporation in the glass.

    2. Water Drops on Leaves

    Morning is a condition that is quite healthy, because the air is still very fresh and there is still no exposure to dirty air or pollution. The human fit condition is basically in the morning. Therefore, the health center is actually there in the morning. So do not be surprised if many people often go for a run or exercise in the morning, because morning activities are very refreshing. Apart from that, we often encounter condensation in the morning conditions. Where we can see the indications from the plants whose leaves have dripping water.

    The condition of having morning dew is natural, even though there is no rain at night, this dewy condition can still occur. Because it becomes a natural process due to changes in the form of matter. Based on several studies that have been conducted, the condensation process can occur in a natural way without human intervention.

    3. Cars Rained

    As we know, the role of the car in everyday life is indeed quite important, because the presence of a car will help various human activities. When the car is exposed to rain water, of course all the outside will get wet and this will make some of the windshields get wet too. This can be one proof of the evaporation process due to the effect of temperature on objects. This will cause condensation to form on the windshield.

    4. Formation of Clouds

    Reporting from the US Geological Survey, clouds will form in the atmosphere because air containing water vapor will rise and cool. Where water vapor in the form of gas will rise into the atmosphere due to evaporation. The altitude of the atmosphere itself causes lower pressure, therefore it will indirectly lower the air temperature. As a result, the air temperature in the upper atmosphere will be cooler than the temperature at the surface of the earth. When water vapor reaches the upper atmosphere, it cools, turns into water droplets and forms clouds.

    5. Formation of Mist

    Fog is one example of condensation events that occur in everyday life. Where this fog is formed when the air has very high humidity or contains a lot of water vapor. According to National Geographic, the water vapor will begin to condense and combine to form water droplets that hang in the air. Collection of water droplets in the air will form fog.

    6. Foggy Glasses

    Glasses users, of course, have experienced cloudy glasses when eating hot or warm food or drinks. This can happen because the hot water vapor that comes from food and drink will rise towards the face and meet cooler air. So that the water vapor will condense, forming a small droplet of water vapor. Where the water vapor drops will then stick to the glasses and make them dewy.

    Causes of Changes in the Form of Objects

    Changes in the shape of this object certainly occur not without cause. That is why in the process of changing the substance, there will be symptoms that we can recognize directly or through tools. Where changes in the shape of the object can occur due to physical, biological, and chemical changes in the properties of the substance. The following are some explanations about the causes of changes in the shape of objects, starting from solid, liquid, and also gas.

    1. Physical Changes

    Physical change is a form of change in the substance of an object that we can see or observe with the naked eye through its physical appearance alone or perhaps from its outer appearance. So, changes in physical form do not change the chemical composition of a substance. These changes will not change the material at all or form new substances. The special nature of these changes can be seen and we observe the changes from the outside physically and they can return to their original state as before the substance changed.

    2. Chemical Changes

    Chemical change is a form of change in the form of an object that occurs in shape and size and will produce a new, different substance. Where this change in form will result in the type and material properties of a different substance or a new substance from the original substance. A chemical reaction will create a substance or composition that changes into a new chemical formula. In practice, changes in chemical state experience shrinkage of the material substance when changing. Chemical changes can occur from various factors, starting from cooling, combustion, heating, decay, and also corrosion.

    3. Biological Changes

    Biological change is one of the changes that occur due to the influence of activities carried out by other living things or decomposing microorganisms. Just like a chemical change, this biological change will also cause changes in objects that cannot return to their original shape. You can find examples of these biological changes in wood that is weathered and will eventually decompose.

    Properties of Things

    When discussing changes in form, it will not be separated from the discussion of matter. You must have come across objects that change shape easily. To be able to experience the process of changing form, generally the substance will have properties or characteristics before or after the change in form occurs. The following are the characteristics that need to be understood, including:

    1. Solids

    There are various types of solid objects that you can find in the environment that can later change shape. Solids have the following properties:

    a. Has a shape that tends to remain even though it is placed in a certain place, even tends to be the same even though it has been moved to a different place.
    b. It’s not easy to change shape.
    c. To change the shape of a solid object generally requires a long process with various efforts, such as pressing, hitting, and so on.

    2. Liquid objects

    You must be familiar with many liquid objects that we encounter at home or in the environment. Liquids can certainly change form into other forms such as becoming solid objects or gases. Before the change occurs, the liquid has the following properties or characteristics:

    a. Has a shape that is not fixed and will adapt to the shape of the container that holds it.
    b. It has flowing properties and easily moves from a higher place to a lower place because of the law of gravity.
    c. Water bodies can seep into small gaps or pores on a surface, such as soil, cloth, tissue, and others.
    d. Having pressure to go in all directions.
    e. Have a flat surface.
    f. Has a wave motion that can be influenced by several factors, such as thrust or wind.

    3. Gases

    In contrast to solid objects or liquid objects which can be seen clearly, gas objects cannot be seen easily with the naked eye, such as air. Even though its form is not visible, this gas object exists with very small and many molecules. So it is difficult to see by the naked eye. As is the case with other forms of matter, gas objects can also change form, which is initially invisible to be visible, or what is initially visible becomes invisible when it becomes gas. Gas bodies have their own properties that distinguish them from other forms of matter, as below:

    a. Has a shape and volume that can adjust to the shape or condition of the container that holds it. Therefore, the shape of the gas will depend on the shape and condition of the container. In addition, the volume of air will also depend on the contents and also the volume of the container.
    b. Has pressure that can press in all directions. For example, when you blow up a balloon, the rubber balloon expands. This is what proves that the gas will press in all directions and adjust to the container. For example, when you blow up a doll-shaped balloon, the gas will fill the balloon according to its shape.

  • What is Marketing? Strategy, Function and How to Become a Marketer

    What is Marketing? – Did you know that marketing is one of the cornerstones of a business or company? By carrying out the right marketing strategy, the business will get maximum turnover. Moreover, if the company can have a marketing strategy according to its business niche.

    So, maybe many of us are wondering what strategies can be used and how to become reliable marketing? Don’t worry, because in this article we will discuss what marketing is and the various strategies in it and how to become a reliable marketing agent to boost business turnover.

    What is Marketing?

    Before discussing more about marketing strategy, let’s first understand the definition of marketing itself. So, marketing is an effort to introduce products to customers. These efforts are carried out in several ways, such as promotion, distribution, sales, and also the product development strategy itself.

    Here, marketing has a very important role in developing a business. It can be said that there will be no successful business without proper marketing efforts. Because, with marketing, companies or businesses can get the following benefits:

    a. Sales increase
    b. Can be a bridge to build a good relationship with customers
    c. One of the media to do branding
    d. Means for product development

    In practice, marketing often starts with conducting market research and also analyzing customer needs according to their buyer persona. However, even though both are things that can be continued, we must also continue to use different marketing strategies according to the times.

    The Latest Marketing Strategy For Business

    The following are several marketing strategies that can be used and selected according to their respective business needs:

    1. Marketing Mix

    The first marketing strategy is the marketing mix. This one strategy is a marketing strategy that is usually used to achieve a certain target. Marketing mix is ​​a marketing strategy that is most often used by business people, whether it’s a beginner business or a business that has started to develop.

    Basically, this marketing has seven basic elements, namely, price, product, promotion, place, people, physical evidence, and process. To use this marketing strategy, we will start by designing the best product needed by consumers and it must be ensured that the price is affordable. Besides that, we also need to make products that can continue to exist with various promotional efforts. So in essence, we must continue to apply the seven elements above in order to get the best marketing results.

    2. Viral Marketing

    This type of marketing is a marketing strategy that is carried out by utilizing the audience to spread information about the product to be promoted. This marketing strategy can be an option to boost business popularity in a short period of time.

    Why does a business need to use viral marketing? Because this one strategy has a lot of advantages. The first is that we can save costs for promotion. Then secondly, this marketing will reach a wider audience. So that it can be one of the efforts to increase brand awareness effectively. By using this strategy, it is very likely that the product being promoted will be reviewed in various media, because of this virality.

    Then, how to maximize the use of this one strategy? The main thing to note is to make sure that we have to understand the right target audience according to the product being offered. In addition, create quality and emotional information. So that many people want to share it.

    3. Guerrilla Marketing

    Guerilla marketing is a marketing strategy that is carried out by means of unique and memorable promotions in the eyes of consumers. In fact, not infrequently, this strategy makes consumers surprised by a new breakthrough made by a brand. For example, the action of skydiving carried out to promote Red Bull products.

    Then, why are so many businesses using this marketing strategy? Because, in terms of the budget used, it is classified as more economical because the focus of promotion is on creativity. Then the marketing strategy is also easier to implement because it seems unique to build. Then finally, this marketing is very memorable for potential customers who witness the product promotion action.

    To apply guerilla marketing, we need to keep looking for creative ideas to introduce the products to be promoted. In addition, try to understand the audience so that the impression built becomes stronger. Then, we also need to make a short and clear message regarding the promotion being carried out.

    4. Marketing Trends

    Trend marketing is a product promotion strategy that is carried out by studying the latest trends in society. As business owners, we shouldn’t miss trying this marketing strategy. Due to the ever-changing promotional trends, it is important to always take advantage of the latest trends in promoting business products.

    There are lots of marketing trends that are quite popular today. Some of them are the use of AI (Artificial Intelligence) or artificial intelligence to understand consumer desires. One of the things we can do is to use Google Voice Search. Not only that, there is also Chatbot, a live chat service for consumers using applications that can increase the speed of interaction with consumers directly.

    5. Experiential Marketing

    Experiential marketing is a marketing strategy that is carried out by inviting consumers to experience using our products. This strategy is considered effective because consumers are invited to know directly the quality of the products offered. There are five types of experiential marketing that we can do.

    Starting from product exhibitions, holding an event, holding seminars, sharing immersive experiences through Virtual Reality, and promoting generated content. In its application, there are several strategies that can be used to carry out experiential marketing.

    The first is to clearly define promotional objectives, such as to build brand awareness or something else. The second is by sharing real experiences that are not contrived. The third is asking for feedback from consumers who have used our products.

    6. Email Marketing

    Email marketing is a digital promotion that aims to offer products to potential customers via their email. Why is this one strategy interesting to do?

    a. The costs required are relatively small but the results are maximum.
    b. It has a wide reach and it is predicted that more people will use email.
    c. More than 90 percent of people check email every day.
    d. More effective than social media.
    e. Easier to reach consumers.
    f. 86 percent of consumers want to receive promotional emails from products they subscribe to.

    Functions Of Company Marketing

    The following are some of the marketing functions in a company that are rarely known:

    1.Exchange Function

    In the world of marketing, consumers can be free to choose products from any brand and exchange them for money or can exchange products for their own products.

    2. Physical Distribution Function

    One of the functions of marketing is physical distribution by moving the product by transporting and storing the product. The products already owned by the company will be distributed to consumers. Either by sea, air or land. In this case, product storage is carried out so that the product supply is maintained in the market. So that there will be no scarcity when needed by consumers.

    3. Intermediary Function

    To be able to deliver products to consumers, a marketing person will connect them from the producer to the consumer.

    4. Other Functions

    Another function of marketing is not only as an exchange, intermediary, or physical distribution. But there are still other functions that are owned by a reliable marketing based on marketing management, including:

    a. Marketing Sales

    The main task of marketing sales is to generate sales of products owned by a company. So that the company gets a profit from every product sold.

    b. Promotion Marketing

    Marketing has a duty to introduce a product to potential customers in general so that the product offered can be more famous.

    c. Marketing Research and Development

    Marketing has the task of finding information from a product that is needed by consumers. In addition, marketing also needs to develop existing products. Then report it to the company so that repairs or follow-up are immediately carried out.

    d. Marketing Communications

    Marketing has a duty to create good relations between producers and consumers, companies and surrounding communities, and companies on parties related to their business.

    7 Tips for Success in Becoming a Reliable Marketing

    Being a reliable and successful marketing will certainly greatly affect business success. This is because marketing has the function of finding, acquiring, maintaining, and also increasing customers and controlling the market. Meanwhile, how many customers have been successfully hooked by a company’s marketers, of course, that determines the size of the income. Then if the greater the income earned, it will be easier for the company to develop and vice versa. Here are some ways to become a reliable marketing that can be applied:

    1. Make a Strategy and Target Consumers

    A reliable marketing strategy must be able to create a promotional concept that can attract the attention of consumers. The simplest and most common examples are giving discounts, giving bonuses to buyers who make lots of transactions and conducting prize draws for special event programs. The right promotional activity is to directly involve potential customers as participants in order to build loyalty. Here’s a complete example:

    #a Holding a sponsored hiking event or event
    #b Holding a live music event accompanied by product introduction

    Meanwhile, a clear target is an important point in order to understand market segments such as business product A which class of consumers is best for? And others.

    2. Understand Knowledge Products

    A consumer will trust us as a marketer if the information we convey to consumers can be explained in detail and easy to understand. To make consumers believe is not easy. Therefore, as a marketer must understand and master the goods or services offered. Convey accurate and clear information about the advantages and quality of our products compared to competitors’ products. But, we also never cover up the shortcomings of these products. But use language that can describe as if these deficiencies can still be overcome with other options.

    3. Knowing Consumer Behavior

    Consumer behavior consists of things that we can know through the character of consumers who will become the target market. For example, the community of children, men, women, youth, and the general public must be distinguished in more detail. Even about the upper and lower economic circles. The most effective way to find out consumer behavior, we must be able and able to directly mingle with them for a while. This is done as one of the keys to knowing what the interests and needs of potential customers are.

    4. Expanding the Business Network

    Running a business certainly requires connections that are wide enough to make it easier for us to get accurate information. Any opportunity can be obtained quickly if you have a wide network or business connections. For example, capital problems, new business opportunities, effective marketing strategies. The role of marketing experts in this case is to be able to communicate well with anyone and from all kinds of communities even though it must be very difficult at first. Whatever the reason, the wider the business connections that are built, the wider the opportunity for money will be created to get new potential customers.

    5. Paying Attention to Consumer Responses

    The response from customers will always be different to the products offered by a marketing. If you get a good response from customers, never forget to make it a testimonial so that new potential customers can absorb it. This will later become concrete evidence regarding the quality of our products. However, if you get a bad response, then use it as an evaluation material and a strategy to improve the promotion and marketing techniques that are being carried out.

    6. Always Be Optimistic

    The activities of a marketing person will not escape from various kinds of obstacles and obstacles. There have been many people who failed and were unable to deal with the situation. Being chased by the company’s targets and receiving rejection from many customers is just the most common part and one must be prepared for. Apart from the two problems above, in fact there are still many other hurdles for a marketer that must be anticipated. Marketers must be prepared mentally, responsibly, personal economy, and others. In order to become a reliable marketer, one must have an optimistic and confident attitude when dealing with various consumer characteristics. But never push yourself beyond your ability so that you won’t be too devastated when you fail.

    7. Have Supporting Technology

    Whatever the type of work, definitely requires communication tools and also transportation to support his mobility. In this digital era, at least marketing experts have adequate gadgets as a means of establishing good relations with consumers or used to obtain more up-to-date information. The most common example is having a smartphone. Where the media can also support promotion via the internet.

    Those are some explanations about how to become a reliable marketing and some marketing strategies that can be used. How, are you ready to become a reliable marketing.

    Recommended Books & Articles Related to Marketing

  • What is Liquidity? Functions and Examples

    Definition of Liquidity – Has Sinaumed’s ever wondered what liquidity is and how to calculate it using ratios? Check out the following explanation so that Sinaumed’s can find out about how long the company can finance business operations and other benefits that Sinaumed’s will get.

    Definition of Liquidity

    Before discussing liquidity further, Sinaumed’s needs to first understand the meaning of liquidity. Liquidity is the ability or power of a company to pay debt and short-term obligations. Examples of short-term debt are taxes, trade payables, dividends, and so on.

    However, there are also those who say that the definition of liquidity is the ability of individuals and companies to pay off debts or obligations with current assets. If the company does not have the power to pay off its obligations, it will be impossible for the company to be able to carry out operational activities the same as before.

    In general, each company has a different level of liquidity as shown in certain figures, such as the quick ratio, current ratio and cash ratio. The higher, the Pert Sinaumed’s that the company has a better performance also in carrying out its operational activities. With a high level, it can attract investors, for example financial institutions, creditors, and suppliers.

    The Role of Liquidity

    To run a business, there are several obligations that Sinaumed’s needs to fulfill. This obligation is the obligation to pay debts and also the obligation to finance all the operational needs of the company. These two obligations are known as liquidity.

    If a company is able to pay these obligations then it can be said that the company’s liquidity is good, but if the company is unable to pay all of these costs then the company can be categorized as a company that is not good.

    Therein lies the importance of the role of liquidity, by knowing the ability to pay of a company, the benchmark for the success of SMEs can be assessed.

    Liquidity Benefits and Functions

    Sinaumed’s needs to know that liquidity in a company has its own functions and benefits for the operating processes of that company. Some of the functions and benefits of liquidity include:

    • As the right media in carrying out the company’s daily business activities.
    • As a tool to anticipate if there is a sudden or urgent need for funds.
    • For companies engaged in finance or finance, it can make it easier for customers to make loans or withdraw funds. Companies can use the help of financial management software to get optimal business management.
    • As a reference for the level of flexibility of a company in obtaining investment approval or other profitable business.
    • A tool that can trigger companies to improve performance.
    • As a benchmark for the company’s ability to pay short-term obligations.
    • Can help management to check the efficiency of working capital.
    • Assist companies in analyzing and interpreting financial position in the short term.

    Therefore, maintaining the level of liquidity is important because it can gain the trust of both internal and external parties. With a good level of liquidity, companies can pay employee salaries according to a predetermined date and easily obtain capital loans from investors, banks and other parties.

    Components in Liquidity

    Furthermore, what Sinaumed’s needs to know is an understanding of the liquidity component. The main components that exist in liquidity can be divided into three parts. Here are the three components:

    • Density is a gap or distance that can explain the price range of a product, including the normal price range and the price range that has been agreed by the company.
    • Depth is a component that describes the volume of sales and purchases of a product at a certain price level.
    • Resilience is an explanation of the speed at which prices change towards efficient prices after price volatility or deviations occur.

    Examples of Liquid Assets and Application of Liquidity Ratios

    Sinaumed’s , after we understand about liquidity. However, it certainly feels lacking if we don’t know real examples of liquidity in everyday life. This time, let’s discuss examples of liquid assets and the application of liquidity ratios in their calculations!

    Examples of liquid and illiquid assets

    1. Cash or Cash

    Cash is the most liquid asset because it is related to liquidity, all other assets are valued for their ease of being converted into cash or cash.

    2. Limited Cash (Restricted Cash)

    Limited cash is a cash deposit as a set aside by the company to meet future obligations. The amount of cash is also quite significant. However, this deposit is considered illiquid if it is legally restricted, such as compensation for a loan.

    3. Securities

    Securities are financial instruments that can be traded in the public market. Securities liquidity is related to the daily trading volume of these securities. Government bonds that have a high trading volume are considered to be nearly as liquid as cash. Meanwhile, securities that have little value are considered illiquid.

    4. Cash Equivalents

    Cash equivalents are securities and instruments that can be exchanged for cash, just like commercial paper and bills.

    5. Credit

    Unused credit such as lines of credit can help entities to achieve liquidity. However, these facilities may be subject to conditions that make credit much less reliable than cash in a liquidity crisis.

    For example, in the event of a global financial crisis, banks may have incentives to withdraw credit lines.

    6. Assets (Illiquid)

    Assets which include inventory, receivables, equipment, vehicles and real estate are not considered liquid because they take a long time such as months or even years to convert into cash. In the event of financial stress, these assets may be more difficult to convert into cash.

    Calculating Liquidity Using Ratios

    After knowing what liquidity means and its functions and benefits, of course Sinaumed’s wants to know about how to calculate it. To calculate it, Sinaumed’s can use the liquidity ratio formula, so as to find out whether the company’s liquidity is in good condition or not. This calculation can be divided into four types of liquidity ratios, namely:

    1. Current ratio

    This calculation is used to determine the extent to which the company’s current assets can cover its short-term debt. If the results show a high enough value, the higher the company’s ability to cover its short-term debt. The following is a formula for calculating it with the current ratio:

    CURRENT RATIO = CURRENT ASSETS : CURRENT LIABILITIES

    If the current ratio is low, such as below 1.2, then this indicates that the company does not have the ability to pay its short-term debt. However, a lower value can also indicate that the company has used its current assets effectively and efficiently.

    2. Quick ratio

    The quick ratio is used to take into account inventory, which is part of the current assets used to pay off short-term liabilities. This happens because the disbursement of inventory requires a longer time. To calculate the quick ratio, try to use the formula below:

    QUICK RATIO = (CURRENT ASSETS – INVENTORIES) : CURRENT LIABILITIES

    If the result is more than 1.0, then the value of the company’s ability to pay off short-term debt is considered very good. However, if the value is above 3.0, then the company’s ability will be considered less productive.

    This is because current assets are not utilized optimally in other forms of investment or the profit target is not right. Through the quick ratio, Sinaumed’s can see whether the company’s cash flow can run healthily or unhealthy.

    3. Cash ratio (Cash ratio)

    The cash ratio is a way to measure the amount of cash available and used to pay off the company’s short-term debt. It is recommended that this ratio figure has a comparable figure, between cash and debt, which shows 1: 1.

    If the cash ratio is greater than short-term debt, then the value of the cash ratio is good, because there is availability of funds that can be used to pay off these short-term obligations. Here’s how to calculate the cash ratio using the formula:

    CASH RATIO = CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS : SHORT TERM DEBT

    The meaning of cash and cash equivalents here can include company cash and securities that are easy to liquidate, such as bonds or fundraising when the Sinaumed’s company needs emergency funds.

    4. Cash turnover ratio (Cash turnover ratio)

    With this ratio, Sinaumed’s can see how many times the company’s cash has circulated in one period as measured by sales. To calculate it, you can use the following formula:

    CASH TURNOVER = NET SALES : AVERAGE CASH

    If you find a ratio that is getting bigger, then the value of the company’s ability to overcome financial problems will be even bigger.

    Examples of Financial Ratio Problems

    Quoting from the book Fundamentals of Financial Statement Analysis by Hadijah Febriana, SE, MM, the following is an example of financial ratio questions that can be used for training in understanding material regarding financial ratios.

    Example Question 1

    From the report on the company, it is known that there are:

    Cash and cash equivalents = 100,727,141,756

    Total short term liabilities = 408,490,550,651.

    Based on the data above, what is the cash ratio of the company?

    Answer :

    Cash Ratio = Total Cash / Total Current Liabilities

    Cash Ratio = 100,727,141,756 / 408,490,550,651

    Cash Ratio = 0.246

    The value of the cash ratio in the company is 0.246 or 24.6%. This means that currently the company’s cash is only able to cover 24.6% of its total current debt.

    Example Problem 2

    Total Current Assets = 1,165,406,301,686

    Current Inventory = 316,826,909,348

    Total Current Liabilities = 408,490,550,651.

    Based on the data in the report above, what is the quick ratio of company X?

    Answer :

    Quick Ratio = (Total Assets – Inventory) / Total Current Liabilities

    Quick Ratio = 91,165,406,301,686 – 316,826,909,348) / 408,490,550,651

    Quick Ratio = 848,579,392,338 / 408,490,550,651

    Fast Ratio = 2.08

    The value of the quick ratio owned by company X is 2.08 times. Which means, company X has the ability to pay off its obligations in the short term which is quite good and is not excessive in investing its current assets.

    The figure 2.08 also shows that every Rp1 of the company’s current liabilities can be guaranteed by current assets of Rp2.08.

    Example Problem 3

    A company has total assets of 1,165,406,301,686 and total current liabilities of 408,490,550,651. Based on these data, how much current ratio does the company have?

    Answer :

    Current Ratio = Total Current Assets / Total Current Liabilities

    Current Ratio = 1,165,406,301,686 / 408,490,550,651

    Current Ratio = 2.85

    Example Problem 4

    Beginning of the Year Cash = 64,106,808,475

    Cash End of Year = 100. 727,141 756

    Net Sales = 3,512,509,168,853

    Based on the reports mentioned earlier, what is the cash turnover ratio?

    Answer :

    Average Total Cash = (Total Cash at Beginning of the Year + Cash at the End of the Year) /

    Average Total Cash = (64,106,808,475 + 100,727,141 756) / 2

    Average Total Cash = 164,833,950,231 / 2

    Average Amount of Cash = 82,416,975,155.5

    After obtaining the average total cash, the cash turnover ratio is as follows:

    Cash Turnover Ratio = Net Sales / Average Amount of Cash

    Cash Turnover Ratio = 3,512,509,168,853 / 82,416,975,155.5

    Cash Turnover Ratio = 42.62

    Based on these results it can be seen that the cash turnover ratio of PT. Siantar Top Tbk in 2019 was 42.62 times. Which means, during 2019, cash from this company has rotated more than 42 times a year.

    This shows that the conversion of current assets into cash through sales is relatively fast.

    Example Problem 5

    A company has financial reports and balance sheets that contain the following data:

    Total Current Assets = 1,165,406,301,686

    Current Inventory = 316,826,909,348

    Total Current Liabilities = 408,490,550,651.

    Based on the data above, what is the net working capital stock ratio?

    Answer :

    Net Working Capital Inventory Ratio = Current Inventory / (Total Current Assets – Total Current Liabilities)

    Net Working Capital Stock Ratio = 316,826,909,348 / (1,165,406,301,686 – 408,490,550,651)

    Inventory Ratio

    Net Working Capital = 316,826,909,348 / 756,915,751,035

    Net Working Capital Stock Ratio = 0.42

    The value of the company’s net working capital stock ratio is 0.42 or 42%. This implies that 42% of the company’s net working capital is stored in inventory or availability.

    Also Read:

    • Recognize the Difference between Direct Investment and Not
    • Definition of KPR: Types, Benefits and Considerations
    • Monetary Policy Instruments: Definition, Types
    • Understanding the Definition, Functions, and Types of Money
    • Cash Equivalent Assets: Definition, Types, Purpose

     

  • What is Liability? Types and Examples of Questions

    Definition of Liabilities – Liabilities are one of the most important financial components to support a company. What does liability mean? What are some examples? Check out the discussion in the following article.

    Has Sinaumed’s ever felt confused because suddenly the debt being borne by the company is greater than income without knowing how the process happened? If so, learning about liability is an excellent solution so that Sinaumed’s doesn’t experience it again.

    Even though it has a physical form and value, liabilities cannot be classified as assets. Unfortunately, until now there are still many entrepreneurs who fail to understand it. So what is meant by liability? What are the types? Here’s the explanation for Sinaumed’s .

    What is Liability?

    In running its business, companies incur various types of costs with the aim of running operations. It is used in large quantities, so that in general this fee is billable only in certain periods.

    Apart from costs, many companies also have bills from external capital loans, or what is simply referred to as debt.

    These two types of claims included in the profit/loss balance sheet reporting process are generally put together, and are named “liabilities”.

    So if defined, liability is an obligation that is borne by the company, both internal and external, and must be paid immediately before payment is due.

    Difference between Assets and Liabilities

    Liabilities can have the same form and value as assets, both as capital and goods. This is what often makes entrepreneurs misunderstand and think that liabilities are the same as assets. In fact, assets and liabilities are two different things.

    Assets are economic resources that are used to run business rates and ensure the added value of wealth for the company. There are two types of assets, namely:

    • Current assets (easily liquidated), for example land certificates, machinery, buildings, brands , and so on.
    • Non-current assets (difficult to liquidate), for example securities, receivables, cash, merchandise, and so on.

    Meanwhile, liabilities are various economic resources used to carry out the pace of business that must be paid by the company to external parties within a certain time.

    Liability cannot be abandoned, because it will certainly cause problems. Meanwhile, assets are the property of the company (or investors) so that they can be managed at will on the basis of the company’s progress.

    Apart from what has been explained in the previous point, the differences in other assets and liabilities include:

    Assets are financial resources that have future economic benefits. While liabilities are things that must be paid off in the near future.

    The value of assets decreases or depreciates every year, while the value of liabilities will not decrease and may increase due to the enactment of the interest rate system.

    When writing a balance sheet, assets are written on the right, while liabilities are written on the left.

    Liability Characteristics

    After understanding the meaning of liability, this time we will learn about the characteristics of liabilities, namely:

    • Has a payment due date.
    • As a transaction or event that has occurred so that it obliges the entity.
    • Must be resolved by paying it off.
    • Requires assets and other entities to settle liabilities.

    Functions of Assets and Liabilities in Financial Statements

    In a company’s accounting period, the smooth flow of assets and liabilities is the main component as a support to show the stability and long-term prospects of the company. In a company’s financial statements, liabilities or debt is one of the strategies of a company to develop its business consistently.

    Types of Liabilities

    Current liabilities are debts that must be settled by the company within one year or one accounting period. The decisions of companies that take out debt are generally based on strategic and mature calculations. This debt will be used as business capital which will provide greater profits for the future of the company.

    The components included in the liability group are current liabilities and long term liabilities . Details regarding the liability component are as follows.

    1. Short Term Debt (Current Liabilities)

    Short-term debt or liabilities are debts that must be paid or repaid immediately by a company or in other words as a company obligation that has a payment limit of less than a year, for example per month, per quarter or per semester. The slowest time to pay off current liabilities is one year of the accounting bookkeeping period.

    Another term used to refer to this liability is current debt, because the company has to pay it several times within one year.

    The components included in current liabilities are as follows.

    1. Account Payable

    Trade payables in liabilities are debt decisions for the purchase of goods such as raw materials in order to expedite the company’s operational activities. Generally, this debt must be paid to suppliers or partner companies.

    2. Notes Payable

    Notes in liability short-term debt is a type of debt paid to the lender. This debt has a maturity or grace period of 30, 60, and 90 days according to the agreement that has been made before.

    3. Accrued Interest Payable

    Expenses that need to be paid in liabilities are types of liabilities that have a status that has not been paid off in a certain accounting period. The components in the accrued interest payable are rental costs, wages or salaries, and so on.

    4. Unearned Revenue

    This liability represents income from the company for its services to third parties. Payment of this debt has been received, but the income has not become the full property of the company so that it is still said to be debt.

    5. Deferred Income (Deferred Liability or Deferred Revenue)

    Deferred Revenue in liabilities, namely income received in advance for goods or services that have not been completed or delivered. For example, if goods or services have been delivered to consumers, then this component can only be referred to as revenue and included in the income statement.

    6. Salaries Payable

    This liability is a company obligation that is paid to all employees, but the total amount that must be paid has not been able to fulfill this obligation. Therefore, this component is included in the company’s debt to its employees.

    7. Dividends Payable

    Dividend liability is part of the company’s profit that has been determined to be distributed to shareholders in the form of dividends. Because this nominal has not been paid, it will be included in the debt section in the accounting balance sheet.

    8. Tax Payable

    Taxes payable in liabilities are obligations that must be paid by the company for tax calculations from all company assets in the form of buildings that have been used.

    2. Long Term Liabilities

    All debts whose repayment obligations are paid over a relatively long period of time or at least more than one year are long term liabilities . Long-term liabilities are obligations that must be paid by the company with a relatively long term, namely in one cycle of the company’s financial statements.

    This liability can also be referred to as non-current debt, because the company cannot pay this obligation in less than a one-year period.

    The components included in this type of liability are as follows.

    1. Bank Loans (Bank Loans)

    Bank debt in liabilities is loan funds from banks obtained by the company and used as company capital, such as for company mergers or business expansion activities.

    2. Mortgage Payable

    This liability represents the company’s loan debt with collateral in the form of fixed assets and fixed assets owned by the company.

    3. Bonds Payable

    Bonds are transferable medium-long term bonds. This letter serves as evidence stating that the investor or bondholder lent a certain amount of money to a business entity or company that issued it.

    4. Noveltasi Credit (Long Term Loan)

    Noveltasi loans in liabilities are company obligations obtained from banks or other financial institutions in the form of long-term loans.

    5. Duration Debt (Subordinated Loan)

    Duration debt is an obligation by the shareholders of the parent company that does not use an interest system.

    6. Payable Lease

    Payable leases in liabilities are debts originating from foreign companies to purchase fixed assets in which all payments are paid in installments over a relatively long period of time.

    7. Debt of Shareholders (Holding Company Loan)

    If a company has an affiliated company, the shareholder’s debt becomes an obligation that must be paid. This debt must be given from the parent company to affiliated companies and new subsidiaries as operational capital for the company’s business. In general, this liability can be paid in installments over a relatively long period of time.

    Debt to Equity Ratio

    The first liability component that must be analyzed is the debt to equity ratio (revenue/company value added). Before starting, ask Sinaumed’s himself the following: is the equity the company has acquired sufficient to pay all of its debts?

    If the amount of debt reaches 50% or more, then the company’s finances are in an unhealthy condition. So that in the following year the company must try to reduce liabilities and increase equity.

    Debt to Asset Ratio

    The next liability analysis that Sinaumed’s needs to do is the debt to asset ratio. This component becomes more important, because it involves the company’s operational license.

    If after analysis it is found that the amount of debt reaches 50% or more, then the assets of the Sinaumed’s company are at risk of being subject to a mortgage (if they fail to pay liabilities).

    The ideal number to debt ratio is 40%, or less. The lower the ratio of debt to assets, the safer the company’s operations will be.

    Examples of Company Liabilities

    Liability is an accounting component that is not too difficult to understand, so Sinaumed’s can easily calculate the amount. However, to make it easier to understand liabilities, the following is an example of a company’s liabilities.

    LIABILITIES FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

    PT JAYA MAKMUR TBK.

    December 31, 2020

    SHORT-TERM LIABILITIES

    Trade payables ¾ Third parties : 105,980,775

    Other payables ¾ Third parties : 859,657

    Taxes payable: 799,999

    Accrued expenses: 50,956,390

    Bank loans: 48,900,000

    Long-term debt: –

    Finance lease: 67,345,098

    Other short-term liabilities: 5,991

    Total short term liabilities: 274,847,910

    LONG TERM LIABILITIES

    Employee benefits liability: 49,553,900

    Senior notes : 32,456,988

    Bank loans: 85,688,900

    Finance lease: 151,990,800

    Total long term liabilities : 319,690,588

    Overall total liabilities: 594,538,498

    Examples of Short Term Debt Questions and Answers

    The definition of short-term receivables is the obligation of a company whose settlement period is less than one year. Consider the following examples of short-term debt:

    Examples of short-term accounts payable

    PT Atos Empuk Jaya is a trading company that sells various software and hardware in the field of information technology. On March 20, 2021, the company sold its merchandise worth IDR 36,500,000 to Toko Ora Nyetrum using a credit system with payment terms of 3/10, n/45.

    The cost of the product provided by the supplier to PT Atos Empuk Jaya is IDR 30,000,000. The question is how is the treatment of accounting records for buyers and sellers?

    Answers and discussion:

    Recording of accounting journals on the seller’s side:

    (Debit ) Trade Receivable … IDR 36,500,000

    (Credit) Sales…. IDR 36,500,000

    (Debit) Cost of Goods Sold …. IDR 30,000,000

    (Credit) Merchandise Inventory … IDR 30,000,000

    Recording of accounting journals on the buyer’s side:

    Merchandise Inventory…. IDR 36,500,000 (Debit)

    Accounts Payable …… IDR 36,500,000 (Credit)

    Examples of long term problems and solutions

    Long-term debt is a company’s obligations with maturities of more than twelve months. To help understand this insight, consider the following examples of long-term debt problems:

    Examples of long-term accounts payable

    PT Lokita Baru is a trading company that has plans to develop marketing areas to increase sales turnover. All preparations were carried out carefully, starting from the infrastructure and other supporting facilities.

    Question:

    How does PT Lokita Baru record the bank’s long-term debt?

    Answers and Discussion:

    A: Calculating loan interest

    = IDR 250,000,000 x 18%

    = IDR 45,000,000

    B: Perform debt accounting records

    Cash ….. IDR 250,000,000 (Debit)

    Interest expense …. IDR 45,000,000 (Debit)

    Long-term debt …. IDR 250,000,000 (Credit)

    Interest Debt…. IDR 45,000,000 (Credit)

    Conclusion

    Liability is something that cannot be avoided, especially for a newly developing company. However, if the liability management is well organized, then Sinaumed’s does not need to worry that the company will collapse due to too many liabilities.

    Also Read:

    • Recognize the Difference between Direct Investment and Not
    • Definition of KPR: Types, Benefits and Considerations
    • Monetary Policy Instruments: Definition, Types
    • Understanding the Definition, Functions, and Types of Money
    • Cash Equivalent Assets: Definition, Types, Purpose
  • What is Legal Sociology? Definition, Characteristics, and Examples

    What is Legal Sociology? Definition, Characteristics, and Examples – Sociology in the field of science plays an important role in developing knowledge that is increasing rapidly today. Humans themselves are social beings who in their daily life must socialize with each other with other humans. This is what gave rise to a branch of science called sociology whose main focus is studying social activity between humans.

    In social life, humans must always apply sociological values ​​in their activities such as buying and selling transactions, establishing business relationships, or even looking for a life partner requires social activities that are based on sociological values ​​because it is impossible for humans to carry out all activities without need the help of others in their daily activities.

    And, in a social stratum, laws are definitely needed to regulate every human activity so that there is no chaos caused by irresponsible humans when carrying out their free will. Indeed, every human being has the freedom to determine his own way of life, but when there is no law in human social activity, this freedom actually interferes with the freedom of other humans.

    For this reason, there is a study of the sociology of law which regulates the relationship between sociology and law itself in regulating human and social relations.

    Furthermore, we have summarized the explanation of what legal sociology is below!

  • What is Leasing? Definition, Types, and Benefits

    What is leasing? – In general, leasing is a form of financing activities for capital goods or equipment in the form of option rights or without option rights that are utilized for customers within a predetermined period of time. Where payments are made in installments or installments.

    Some experts also argue that leasing is a form of agreement entered into by people who own assets or goods with their customers. In this case, the owners of the assets will be referred to as lessors, while the customers are referred to as lessees. Later, the lessors will provide goods or capital products needed by the lessee to support production operations. Instead, the lessee must make payments to the lessors in installments or installments.

    Meanwhile, according to the Decree of the Ministry of Finance Number 1169/KMK.01/1991, the definition of leasing or what is commonly referred to as leasing is a payment activity in the form of providing goods or capital for leasing. Where in it there are options or without option rights which are then utilized by customers within a certain period of time based on payments to be made in installments.

    Based on the explanation above, it can be concluded that leasing has eight main elements, namely company financing, supply of goods or capital, payment within a certain period of time, there is an agreed residual value, there are voting rights or option rights, payment in installments, there are parties lessor, and there is the lessee party.

    The definition of leasing is

    Leasing is a financing activity in the form of providing goods or capital that can be carried out by anyone who needs it. Be it companies or individuals who use these items. Leasing activities generally have a certain period of time and the method of payment is also in installments or installments.

    Payment by installments makes it easier for customers because they no longer need to prepare large amounts of money at one time. The amount of payment also depends on the amount of the cost of goods or capital and the chosen installment period.

    In addition, there is another definition of the term leasing, which is an agreement that has been agreed upon by the owner of the capital with another party which is usually referred to as the customer who cooperates with them. After the agreement is made, then the customer will receive capital or goods and start paying installments until the agreed time.

    Leasing is one method that is often relied on by the people of Indonesia. This is because the presence of leasing is very helpful for the community to be able to more easily buy goods and obtain the capital needed. For example, when buying electronic goods, vehicles, capital to build a business, and others.

    History and Development of Leasing

    Leasing is an activity that has existed for a long time. This activity began to appear in 2000 BC, where it was first practiced in Sumer. This is evidenced by the discovery of leasing documents which were blinded out of clay and contained leasing and all kinds of needs at that time. Such as livestock, water, daily equipment, and others. Leasing activities were then resumed and further evidence was found in the form of leasing institutions in Babylon in 400 BC. Leasing in ancient times was like today. Communities in Babylon have taken advantage of leasing activities to meet their needs. Starting from the soil, plant seeds, and tools needed for farming.

    After that, leasing activities were followed by Egypt, Rome, Ancient Greece, and other countries. In modern times like today, new activities are present in the United States. In 1850, someone named Tom M. Clark was recorded as the first person in America to lease a train. From this, leasing then spread to all corners of the world.

    Leasing Types

    Leasing is divided into five types based on the implementation process. The five types include:

    1. Capital Leases

    Capital lease is a type of company engaged in the leasing sector and originates from a financial institution. This type of leasing can usually serve customers who need freedom in terms of determining capital or goods with certain specifications. In use, the lessor will provide a number of funds to be used to pay for the goods needed by the supplier. Then it will be handed over to the lessee. After that, the lessor will receive a reward in the form of payment in installments or in installments within a mutually agreed period.

    2. Operating Lease

    Operating Lease is a type of leasing company in which the lessor will buy an item and then lease it to customers within an agreed timeframe. For this, the customer usually only needs to pay the rental fee for the goods. Meanwhile, the price and other costs will be borne by the lessor.

    3. Sales Type Lease

    A sales lease is a type of leasing that is generally carried out by companies operating in the industrial sector. Then they will sell goods lease from the results of the products they make. There are two types of income that can be recognized, the first is income from the sale of goods. Then the second is income that comes from interest on spending over a certain period of time.

    4. Leverage Leases

    Leverage is a type of leasing company that involves a third party. That means, the lessor will not pay 100% for the leasing object, but they only need to pay 20% to 40%. The rest will be borne directly by third parties.

    5. Cross Border Leases

    It is a type of leasing company carried out by interstates. That means, the lessor and the lessee are not in the same country. However, both are in different countries. Generally, this type of leasing only makes transactions for goods that have a large nominal value. As well as Boeing or Airbus aircraft products.

    Benefits and Advantages of Leasing

    Presenting goods and capital procurement activities on a leasing basis will certainly make it easier for the company to obtain the goods it needs. As for some of the benefits and advantages that will be obtained by the company for carrying out leasing activities, including:

    1. Be Flexible

    The structural framework in the leasing can be adjusted according to the needs of the lessee. So that the leasing period and also the nominal to be paid can be adjusted to the customer’s financial condition.

    2. No Guarantee Required

    The legal title to the assets under the lease and the appropriate lease payments for the assets can be used as security for the lease.

    3. Capital Saving

    The leasing agency will usually provide a budget of 100% for customers. So that the lessee can use these funds for other needs with the aim of increasing the company’s productivity.

    4. Fast Service

    In general, the financing procedure will take a relatively short time. Starting from the submission system to its realization. With this convenience, it can increase time efficiency for carrying out company activities. So that the company can also be more productive.

    5. Avoid Inflation

    In leasing activities, customers can avoid inflation because payments will be made in accordance with the agreed financial unit.

    6. Protected By Law

    Here, the lessor and also the lessee will get legal certainty because there are regulations that have previously been agreed upon. Where these regulations cannot be canceled even though they are experiencing difficult financial conditions.

    7. How to Acquire Assets

    Leasing parties are often used as one of the main choices when a company wants to modernize to increase productivity but has difficulty in terms of funding.

    Terms in leasing and their meanings

    There are several terms that are often used in leasing transactions. The following are terms in leasing and their explanations:

    a. Lease: That is a lease contract for the utilization of assets with the amount of rent paid within a certain period of time.
    b. Lessee: Namely the customer or customer which is usually in the form of an individual or company. Where they take advantage of capital from financing the leasing party.
    c. Lessor: Namely the party that owns assets or capital goods, which will then be leased.
    d. Lease Term: This is the lease term which is absolute and irrevocable.
    e. Residual Value: This is the value of the leased asset that may be applied at the end of the lease period.

    Leasing Function Is

    It should be understood that actually the function of leasing is almost the same as that of a bank. Where leasing also provides medium-scale product financing. The difference lies only in the form of the loan. Usually conventional banks only provide loans in the form of money.

    While leasing can provide loans in the form of goods which later payments will be made in installments. For example, regarding the purchase of a motorcycle. Without leasing, we have to buy it in cash and it will definitely be very burdensome for people who don’t have large amounts of money at one time. Especially for people who are just a laborer and need years to buy motorbikes in cash.

    Therefore, leasing is here to provide an opportunity for people to be able to own a motorbike without having to pay 100 percent in cash. Usually we only need to issue a down payment for the initial payment. The amount of down payment varies. Where later the shortfall of the payment can be paid in installments over a predetermined and agreed period.

    The Purpose of Leasing Is

    In general, the purpose of leasing is to make it easy for people to own goods or capital, even though these goods have a high value. In addition, the leasing party will also benefit from the business. Usually they will benefit from credit interest. If the desired motorcycle price has a normal price of 17 million. So we have to pay for the motorbike at a higher price than the initial price on the leasing party. Because, in the installments there will be credit interest.

    Examples of Leasing Companies in Indonesia

    There are quite a lot of leasing companies in Indonesia. Where the company already has a variety of services offered. The following are leasing companies currently in Indonesia, namely PT BCA Finance, PT Federal International Finance (FIF), PT Adira Dinamika Multi Finance, Tbk. PT Oto Multi Artha, PT Summit Oto Finance, PT Wahana Ottomira Multiartha (WOM), and many others.

    The difference between Leasing and Credit

    When viewed from the definition, leasing and credit already look different in outline. The difference between the two is very clear, because one company only has a role to rent and the other only to buy. The following is a complete explanation of the difference between leasing and credit.

    1. Payment Deadline

    Leasing and credit do have payment deadlines. However, the specified time limit is not the same between leasing and credit. In leasing, the payment deadline is determined directly by the lessor and usually the time period given is quite long. Depends on the ability of the lessor to pay for the lease. Meanwhile, for credit, usually the time limit given is more limited or shorter. The amount of money and the term of payment is the result of the agreement of both parties. However, the time limit for lredit generally has a maximum of 5 years.

    2. Ownership of Goods

    If on leasing, the ownership of the goods remains with the lessor. So that when the customer cannot pay off the payment according to the agreed time, the item will be withdrawn by the lessor. Whereas in credit, for example there is a case where the customer is late in paying the agreed installments, a penalty or deferred interest will be imposed in the following month. However, if by maturity the customer has not paid the installment, then the goods that have been purchased will be confiscated by the creditor and the previous installment money will not be returned.

    3. Users or Clients

    In general, those using leasing are industries that are capital intensive. For example, companies engaged in the field of aircraft fleet, procurement of heavy equipment, procurement of production machines, to leasing vehicles. As for credit, it is generally used by individuals or individuals to buy certain goods. For example electronic goods, vehicles, and others.

    That is an explanation of leasing and its types, brief history, benefits and advantages. For Sinaumed’s who will use the leasing system, make sure you have chosen a trusted and official leasing company. So that the payment system and interest are clear and not too burdensome.

    Also Read:

     

  • What is Laravel to its advantages and disadvantages

    What is Laravel to its advantages and disadvantages

    What is Laravel – When developing a website or site, choosing the right framework is one of the things that must be considered. So, the resulting website will definitely be maximized, because the features available are adjusted to the needs. Well, the most recommended framework for creating websites is usually the Laravel framework.

    If you use the Laravel Framework, the cost of creating a website is much more economical. Because, the features that exist are only what is needed. So, not only is it cost-effective, but on the other hand it also saves more time.

    So, what is Laravel? What are the advantages? And what are the tips for learning Laravel to be more effective? Come on, let’s see the article about Laravel until it’s finished.

    What is Laravel?

    Laravel is a PHP programming-based framework that can be used in the website development process so that it is more optimal. Using Laravel will make the resulting website more optimal and dynamic.

    The presence of the Laravel framework makes PHP programming maximized and more powerful. This is because the presence of the Laravel framework is better and its features are lighter than other frameworks.

    This Laravel framework uses the Model View Controller or MVC structure. MVC itself is a separator application model between the display of application components and data. By using the MVC model, Laravel users will find it easier to understand and learn Laravel. And also the process of creating a website application will certainly be faster.

    The Laravel framework also provides fairly complete built-in features, including authentication features. So, this Framework tends to focus on the end user level. Where the Laravel framework is indeed simple but has many advantages. Both in terms of appearance and the side of writing the code. Even so, the Laravel framework remains in great demand for creating web-based applications because of its complete features.

    This is because of its flexibility and advantages in the web application development process, many companies use Laravel development. From small companies to large companies.

    Laravel Framework Functions

    Known as a full-featured framework, Laravel certainly has functions that simplify the website creation process optimally and dynamically, as well as saving costs and time. This is because the features created are only what is needed.

    Laravel Pros and Cons

    Maybe as a material consideration, you can first read the advantages and disadvantages of this Laravel Framework, namely:

    1. Pros of Laravel 

    • Very easy to learn for beginners.
    • The developing process becomes more practical.
    • Laravel is already used all over the world, so it is possible for beginners to adapt more easily to new projects.
    • Existing tools are suitable for advanced and novice developers.
    • Lots of forums and documentation, so you can discuss if there are problems or errors.
    • Has a basic template that is quite light.
    • The code it has is pretty neat in comparison.
    • Has many features available.

    2. Laravel Disadvantages 

    • Need to update frequently to new versions, in a short time too, compared to other frameworks.
    • In some cases, Laravel’s execution time is slightly slower than CI.
    • Has a code size that includes weight for a framework.

    Mengenal Lebih Dalam Laravel - IDS Digital College

    Laravel Features

    The Laravel framework is well known, because it has many advantages, and also has many available features. Did you know? Following are the features of Laravel:

    • Authentication

    This feature is a feature that you can use to create a website with authentication. So, it’s easier and you don’t need to fill in the code from scratch, so that the authentication feature is on your website.

    • Testing and Debugging

    Laravel also has features for testing and debugging websites. So, you don’t need to worry and bother if you want to do testing and debugging.

    • Routing

    With this feature, you can make applications easily and quickly, because this framework uses route assistance to map all requests. You can also give routing names, filter routes as needed, and also create a grouping.

    • Blade Template Engine

    This framework also provides blade features that can be used to design consistent layouts .

    • Composer

    This feature helps you improve and perfect your website development process, and also makes the updating process easier .

    Effective Laravel Learning Tips

    Are you interested in learning Laravel? If so, maybe you need some tips and tricks on learning Laravel for beginners, which will make your learning more effective. Here are the tips.

    1. Understand the concepts of HTML, CRUD, PHP, and OOP first.
    2. By choosing the right code editor.
    3. Use a helper function or help from Laravel.
    4. Also study the MVC architecture.
    5. Try creating a new, simple project.
    6. If you experience errors and problems, you can find solutions via the internet.
    7. Explore and evaluate more projects.
    8. Try joining by creating team projects, namely in the form of bootcamps or internships, so you will get experience encountering other problems or errors.
    9. Lastly, maybe you can also learn CI, if you are used to it, surely you will easily adapt to Laravel.

    Understanding PHP Framework

    This PHP framework or framework facilitates the process of developing web or applications that use PHP, with the basic structure of building a website. So, in essence PHP frameworks can help develop websites or applications more quickly. This framework also helps build stable applications.

    That is, programmers or developers do not need to do coding repeatedly. This framework can also help beginners if they want to build stable applications, because this framework helps ensure that coding and database interactions are running well on the presentation screen. So, developers or programmers are more focused on building applications properly without writing code repeatedly.

    What is Laravel? | Learn 13 Key Features in the Laravel Framework

    Advantages of PHP Frameworks

    Before knowing what are the best PHP frameworks that you can use, you also have to know why web developers and programmers prefer to use this PHP. Here are some of the advantages of PHP frameworks:

    Faster

    First, the reason why programmers or developers have to use this PHP framework is because 4G this framework processes website development faster, because the PHP framework has the same code in several similar projects, so of course the work can be completed faster or the project time is longer. fast.

    The framework can also offer modules that have been made before for working on quite difficult coding tasks. So, developers can spend time developing actual apps instead of building the foundation for each project.

    More Stable

    Apart from being fast, the reason why PHP is often used is because it is a more popular coding language, it is because PHP is easier to use and simpler, even for beginners, and also more stable. However, with all the conveniences available, you might make an accidental mistake. Even though your website can still work, errors can be avoided if you use a PHP framework.

    This is because the PHP framework is made in such a way as to remain stable. This is why PHP is known for its good stability and is the reason developers are happy with this PHP framework.

    Easy to find

    Actually, you can easily find PHP frameworks on the internet. There, there are various types of frameworks that you can choose according to your needs, or you can also make your own framework, but if you want it to be faster, you can just search for frameworks on the internet.

    Then the PHP framework also has a community forum and support team that can be used to interact with programmers or developers who use the same framework.

    So, before using a PHP framework, you should adapt the framework to the project you are going to work on. Will the developing process be easy and fast with the framework? Does the app improve stability and work well or not. If yes, then this PHP framework is suitable.

    How to Choose the Right PHP Framework

    There are many choices of frameworks that can be used for developing any type of website or application. However, so that you don’t choose the wrong one, you should pay attention to a number of steps that must be applied in choosing the right PHP Framework.

    So, before choosing a framework, consider who will be modifying your application and who will be using it. There are several factors that you need to know in choosing a PHP framework, namely:

    1. Choose one that is easy to use
    2. Fast framework and development performance
    3. Popularity among website developers or developer community
    4. Services or Features available in the framework
    5. Whether there is a community forum and support

    So, if you are a beginner in using PHP frameworks, it’s a good idea to try some other frameworks, which one is suitable and what you like. This is because each framework definitely has its own advantages and disadvantages, so you need to be selective in choosing, identifying which ones are your needs, as well as whether you are comfortable using the framework.

    The Best PHP Framework Recommendations Besides Laravel 

    We all know that PHP is the choice of most developers, because it is already widely used, and as it develops, PHP’s popularity is increasing. And more and more PHP frameworks are emerging. Now, there are many questions, what is the best PHP framework?

    PHP frameworks are made for different purposes, what is best for you may not be optimal for someone else. Therefore, there are many choices of recommendation frameworks that can help developer projects.

    One of them is Laravel which we discussed earlier. Laravel is known as a framework that has complete features, has functions that facilitate the process of making websites maximally and dynamically. As well as saving costs and time, as well as the most widely used by companies and developers.

    However, even though Lavarel is the most popular, there are also other frameworks that you can make an alternative choice of, including:

    1. Laminas Project

    Previously, Laminas Project was known as The Zend Framework. Even though it has changed its name, this framework still has an active user base and lots of support. Apart from that, the Laminas Project is a framework that can be used to develop websites. The performance is quite high and is in the same class as enterprise applications. Laminas Project also has many features such as feeds, services, forms, authentication components, and so on.

    2. CakePHP

    For those of you who are new to using PHP frameworks, maybe CakePHP can be the right choice for you. This framework focuses on rapid development, built on the principles of Ruby on Rails. So you can do web development with speed, ease of use, support systems, and ever-growing scalability. Making CakePHP the right choice for your web or application development.

    3. Symphony

    The Symfony Framework is suitable for developers who already have high experience and in-depth knowledge of application development. Because Symfony is made to create a corporate level web. Examples of websites that use this framework are Yahoo!, Askeet, and Bookmarks.

    Symfony is also open source, which has many features and can be used in many ways. However, Symfony performs slightly slower than the others.

    4. CodeIgniter

    Then, there is CodeIgniter, which has quite good speed and performance. This framework is very suitable for beginners. This PHP framework is usually used on a hosting, on a shared account, or if you want to use it with a small footprint. CodeIgniter also has a library of available user guides, video tutorials, support pages and forums.

    5. Seagulls

    Seagull is also a PHP framework that is used to create web, GUI applications, and command lines. This framework is suitable for a wide range of development, from beginners to advanced coders. For beginners, this Framework has examples of applications that you can customize according to your needs.

    If you’re advanced, Seagull also offers a wide range of options, including standards and best practices, as well as a modular codebase that makes developing web applications easy and fast. Seagull also has an active developer community and support documentation if you need help.

    6. FuelPHP

    Then, this FuelPHP Framework was introduced to the public in 2014. Even though this PHP Framework is still young, this PHP framework has a high level of security. This framework also supports PHP from version 5.4, and also has interesting features, such as unit testing, fuel debugger, and also uses an easy-to-use MVC architecture feature.

    7. Lumens

    Lumen PHP Framework is the younger sibling of the Laravel Framework, which is known as the micro framework, because it is capable of delivering fast APIs and micro-services. So, lumen includes the lite version of Laravel. If you want to use Lumen, then you have to install PHP version 7.2 and above.

    8. Phalcon

    Phalcon is a framework that has the fastest programming language compared to CakePHP, ZEND1, and CodeIgniter2. This framework already supports PHP 5.4 and is suitable for various projects, from lightweight to enterprise level. It has an open source framework, so it doesn’t need a lot of code in its implementation.

    9. Yii

    Yii stands for “Yes it is!”, which is an open source framework that adopts the concept of MCV or Model Controller View. This framework has the advantage of being easy to extend , because Yii can be installed on third-party libraries. This framework also does not take long to develop applications.

    10. Slim

    Slim is the same as Lumen, which includes a micro framework. This framework is specifically designed to quickly develop web applications and APIs. The 4th version was released in 2019. If you want to install Slim, you must first use a web server, such as Apache or Nginx.

    11. Fate Free

    Fate Free is a micro PHP framework with various features, ranging from CSS compression, image processing, data validation, open ID, unit testing, and more. This framework supports the use of both NoSQL and SQL databases, and also uses multilingualism for its web application development process.

    12. Auras

    Finally, there is the Aura framework. Aura is a framework suitable for developing simple applications. Libraries in Aura can stand alone and can be installed with all projects. However, in every library that is owned, Aura does not have dependencies.

    So, Laravel is a framework based on PHP programming that can be used as a website development process, and Laravel is the most popular framework compared to the others. You can also read complete Laravel information on the official site, I hope the above information is useful, good luck!

  • What is IVF? Here are 5 Processes

    What is test tube baby? IVF is one method of obtaining offspring. Even though it is often heard by the wider community, there are still many who do not know what IVF is.

    This article will discuss what IVF is, what the process is and the risks of IVF.

    What is IVF?

    IVF is a method for obtaining offspring by utilizing science in the health sector. In the end there is no difference between babies resulting from normal fertilization and fertilization carried out through IVF.

    Factors Occurrence of IVF

    1.  Genetic disorders through heredity
    2.  Health condition
    3.  Disorders of the uterus such as damage or blockage of the egg cell pathway
    4.  The sperm produced is of poor quality, which inhibits fertilization and low sperm count
    5.  Low ovarian reserves and ovulation disorders that result in low quality egg cells
    6.  Fertility problems for both partners
    7.  Women who have the hormone disorder polycystic ovary syndrome which causes enlarged ovaries with small cysts on the outside.

    IVF Process

    •  Both partners should eat a balanced diet
    • Maintain weight
    • Avoid alcohol and cigarettes
    • Exercise regularly
    • Especially for women to consume vitamins to prepare for pregnancy if needed

    If these preparations have been made, the IVF process can also be carried out with several initial steps such as checking the uterus and sperm needed in the IVF process. IVF can be said to be a long process with at least five stages, namely:

    1. Ovary Stimulation

    This stage is the first step in the IVF process by increasing the number of egg cells produced by women using fertility drugs. The more eggs that can be taken and fertilized during the IVF process, the greater the chance of pregnancy.

    The doctor will also see growth and development in a few days by doing ultrasound and blood tests to monitor the development of the egg in the ovary and determine hormone levels.

    2. Oocyte maturation

    Oocyte maturation is a stage to complete the growth and development of the egg. Women will be given an injection of Human Chorionic Gonadotropin (hCG) to maximize egg cell maturation. This injection is done only once at the right time so that the egg cells produced will mature.

    3. Egg Collection

    In this process the doctor will take the egg from the ovary and evaluate it to assess its quality. Collection of new eggs can be done around 34-36 hours after you receive the hCG injection. Egg retrieval is done using a needle that will suck the follicle in the ovary.

    4. Conception

    Then an insemination process is carried out, in which the man gives a sperm sample which will then be mixed with the woman’s egg cells and the two cells will be put into a special room. If the sperm quality is low, an intracytoplasmic sperm injection (ICSI) process will be carried out, which is injecting sperm directly into each mature egg. If fertilization is successful, it will produce an embryo.

    5. Embryo Planting

    After the fertilization is successful and produces an embryo, the next step is to implant the embryo into the woman’s uterus. Embryo implantation is usually done five days after fertilization when the embryo is in the blastocyst phase. Pregnancy will occur when the embryo attaches to the lining of the uterus which will attach properly when the embryo is in the blastocyst phase.

    Tests Before IVF Process

    In fact, sometimes the process does not immediately succeed in just one action. There are several things that can reduce the chances of success from this IVF program. In addition, there is a risk of causing chromosomal abnormalities in the fetus.

    Among them are increasing age in women, unhealthy lifestyles and excessive body weight. Therefore, it is necessary to carry out the procedure before carrying out the IVF program. The procedure carried out before carrying out this program is to undergo a series of tests.

    The test will be carried out by an expert doctor. What tests should be done? Are as follows.

    1. Ovarian reserve testing

    Ovarian reserve testing will play an important role in achieving a pregnancy. You need to know in advance about the number of egg sacs that will be assisted by their growth. The trick is to do an ultrasound examination.

    The ultrasound examination is carried out through the vagina when it is time for menstruation. As on the first day, until the fifth day. It will also measure levels of AMH, or anti-Mullerian hormone.

    2. Examination of infectious infectious diseases

    The next test that must be carried out is an examination of infectious infectious diseases in patients. The doctors will examine, or screen the patient first. This examination aims to find out, if there is a contagious infectious disease.

    Some infectious diseases include hepatitis B, hepatitis C and HIV. This process is very important and should not be missed. Because, it can affect the process of pregnancy.

    It should be noted that this infectious disease is a serious disease. The disease can harm the fetus. In addition, it can cause various complications.

    This infectious disease can threaten the safety of two people at once, namely the mother and her baby. To avoid things that are not desirable, pregnant women should regularly check their pregnancy to the doctor. So that both are maintained and protected.

    3. Examination of the uterine wall

    The next test is an examination of the uterine wall. This procedure can be done in two ways. First, by using a special liquid. The fluid will be injected into the uterus, through the cervix.

    Then it will be followed by ultrasound. In this process, an image of the uterine cavity will be obtained. The second way is to insert a flexible hose. This flexible hose will place the camera in it. Later the tube will enter into the vagina and towards the uterus.

    4. Sperm test

    The final test is a sperm test. This test is also known as a sperm analysis. The purpose of this test is to determine the quality and quantity of the sperm of the patient who will carry out the IVF program.

    If it has been examined, the doctor will remove the female egg. Meanwhile for men, they will release their own sperm. Usually they will release sperm in a special room, the room is called the masturbation room.

    IVF Success Rate

    • Reasons for infertility
    • Place to run test tube baby program
    • Egg condition
    • Type of egg (own or donor)
    • Age

    The American Pregnancy Association explains the success rate of IVF programs. According to him, success for women under the age of 35 is around 41% to 43%. Meanwhile, for women who are over 40 years old, the success rate will decrease.

    The decrease was quite significant, resulting in a 13% to 18% success rate. These figures are worth considering. Given that the IVF program is something that really needs preparation.

    In addition, this IVF program will also cost a lot. If you really intend to do IVF, then you must immediately develop a preparation plan. Try to do it before the age of over 40 years.

    Benefits of the IVF Program

    1. Couples long distance marriage

    There are several things that make married couples undergo long distance marriage or LDM. LDM is a condition that makes household relationships happen remotely.

    Therefore, sex will not be as routine as a partner who does not have it. As women generally increase, the number of egg cells can decrease. This can be a consideration in making IVF programs.

    2. Fertility preservation

    Patients who have serious illnesses often require chemotherapy . In fact, this can have an impact on reproductive function. Through IVF technology, preservation can be done.

    Prior to chemotherapy , the patient can store her egg reserves. After that it can be frozen. After the treatment is complete and the patient is ready to get pregnant, treatment can be carried out.

    3. Infectious disease

    There are several infectious diseases that will be transmitted through sexual intercourse. Examples include the HIV virus, the viruses that cause hepatitis B and hepatitis C. These diseases can be transmitted to partners.

    The IVF program can help couples in obtaining healthy children. Couples can also avoid the risk of transmission.

    4. Prevent genetic diseases

    During the IVF program, there is embryo examination technology. This is done before the embryo is implanted into the uterus. The examination is intended to minimize genetic diseases in the child in the future.

    If a genetic disease is found, the embryo can be eliminated. Then a healthy embryo will be selected. There is Preimplantation Genetic Testing for Aneuploidy or PGT-A. Its purpose is to screen for genetic disorders.

    Examples include chromosomal abnormalities including trisomy 18, trisomy 21, and Down syndrome. Then, there is also Preimplantation Genetic Testing for Monogenic or PGT-M. Use for disease screening based on a single gene.

    5. Vaginismus

    Vaginismus is a condition in which the muscles around the vagina tighten. This condition occurs when penetration. It will interfere with sex.

    Patients with vaginismus should undergo therapy. This therapy will take some time. While age will continue to grow.

    In addition, egg reserves will also be dwindling. The solution is, besides doing therapy for vaginismus, a wife can take part in IVF to have a child, without waiting for recovery from vaginismus.

    That’s information about what IVF is. Find more information at www.sinaumedia.com . sinaumedia as #FriendsWithoutLimits will always provide interesting information and recommendations for the best books for Sinaumed’s.

    • Class X Virus Material: Definition, Characteristics, Body Structure, Types, Impact
    • The intricacies of the human movement system
    • Functions of the Tongue and Its Parts
    • Stomach Structure and Function in Humans
    • Striated Muscles: Definition, Parts, Properties, Characteristics, Working Methods and Functions
    • Small Intestine Function and Its Parts
  • What is Itikaf? Law, Intentions and Best Time to Carry Out Iktikaf

    What Is Iktikaf – Approaching the month of Ramadan like this, it would be better if we improve our good deeds so that we can get multiple rewards. Actually, these good practices can be carried out at any time, not necessarily in the month of Ramadan. However, these practices will be more important if they are carried out during the month of Ramadan, especially on the nights of the last ten days of Ramadan or during Lailatul Qadar.

    One of the good practices that can be carried out during the month of Ramadan is I’tikaf. This I’tikaf is highly recommended and even often carried out by the Prophet Muhammad SAW in the mosque.

    Then, what is I’tikaf? What is the law in Islam? Can I’tikaf worship be carried out at home, especially during the Covid-19 pandemic as it is today?

    Well, so that Sinaumed’s can understand things about the I’tikaf. Let’s look at the following reviews!

    Definition of I’tikaf

    Etymologically, the word “I’tikaf” means ‘ to settle on something and to refrain from staying with Him ‘. Meanwhile, according to the understanding of the Shari’a meaning, “I’tikaf” means ‘ to remain silent in the jami mosque’ with the intention of worshiping Allah SWT ‘.

    In this I’tikaf, we will sit “alone” with Allah SWT and always make dhikr by asking for His forgiveness and mercy. So, I’tikaf is not just being silent, but also while reciting dhikr or Asmaul Husna.

    The virtue of this i’tikaf worship activity is very great, especially if it is done on the night of Lailatul Qadar. In a hadith, Rasulullah SAW once said that i’tikaf activities in the last ten nights of the month of Ramadan are like i’tikaf with Him.

    The hadith reads:

    “Whoever wants to perform I’tikaf with me, then perform I’tikaf in the last ten nights. (Reported by Ibn Hibban)

    Apart from that, the Quran also often teaches about this i’tikaf worship. One of the reasons is:

    Which mean,

    “ And We have commanded Ibrahim and Ismail: ‘Clean My house for those who thawad, who perform I’tikaf, who bow down’ and who prostrate. ‘” (Al-Baqarah: 125)

     

     

    How is the Law of Implementing I’tikaf?

    The scholars have agreed that this i’tikaf activity is sunnah. This is because Rasulullah SAW does it every year to get closer to Allah SWT and ask Him for a reward.

    The law regarding i’tikaf worship is based on the words of the Prophet Muhammad SAW, namely,

    Which mean,

    “Indeed I did I’tikaf in the first ten days of Ramadan to seek the night of glory (Lailatul Qadar), then I did I’tikaf in the middle of the ten days of Ramadan, then Jibril came to me and announced that the night of glory was in the last ten days of Ramadan. Whoever wants to perform I’tikaf, let him perform I’tikaf (to look for that night). So the companions also performed I’tikaf with Him. ” (HR Muslim: 1167)

    However, the sunnah “status” in i’tikaf can change to be obligatory if previously there was someone who vowed to do i’tikaf. This is based on the words of the Prophet Muhammad SAW,

    Which mean,

    “Whoever vows to obey Allah, he is obliged to fulfill it. ” (Narrated by Bukhari: 6318)

    What is the intention to carry out I’tikaf?

    As with other worship, i’tikaf must also be started with the intention first. The prayer of intention for i’tikaf is as follows,

    Nawaitu an a`takifa fi hadzal masjidil ma dumtu fih 

    Which mean:

    “I intend to do i’tikaf in the mosque as long as I am in it”

    As for other prayer intentions that can also be used (quoted from the Book of Al-Majmu by Imam An-Nawawi),

    Nawaitul i`tikafa fi hadzal masjidil lillahi ta`ala

    Which mean:

    “I intend to do i’tikaf in the mosque because of Allah SWT”

     

     

    Where Can I’tikaf Be Done?

    I’tikaf is recommended to be performed in any mosque, with a number of conditions in that mosque there are prayers in the congregation of men.

    Why is there such a condition? Ibn Qudamah said that “ Congregational prayers are obligatory (for men). If a man who wants to perform i’tikaf does not stay in a mosque where congregational prayers are not enforced, two negative impacts can occur, namely,

    • leaving congregational prayers which are obligatory,
    • constantly leaving the place of i’tikaf even though like this could have been avoided. 

    If something like this happens, then this is tantamount to not i’tikaf. Even though the purpose of i’tikaf is to stay in order to perform worship to Allah .

    Is it permissible to carry out I’tikaf at home?

    During the Covid-19 pandemic, many worship activities were recommended to be carried out at home. In fact, many performed the Tarawih and Eid prayers last year at home to avoid the possibility of contracting the Covid-19 virus.

    According to Nahdlatul Ulama, i’tikaf worship activities can be carried out at home, especially in a room set aside for prayer. Based on the views of Imam Abu Hanifah and the old opinion of Imam Syafi’i, it is permissible and valid for both men and women to perform i’tikaf in a room in the house that is devoted to prayer. (reported on https://baznas.go.id/ )

    According to his view, “If sunnah prayers are the most important thing to do at home, then i’tikaf at home should be able to be done.”

    Therefore, if Sinaumed’s wants to perform i’tikaf worship, it’s okay to do it at home, especially in a special room for prayer.

    However, if Sinaumed’s wants to perform the i’tikaf worship at the mosque, don’t forget to always pay attention to the health protocol and keep your distance .

     

     

     

    When is the appropriate time for I’tikaf?

    This i’tikaf worship can be done at any time, starting from the time it starts and ends it.

    However, it would be advisable to do it in the last ten days of Ramadan, namely during Lailatul Qadar. It was the best time.

    In fact, there is an authentic hadith regarding the best time for the i’tikaf, namely,

    “That the Prophet SAW always performed I’tikaf in the last ten days of Ramadan until Allah passed him away. Then His wives performed I’tikaf after His death.” (Narrated by al-Bukhari and Muslim from Aisyah radhiyallahu ‘anha)

    When someone performs I’tikaf in the month of Ramadan, the worship activities can be ended when the month of Ramadan ends, that is, when the sun sets on the night of ‘Eid.

    Can Women Perform I’tikaf?

    Of course you can. As the Prophet Muhammad SAW who allowed his wife to do I’tikaf. Aisyah radhiyallahu ‘anha said:

    كَانَ رَسُولُ اللَّهِ – صلى الله عليه وسلم – يَعْتَكِفُ فِى كُلِّ رَمَضَانَ ، وَإِذَا صَلَّى الْغَدَاةَ دَخَلَ مَكَانَهُ الَّذِى اعْتَكَفَ فِيهِ – قَالَ – فَاسْتَأْذَنَتْهُ عَائِشَةُ

    Which mean:

    “Rasulullah SAW used to perform I’tikaf in the month of Ramadan. When finished from the morning prayer, he entered the special place of his i’tikaf. He (Yahya bin Sa’id) said: Then Aisyah radhiyallahu ‘anha asked permission to be able to do I’tikaf with Him, so He allowed it.”

    Then, Aisyah radhiyallahu ‘anha also said that:

    كَانَ رَسُولُ اللَّهِ – صلى الله عليه وسلم – يَعْتَكِفُ فِى كُلِّ رَمَضَانَ ، وَإِذَا صَلَّى الْغَدَاةَ دَخَلَ مَكَانَهُ الَّذِى اعْتَكَفَ فِيهِ – قَالَ – فَاسْتَأْذَنَتْهُ عَائِشَةُ

    Which mean:

    “The Prophet Muhammad SAW performed I’tikaf in the last ten days of Ramadan until his death, then His wives also performed I’tikaf after His departure.”

    So, based on this hadith it is clear that women are allowed to perform i’tikaf worship, especially in mosques, with the following conditions:

    1. Have asked the husband’s permission
    2. Do not cause slander (temptation for men)

    So, women who want to carry out i’tikaf in the mosque are advised to completely cover their private parts completely and not need to use fragrances.

     

     

    Things to Avoid When I’tikaf

    I’tikaf is one of the acts of worship for Allah SWT, therefore we must keep ourselves busy doing dhikr or praying to Him for forgiveness. Well, here are some things to avoid when carrying out i’tikaf,

    • Joke with friends
    • Chatting about things that are not useful because it can disturb the concentration of other people who are carrying out i’tikaf
    • Being alone with the opposite sex
    • Sleep
    • Leaving the mosque without any urgent need

    However, if a mu’takif (person who performs i’tikaf) has an urgent need, for example wanting to relieve himself, eat, drink, seek medical treatment, of course he may leave the place of i’tikaf.

    Wisdom and Benefits of I’tikaf

    I’tikaf worship activities certainly have many lessons and benefits for those who carry them out. Especially if it is done in the last ten days of Ramadan, according to the hadith that has been explained previously.

    The wisdom of i’tikaf is to revive the sunnah of Rasulullah SAW and revive the heart of mu’takif by always carrying out obedience and worship to Allah SWT.

    Meanwhile, the benefits of i’tikaf activities include:

    • Bringing peace, serenity, and light that illuminates the heart.
    • Bringing various kinds of goodness from Allah SWT.
    • To reflect on the past and think about things to do tomorrow.
    • Free from sins (if done on Lailatul Qadar)
    • Get mercy from Allah SWT.
    • Become a person who is loved by SWT.

    Well, that’s an explanation of i’tikaf worship. Soon, the month of Ramadan will come. As good Muslims, let’s intend to carry out this i’tikaf worship so that our practices can be accepted by Allah SWT later in the last day…

    Book Recommendations & Related Articles

    Source:

    Shaykh Abdullah bin Abdur Rahman Al-Jibrin. Fiqh I’tikaf: The Law and Its Virtue . Al-Sofwa Foundation.

    https://baznas.go.id/

  • What Is Integrity? This is the full explanation

    What Is Integrity? – Does Sinaumed’s know what integrity is? The word integrity may often be heard by Sinaumed’s as an action, behavior or attitude that a person needs to have in the world of work or a principle of life. Simply put, integrity is honesty which is a principle and is always upheld.

    Basically, integrity needs to be owned by everyone as a form of responsibility, both for tasks, work, or daily activities.

    To fully understand what integrity is, Sinaumed’s can refer to this article which discusses the meaning, characteristics, examples, and ways to apply integrity, both in the world of work and in the principles of one’s life:

    What Is Integrity?

    • A firm attitude not wanting corruption, sticking to principles, and being the basis for relating to oneself as a moral value
    • Qualities, traits, or conditions that indicate a unified whole have the potential and ability to radiate authority, authority, and honesty

    Honesty in this case is not just words, rhetorical sweeteners, but also actions. If it starts with honesty, credibility, and many other noble qualities, then these are the characters that leaders really need now and forever. This noble character will of course lead to the human chosen by Al Mustafa Muhammad SAW as the perfecter of human character.

    One form of personal integration is to look confident and elegant and not be easily swayed by something just to pass on a moment of excitement or pleasure. Someone who is sincere is more successful when they are a leader, whether formal or informal.

    Dr. Kenneth Boa, president of Reflections Ministry in Atlanta, describes integrity as the opposite of hypocrisy. He said the hypocrite is less qualified to lead others than his higher personality. Honesty is necessary for everyone, not just leaders, but those who are mentored. People want assurance that their leader can be trusted to become their follower.

    Sinaumed’s definitely believes that leaders must take the interests of every team member seriously and leaders must believe that their team members take their responsibilities seriously. Managers and leaders alike want to know they keep their promises and never lose those commitments.

    People who live in good faith are willing or unable to undermine the trust of those who trust them. It is a sign of integrity with a form of taking responsibility even when the person feels bad to say it.

    Integrity has more to do with “heart”, the ability to exercise conscience, including honesty, sincerity, and dedication. Integrity is built on three key elements, namely the value of leadership, coherence and commitment. These values ​​are the guidelines that managers need in the field.

    This integrity becomes stronger when a leader is consistent between what is said and what is done (carries out his words) and is committed to it. Without integrity, we will lose trust because others stay away from us to avoid disappointment. Integrity is the practice of being honest and demonstrating consistent and uncompromising adherence to strong principles, moral values ​​and ethics.

    Integrity does not change and is unwavering in supporting one’s noble values ​​and beliefs. Another definition of what integrity is is a concept related to coherence between behavior and values ​​and principles. In ethics, integrity is defined as honesty and accuracy or correctness of one’s actions. The opposite of integrity is hypocrisy (hypocrisy or hypocrisy).

    When people’s actions conform to the values, beliefs, and principles they teach, they are said to have integrity. Simply put, the quality of a sincere person is only shown by words and actions, not by those who can’t keep their words. A sincere person is not one who has many faces and looks adapted to his personal motivations and interests.

    Integrity is an important personal for leaders. Sincere managers win the trust of employees. Genuine managers are trusted because what they say is what they do. To understand what integrity is more broadly, Sinaumed’s can also pay attention to the meaning of integrity according to the following experts:

    • According to Henry Cloud, integrity is someone who is fully integrated in every part of himself, works well, and cannot be separated from carrying out functions according to what has been previously designed. Integrity is closely related to the wholeness and effectiveness of a person as a person.
    • According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary, the term integrity is a unified whole of qualities, characteristics and conditions with the potential and ability to radiate authority and integrity.
    • According to Ippho Santosa, integrity is often defined as a combination of thoughts, words and actions that create reputation and trust. When referring to the origin of the word, the word perfection means speaking in full and complete.
    • According to Andreas Harefa, integrity are three observable keys. It’s about showing honesty, fulfilling obligations, and doing things consistently.
    • Stephen R. Covey distinguishes between integrity and honesty. “honesty is telling the truth, in other words, conforming our words reality-integrity is conforming to our words, in other words, keeping promises and fulfilling expectations.”  Honesty means telling the truth, and our words correspond to reality. Honesty proves that what he does is what he says. People who have integrity and are honest are independent people. They show their credibility as responsible and loyal people. According to
    • According to Jacobs (2004), integrity emphasizes moral immutability, personal honesty, or honesty.
    • According to Butler and Cantrell (1984, Hosmer, 1995), integrity is defined as a credible and honest reputation of those who define the term “trust” in an organizational context.

    Characteristics of People with Integrity

    1. People who have no particular guise or purpose other than what is shown
    2. People who behave according to what they say
    3. People who are the same in nature and behavior in front and behind
    4. Have consistency between what is believed and behavior
    5. People who are consistent between the values ​​of life that are adopted and the life that is carried out

    In fact, the term integrity is rarely used in everyday life, because not everyone knows and understands the meaning of integrity in more detail. The word integrity is used in everyday life because it refers to a person’s attitude and character. A person is said to have integrity if he has the following personality and character traits:

    • Trustworthy and honest
    • Have a commitment
    • Responsible
    • Keeps his word
    • Loyal
    • Appreciate time
    • Have the principle of being loyal to the values ​​of life

    Examples of Forms of Integrity

    There are five habits or examples of forms of integrity that everyone should have, especially for those who seek high integrity in their lives. These five habits are examples of an attitude of integrity. People have strong integrity when they practice five habits such as the following:

    1. Always Arrive on Time

    First and foremost, always make a habit of showing up on time. This attitude is related to our high commitment and time, because arriving on time means respecting the time we have and the time that others have.

    This attitude will further convince the people around us that we are credible individuals because we live in good faith. On the other hand, when we are often late, other people don’t really respect us.

    Just don’t value their time why can’t they. Do we still deserve the respect of others? Not only does our respect diminish, but our internal trust is lost. Therefore, from now on, practice and apply this habit all the time.

    2. Clarifying Commitments We Cannot Make

    Integrity includes the commitment and tenacity we have for something. That’s why everything that can’t be done from the start, that can be inconsistent with the values ​​and principles of life needs to be avoided. When Sinaumed’s started by saying this, the people around us became even more convinced that we were noble. Why? This is because one adheres to one’s current values ​​in all circumstances, at any time, anywhere.

    3. Clarify Actions And Notes Written At The End Of Each Meeting

    It’s important to clarify. The goal is for what we understand and record to be consistent with what others think in the meeting. One of the main reasons things get overlooked in meetings is because no one is on hand to organize everything, be it the key points or the final agreement of the meeting.

    For example, the recipient doesn’t know exactly what the other party wants in the meeting. Of course, this jeopardized his position. Because if he can’t achieve what he wants, he loses the trust of customers and other stakeholders. Building integrity can be achieved by good practice in clarifying the issues and actions discussed and communicating them clearly at the end of the meeting.

    4. Always Fulfilling Given Responsibilities

    People with great integrity always try to fulfill their responsibilities. In addition, they strive to achieve the best results without holding others to account. So, if Sinaumed’s really wants high integrity, start by using good habits to fulfill all existing responsibilities. The name of the responsibility must be written carefully, whether the responsibility is small or large.

    5. Don’t Let Stress Control Integrity

    Stress and pressure often makes people feel awkward and cut corners by undermining their integrity. For example, a former employee of XYZ company is a very sincere person. But due to situations that make his job difficult and almost hopeless, he does something that violates the law.

    If he commits a business-damaging offense, he indirectly destroys his integrity. So it’s stress that triggers us to take a deep breath and do our best. Don’t let stress destroy the self-integrity we had before.

    How to Establish Integrity

    1. Give a Detailed Explanation of What Integrity Means in the Workplace

    Career advice for Sinaumed’s who are executives, leaders or business owners who really want their employees to be honest, the first thing that needs to be done is to explain what integrity really means in a company. With a clear and detailed definition of integrity, team members or employees will understand what the company expects from them.

    Especially in terms of honesty and transparency. In this regard, it is necessary to establish a set of ethical standards for employees and apply their work ethics collectively.

    2. Create an open and transparent work environment

    By creating an open and transparent work environment, employees are more comfortable because they can freely discuss various topics without fear of violating the law. Through transparent discussion of topics, employees feel that their presence in the company is valued and recognized. This makes it even more difficult to do what is best for the company and maintain integrity.

    3. It Is Important To Lead By Example

    Unfortunately, there are still many managers who only develop a work ethic that must be obeyed by employees, but they themselves do not act according to the prevailing work ethic. In this case, the leader must be able to set an example and meet the company’s expectations. In other words, it’s not just employees who need to maintain integrity. But managers must do the same. Sinaumed’s needs to pay attention to what the boss says and implement it.

    4. Implement Regular Self-Integrity Assessments

    This fourth method requires employees to provide feedback to themselves. For example, how does Sinaumed’s rate its performance in the last few weeks or months? Encourage employees to reflect and evaluate their performance so they can see what they are lacking in their performance. In this way, employees become honest with themselves and have integrity.

    5. Be Consistent With Employees About Integrity In The Workplace

    In this case, Sinaumed’s must consistently adhere to the expected work ethic and show appreciation or gratitude to employees who act accordingly. However, if an employee violates it, we must also take steps to correct the violation. For example warnings and sanctions.

    Benefits of Integrity

    1. Benefits of Physical Integrity can make a person healthy and fit. In this state, a person can start daily activities and work properly
    2. Benefits of Intellectual Integrity can optimize brain performance to think more strategically in making decisions based on many considerations
    3. Benefits of Emotional Integrity can fill a person with a high sense of solidarity in motivation, empathy, and work interactions
    4. The Benefits of Mental Integrity make a person smarter in interpreting things, including life experiences, as successes and failures that have been experienced.
    5. Benefits of Social Integrity is the ability to develop relationships between individuals and society. Collaborate with someone to do a task or activity that requires cohesion and collaboration

    Well, that’s an explanation of what integrity is. Does Sinaumed’s feel that he has integrity, both in the world of work and in his daily activities? Integrity is something that can be formed and learned, so we can strive to form that integrity for the good of life and responsibility for our duties and work.

    You can visit sinaumedia’s collection of books about integrity at www.sinaumedia.com for Sinaumed’s , such as the following book recommendations: Enjoy studying. #Friends Without Limits.

    • 16 Tips To Be More Respected By Others
    • 12 Tips for Studying Online to Stay Effective
    • 8 Tips for Saving for the Most Powerful Student
    • Tips for Establishing Effective Communication and Book References
    • 4 Reasons Millennials Deserve to Be Great Leaders
  • What is Inner Beauty? This Explanation and How to Maximize It

    Inner Beauty is – For women or even men, beauty doesn’t always have to look at the physical, but can also be seen through beauty from within. Beauty from within is better known by many people with the term inner beauty . However, not everyone understands further what inner beauty is . For those of you who want to know what inner beauty is and how to exude it, then you can refer to this article, Sinaumed’s.

    Definition of Inner Beauty

    Beauty is not only about physical because true physical beauty will fade over time. There is something more eternal than that, namely beauty from within or inner beauty . Almost everyone in this world must have heard what inner beauty is and know how to get it.

    But unfortunately, not everyone knows about the true meaning behind the word inner beauty they say. Generally, they only know that inner beauty is only the inner beauty that will be seen if they help others.

    Everyone, both women and men certainly have it, but not all of them can exude inner beauty. To be able to achieve it, understand its meaning so that your inner beauty shines even more. As we know, inner beauty is true beauty and is a gift possessed by women since they were born into the world.

    A research journal entitled Inner Beauty The Friendship Hypothesis by DR Lisa Schmalz, reveals several theories from philosophers about what inner beauty is .

    Plato thought that inner beauty defines a beautiful person because of their good morals.

    Whereas for other philosophers such as Reid or Gaut, inner beauty is not only about moral goodness but is also closely related to one’s intelligence, sense of humor, and optimism.

    Schmalz Ride in his journal mentions several other variables to be able to define inner beauty .

    Indeed, inner beauty is closely related to one’s morals, but the intention behind it also determines inner beauty itself.

    Immanuel Kant, a German philosopher argues that a person has good morals just because he wants to look beautiful and does not sincerely do so, then that person is not a person who has inner beauty .

    So, it’s only natural that these philosophers have different opinions regarding the definition of one’s inner beauty . If you look at the current era, the conclusions in the journal can be a reference for determining what inner beauty is. Today’s society considers neutral inner beauty to come from morals and prioritizes intelligence and a positive self-image.

    A more modern approach often associates inner beauty with the expression “Beauty is in the eye of the beholder” which means that beauty, including inner beauty, is subjective. The reason is that what one person considers beautiful may not necessarily be that of another. This can be because the variables to measure beauty from within are very broad.

    In other words, every woman must have inner beauty . But the problem is, sometimes they are not able to radiate the inner beauty they have. One reason is there is no sincerity to bring it up. Therefore, when many people say that a woman will be able to have inner beauty when she does good to others.

    In fact, not necessarily, because all these good deeds will mean nothing if they are done without sincerity, continuously until they eventually become a habit. One of the keys to bringing out inner beauty is to do good.

    Doing good itself is very broad in scope. Not only have to provide assistance in the form of wealth only. Saying good morning, comforting people who are sad, helping grandmothers who are crossing the road and saying thank you are also good deeds that radiate your inner beauty .

    If so far you have been doing good to others and want to know whether your inner beauty has appeared or not, there is a simple way to find out. First, take paper, then make the following questions:

    1. How many people do you know who routinely say good morning with a sweet smile every day?
    2. How many people do not hesitate to ask you for help when they are having trouble?
    3. How many people are willing to put up their bodies to defend you voluntarily when you are in trouble?
    4. How many people miss you when you’re not with them?
    5. How many people worry about you when you suddenly don’t show up on time?
    6. How many people immediately come to visit, worry, and are sad when they hear that you are sick or have been hit by a disaster?

    How To Radiate Inner Beauty

    How to radiate inner beauty turns out to be very easy for women to do. Inner beauty or what is often known as beauty from within is real and you can prove it.

    One thing you need to build is the quality of yourself. Actually, every woman must have her own inner beauty . However, you need to improve even better from now on so that you can shine more and make many men attracted to you because of your strong inner beauty charm. How to Radiate Inner Beauty , including:

    1. Can Control Emotions

    The first way for women to radiate beauty from within is to easily control their emotions. This one method is proven to emit a positive aura that is good for other people. Therefore, other people will indirectly appreciate and respect you.

    2. Cheap smile

    Smiling is a way of enhancing the most powerful inner beauty . Smiling can make you calmer and think positively. In one study, people who smiled while performing a stressful task felt more positive afterward than those who didn’t show any expression.

    Whoever you meet will definitely be comfortable and positive when you try to build an attitude by smiling. Not only is it useful for others, by smiling, your life will also be much more beautiful than the previous flat days .

    So, even if you are having problems, be strong and try to smile.

    3. Laugh

    Research shows that laughter can reduce stress, anxiety, and depression. It can also improve mood and make our burdens feel less heavy. Laugh more by watching funny videos, comedy films, or making jokes with children.

    4. Open Minded

    The way to emit a strong inner beauty is to always have an open mind. It will indirectly build a positive aura within you and that way you will be appreciated by others.

    5. Be Kind To Yourself

    The next way to improve and enhance inner beauty is to be kind to yourself. In this way, you will have good self-confidence. This can be a provision for you to build good inner beauty .

    Focus on the qualities within you. It can help find meaning about the pleasures and satisfactions of life.

    Someone who is always happy can give positive value to their environment as well. So find out what fuels your desire, the real desire. Open yourself to feel love and affection from others for a more meaningful life.

    It’s not an easy thing to dig into the quality of yourself. If you’re still confused, it’s fine to seek inspiration from people you admire or respect. Try to think of the people who had the most memorable personalities no matter what they looked like. Write down what traits and behaviors they have done to make them amazing people.

    You can try to practice it on a daily basis as long as it doesn’t conflict with your values ​​and character.

    6. Give Support and Praise to Others

    The fifth way to increase inner beauty is to give support and praise to others. Although few people are aware of this, this method is supposed to increase inner beauty for you women. Because, in this way you indirectly emit a positive aura.

    7. Confident

    The sixth way to increase inner beauty is to be confident. Strong self-confidence makes women very special in front of men. Therefore, women are required to always be confident so that their inner beauty will shine continuously.

    8. Easy to Communicate

    The seventh way to radiate inner beauty is easy communication. This is because communication can build friendship, bonds and relationships with other people and attract the opposite sex.

    9. Exercise Routine

    It is undeniable that in enhancing inner beauty, it is not only beauty from within that is built, but external beauty as well. One of the ways that must be built is by exercising. Therefore, exercise regularly so that the body and soul are always healthy.

    10. Having a Strong Establishment But Still Respecting Others

    The ninth way to radiate inner beauty is by having a strong stance but still respecting others. Indeed, for some men to see women with strong convictions is a good plus. But if a woman can’t respect other people then it can make her ilfil .

    By still respecting other people, believe me, all the men who are close to you will be amazed and clamored to the seventh heaven.

    11. Be Kind To Everyone

    In radiating inner beauty, the next thing is to do good to everyone. Because, by doing good will automatically make your beauty shine. Indeed, this point few people realize. However, it could be that the people you have helped think of me as an angel without wings.

    Doing good can open minds about other people. Sometimes, we may only see people by their appearance and immediately have negative thoughts about them.

    In fact, we do not know what is in his heart. Therefore, doing good will change the mind to be more positive. In addition, we can also respect and respect others more.

    12.Self Care

    Taking good care of yourself is a way of radiating inner beauty . There are many ways to do self care , starting from eating a healthy balanced diet, drinking water, and getting enough sleep. Avoid stress to emit positive aura yourself.

     

     

    13. Be grateful

    The next way to radiate inner beauty is to be grateful. Some people often compare themselves with other people whose lives look happier. Things can make him jealous, jealous, low self-esteem, and his mind becomes chaotic.

    Therefore, make it a habit to be grateful so that your thoughts stay positive and life feels more meaningful. We can be grateful for whatever we have, whether family, friends, work, or other things that make us happy.

    Your mind is a powerful thing. The brain is literally wired to focus more on the negatives than the positives. Practicing gratitude can help rewire your brain to focus more on what is good in life.

    14. Positive Thinking

    A person can be a bad critic of himself. Over time, this can cause us to form negative opinions about ourselves that will be hard to shake off.

    Therefore, it is necessary to stop this, we must speak positive things to ourselves. Learning to think positively is like strengthening muscles. Because, the more often you use it, the stronger the mind is. One way to think positively that we have to do, is to develop optimism .

    When we have a sense of optimism, we will not be afraid of failure and see things positively. However, we also shouldn’t be overly optimistic because it will end up being overly confident.

    Research shows that small changes in the way we talk to ourselves can impact our ability to regulate our feelings, thoughts, and behavior when under stress. Avoid blaming yourself.

    Positive thinking has many health benefits. To always think positively, try the following ways:

    Write down three things you like about yourself that have nothing to do with physical appearance.

    Positive thoughts change the way the nerves in the brain work so they can help you see yourself in a different light.

    Practice looking at yourself in the mirror, smiling often, and praising the qualities you have. Acknowledge all parts of yourself, for example acknowledging that you are friendly, kind, smiling, easy to empathize with, and so on.

    Get used to standing straight, forming good posture on the body can project self-confidence. Self-confidence can make other people feel respected and will help you love yourself more easily.

    15. Be Yourself

    Many people who are recognized as having inner beauty are actually far from perfect. One thing that really stands out about them is that they feel comfortable being themselves and try to live as best they can every day. So, from now on focus on the present, not the past. Enrich yourself with new experiences and become more flexible.

    About yourself so you can grow to be a better human being. Embrace every emotion you feel in the process. Those are the things that will make you authentic. Having inner and outer beauty is about being fully human. Formulating yourself in harmony and balance in life in the present is the way to achieve it.

    True inner beauty will shine when what you feel and do is aligned with your life goals, and most importantly, be who you really are.

    It’s easy for other people to accept someone for who they are, life will be easier when we are honest with ourselves. Inner beauty must also be accompanied by a healthy body. Maintaining health by consuming nutritious food, drinking water and exercising can help reveal your inner beauty.

    16. Rest

    Everyone certainly needs to rest to calm himself down. Rest can refresh your mind, so you can think clearly and positively. Not only that, resting can also get rid of the anxiety and worry that we feel.

    17. Eliminate Drama

    When we feel down, we may feel that our life is the saddest thing in the world. Though maybe the reality is not that bad. Dramatizing life will only make life even more sad and the mind becomes full of chaos. Therefore, if you want to think positively, stay away from such dramatic thoughts.

    When hanging out with other people, we can be influenced and follow their habits. Likewise, when hanging out with positive people, positive things will be contagious.

    Being around positive people has been shown to increase self-esteem and the chances of achieving goals. Therefore, associate with people who can bring us on the good side.

    Those are some ways to radiate inner beauty that you can apply. So, from now on, start trying to do inner beauty in order to make life more peaceful.

    Sinaumed’s can get more information about inner beauty by reading books available at sinaumedia.com . As #FriendsWithoutLimits we always try to give the best. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information .

    Author: Yufi Cantika Sukma Divine

    Also read:

  • What is Imsak? Along With The Meaning And Explanation About Imsak

    What is Imsak? Along With The Meaning And Explanation About Imsak

    What is Imsak? – Every Muslim will certainly know the name of the imsakiyah schedule during the fasting month. Where the imsakiyah schedule contains information on the five daily prayers, the start time of fasting, and the hours of breaking the fast during Ramadan. The schedule is published both online and offline, so it will be easy for anyone to get it.

    For Muslim communities in Indonesia, the imsakiyah schedule is a very important requirement. Because, this schedule makes it very easy for us to fast in the month of Ramadan. However, sometimes the imsakiyah schedule spread throughout Indonesia has a slight difference in time, from one region to another.

    This sometimes makes people feel confused about which schedule to follow. So, in the midst of the dispute at that time, most Muslims probably did not understand what imsak was. To find out more deeply, in the following we will discuss the meaning and history of the imsak itself.

    A. Definition of Imsak

    Imsak is the time which is considered as one of the markers that fasting time has begun. Imsak itself is only in the month of Ramadan. Therefore, imsak is used as a reminder that the meal time has ended. If you quote from hadiths or other Islamic teachings, in fact there are still many people who misunderstand imsak. Because, imsak is considered as a marker of the start of fasting time.

    In fact, imsak is not in Islamic teachings. So it is just a term used to help us remember that one can still eat for a few more minutes before Fajr arrives. So, most of the imsakiyah schedules scattered throughout Indonesia contain a difference between the time of imsak and dawn of about 5 to 10 minutes. This is very reasonable because it depends on the region and also the clergy.

    As for the provisions stating that Muslims are still allowed to eat or drink the meal at the time of imsak, there are several arguments. One of the arguments that discuss this is:

    “If one of you hears the call to prayer, while he is still holding the plate (food), then he should not put it down until he has finished eating it,” HR. Imam Ahmad, Abu Dawud, Hakim and has been authenticated by Adz Dzahabi.

    Apart from that, Imam Al-Mawardi also stated in his Iqna’ book, namely:

    وزمان الصّيام من طُلُوع الْفجْر الثَّانِي إِلَى غرُوب الشَّمْس لَكِن عَلَيْهِ تَقْدِيم الامساك يَسِيرا قبل طُلُوع الْفجْر وَتَأْخِير (الْفطر) يَسِيرا بعد غرُوب الشَّمْس ليصير مُسْتَوْفيا لامساكمَا بَينهمَا

    “The time of fasting is from the rising of the second dawn to the setting of the sun. But (it would be better if) the fasting person makes imsak (abstaining from eating and drinking) a little earlier before dawn and delays breaking his fast for a while after the sun sets so that he completes imsak (refraining from breaking the fast) between the two.” (See Ali bin Muhammad Al-Mawardi, Al-Iqnaa’ [Tehran: Dar Ihsan, 1420 H] p. 74).

    In this way, it is clear that people who are having sahur are still allowed to eat and drink sahur when the time for imsak arrives until dawn and also the morning call to prayer. However, it would be better if we ended eating or drinking at the time of imsak. This is intended so that our eating and drinking are not done in a hurry and immediately carry out the morning prayer service in peace.

    B. History of Imsak

    The term imsak comes from Arabic which according to Wassim Afifi means fasting. The term imsak was first introduced in Egypt in the month of Ramadan in 1262 H. Whereas in the Christian calendar it occurred in September 1846 AD. This started from the art of writing and also modern publishing in Egypt. Before entering 1798 AD, Egypt did not really realize that scientific developments until the French population became an early advance in knowledge of modern writing. Although Al-Azhar was attacked during the French occupation, these residents also formed the Center for Science in Egypt. Then France started printing the first which contained the imsakiyah schedule.

    The imsakiyah schedule was printed for the first time in a media called Bulaq and known as Imsakiyah Wali Al-Nu’man. Where the schedule is printed on yellow paper measuring 27 cm 17 cm. At that time, the imsakiyah schedule contained the first day of Ramadan which fell on Monday and the Sabii month could be observed very clearly in the South for 35 minutes. The printed media also included Muhammad Ali Pasha, a historical figure of the Ottoman Empire. The Imsakiyah schedule also contains the hours of prayer and fasting every day according to the Arabic calendar. Then, the schedule is distributed to all government offices and disseminates it widely to every employee in the company.

    During 1920 to 1940, the imsakiyah schedule for the month of Ramadan was then printed or published for several purposes. Initially, the imsakiyah schedule was used as an advertising medium to be distributed by the printers of the Egyptian Renaissance Statue which at that time still belonged to Mahmoud Khalil Ibrahim, in the month of Ramadan 1347 H or around February 1929 AD Even in that year, the imsakiyah was also printed as an official announcement in the form of a very neat book. Then, a Jewish businessman named Daoud Adas uses the imsak schedule as a decoration material in his shops during the month of Ramadan.

    At that time, print media containing imsakiyah schedules were valued quite expensive because these schedules included various kinds of information related to fasting, Islam, virtues, and to advertise a commercial product. The imsakiyah schedule printed by Daoud Ada is an inspiration regarding various kinds of Ramadan information, but still easy to understand.

    Then in 1356 H or around 1937 AD, the imsakiyah schedule also contained fasting information, verses from the Koran, prayers, morning and evening readings, daily fasting schedule, and information about zakat fitrah. The distribution of the imsakiyah schedule was distributed to people who were passing and passing by. Since then, the imsakiyah schedule has always experienced a status development and has become a very important requirement when the month of Ramadan arrives, including in Indonesia. Currently, the imsakiyah schedule is used so that Muslims are even more careful when they want to eat food when dawn approaches dawn.

    C. Imsak Age of the Prophet Muhammad SAW

    According to Ustadz Abdul Somad, at the time of the Prophet the term imsak did not yet exist. Imsak just appeared during the Shafi’i school. At that time, imsak was a yellow light that was used as a sign that one should be prepared to stop eating sahur. However, if someone just wakes up at the time of imsak, then they can still eat and drink sahur until the sound of the dawn call to prayer. When the dawn call to prayer is sounded, eating and drinking activities must also be stopped and the mouth must be cleaned as soon as possible. This is to ensure that there are no more food residue left in the mouth and can break the fast.

    Meanwhile, according to Nabawi’s guidance, the concept of imsak itself is considered to have existed since the time of the Prophet, even though it was not mentioned directly or used a special term.

    Al-Bukhari, Muslim, al-Tirmidhi, Nasa’i, Ibn Majah and Ahmad narrated through Anas bin Malik from Zaid bin Thabit:

    عن زيد بن ثابت رضي الله عنه قال : تَسَحَّرْنَا مَعَ النَّبِيِّ صَلَّى اللهُ عَلَيْهِ وَسَلَّمَ ثُمَّ قَامَ إِلَى الصَّلَاةِ قُلْتُ كَمْ كَانَ بَيْنَ الأَذَانِ وَالسُّحُوْرِ ؟ قَالَ قَدْرُ خَمْسِيْنَ آيَةً

    Zaid bin Thabit’s friend ra narrated, “we used to have breakfast with the Prophet, then for a while he prayed at dawn”.

    Anas bin Malik asked, “how much time is there between the call to prayer and sahur?”

    “About the span of reading 50 verses,” replied Zaid bin Thabit.

    The time lag, which is almost the same as the reading of 50 verses, between the pre-dawn meal and the dawn call to prayer is one of the proofs that the imsak already exists but is more practically understood, namely about the separation of the distance from the start of fasting, namely at dawn and the pre-dawn meal. Meanwhile, this is in line with the explanation given by Ustadz Abdul Somad that the imsak does not act as a red light, which means you are not allowed to eat or drink at all.

    Ustadz Abdul Somad also said that in Middle Eastern countries, like Morocco, there is no term imsak. So that Moroccan Muslims will stop eating and drinking the meal right when the dawn call to prayer is sounded. However, the imsak time is indeed recommended to be carried out for the good of Muslims themselves.

    D. Imsak in Indonesia

    In Indonesia itself, the time for imsak is usually marked by the sound of sirens or the recitation of holy verses from the Koran and certain sounds coming from mosques. Where it will be done before dawn arrives. In fact, we cannot find this phenomenon in any other country, apart from Indonesia.

    Indonesian clerics themselves stipulate that the time of imsak is used as a reminder that the dawn call to prayer is near. It would be better for Muslims to immediately use this time to clean their mouths, brush their teeth, take a shower, and prepare to immediately perform the morning prayers.

    The imsak time that we often read in the imsakiyah schedule is the time made by the ulama in Indonesia by adjusting the applicable rules. That is what is considered as a creativity of Indonesian scholars. Where it becomes a form of attention from the scholars.

    Because of the affection of the Ulama for Muslims in Indonesia, they set the time of imsak to serve as a benchmark in facilitating the time of fasting in the month of Ramadan. In this situation a Muslim who performs the imsak schedule earlier, for example 10 to 15 minutes before the dawn call to prayer is sounded is a form of prevention.

    However, because it is not obligatory, anyone is allowed to follow the imsak schedule or have their own choice in carrying out Ramadan fasting. However, surely whatever we do must be in accordance with the rules of fasting which have been explained in the Al-Quran and hadith.

    As for the provisions of fasting which is one of the main references for starting fasting, namely in the letter Al-Baqarah verse 187, the following is the meaning:

    “Eat and drink until it becomes clear to you the difference between the white thread and the black thread, namely dawn” (Al-Baqarah: 187)

    The word “dawn” in the letter above is actually still confusing or ambiguous and vague. But, through a hadith from HR. Ahmad & al-Hakim from Abdullah bin Abbas, revealed that dawn can be interpreted into two, namely false dawn and genuine dawn. What is meant by false dawn is that it is still permissible to eat and drink and it is not permissible to pray at dawn. That’s what we know as imsak. As for the original dawn, it is no longer allowed to eat or drink and it is permissible to perform the dawn prayer.

    Therefore, ending eating and also drinking at dawn until it’s really before dawn is one of the things we should do. Because after all, it takes time to prepare to perform the morning prayer service. Usually, the imsak time in Indonesia has a time difference of around 10 to 15 minutes.

    Meanwhile, on other continents, it is possible that the imsak schedule is not stated explicitly. But generally they will share prayer schedules during the month of Ramadan with different time differences. This is based on data sources from certain astronomy which are intended to be used as a reference or guide for Muslims in carrying out fasting at the time deemed appropriate.

    That way, the imsak schedule is very useful to minimize the confusion that arises when someone is enjoying a meal, but doesn’t know when dawn will arrive. Therefore, imsak will make our fasting worship safer and more orderly. That way, we will be better prepared physically and mentally in fasting.

  • What Is Impulsive? Recognize Behavior, Causes and Find Solutions!

    Impulsivity – We often buy things or do things. And this is usually considered as an impulsive act. However, being impulsive isn’t that simple. Impulsivity is more complex than that. It is broader than just buying an item or making massive or many transactions in a short time.

    Here we will discuss impulsivity. Sinaumed’s can listen to the explanation below which has been summarized from various pages on the internet.

    Impulsive Concept

    Impulsivity is an attitude when someone does an action without thinking about the consequences. This is generally done by children. Although, it is not uncommon to find it in adults as well. This behavior can also be defined as a condition when a person performs an action without thinking long or thinking about the consequences.

    For example, when opening an online shop , Sinaumed’s will buy things that are not really needed. For example, sandals or shoes even though the footwear that is owned is still there and suitable for use. Or buy clothes with the latest models so you don’t miss the trend. Even though the clothes that are owned are still very decent to wear.

    Launching from the katadata.co.id page, a journal article entitled “Impulse Control Disorders: Updated Review of Clinical Characteristics and Pharmacological Management” is usually experienced by adolescents up to the age of 30. Approximately 80-95% of sufferers consist of women.

    Someone who has this disorder can be seen from his behavior. For example, rash, unstable, unpredictable, poor self-control , and often interrupts others. Not infrequently, a person acts quickly, without considering the consequences of his actions. It’s not uncommon for impulsivity to be a sign of an impulse control disorder or other mental health disorder.

    This action is not entirely bad. It is needed at certain times. For example when facing stress or a crisis that requires a quick response. Then this impulsive attitude is very necessary.

    However, impulsiveness should be watched out for if it occurs repeatedly. It becomes part of a person’s personality or harms oneself and others. It could be, this action is a symptom of another mental disorder.

    Sinaumed’s can go deeper into the personality psychology of each person so that it helps to identify yourself and find the right treatment when impulsive actions occur to yourself or those closest to you. The book “Psychology of Personality” by Sumadi Suryabrata which generally contains personality classifications based on the methods used, the personality components used as a foundation, and the approach. From these three basic classifications, various personality psychology emerged, such as Kant’s typology, Psychoanalytic Theory, Spranger’s Theory, Ludwig Klages’ Personality Theory, Biosocial Theory, and many more.

     

    Impulsive Symptoms

    Impulsive behavior can harm mental health if it occurs continuously. The following are symptoms of impulsivity—which have been summarized from various sources—that Sinaumed’s should know about.

    • Happy to spend money on things that are not too important.
    • Hurt yourself when you feel direction, disappointed, and sad.
    • Easily offended or angry even for no reason.
    • Engage in risky sexual activity.
    • Explosive emotions when angry to the point of destroying things.
    • Releasing excess emotions.
    • Change or cancel plans suddenly.
    • Wasting too much money.
    • Suddenly quit work.
    • Emotions often explode.
    • Too many apologies.
    • Incapable of taking criticism.
    • Bringe eating (eating or drinking excessively).
    • Threatening to hurt others.
    • hurt yourself.
    • Indulge too much in certain things, such as shopping and eating.
    • Difficulty focusing.
    • Many start something.
    • Exaggerating small problems.
    • Scream when feeling stressed.
    • Many start something

    Impulsive Causes

    Launching from the Sehatq.com page, this behavior is normal for children or adolescents. This is because their brains are still developing, so impulsive behavior is not necessarily a sign of trouble.

    The causes of impulsive behavior are not known with certainty. However, it is associated with the hypothalamus and hippocampus brain regions. The hippocampus itself takes an active role in memory, emotion , and learning. Meanwhile, the hypothalamus has a role as a mood regulator and function of human behavior.

    When the researchers conducted their research by increasing or decreasing traffic between the hypothalamus and ventral hippocampus in the brains of rats. The same effect appears, namely an increase in impulsive behavior. On the other hand, genetic factors are also considered to have an important role.

    However, impulsive behavior can also be a sign of various conditions as follows.

    1. Attention Deficit Disorder (ADHD)

    Impulsivity can be a sign that someone has attention deficit disorder (ADHD). Someone who experiences attention deficit disorder often shows impulsive behavior by disturbing other people who are talking, having difficulty waiting for their turn while in line, and/or shouting out answers to a question.

    2. Bipolar Disorder

    Bipolar disorder can affect mood, energy levels, and ability to carry out daily activities. When impulsive behavior appears in someone who has bipolar disorder, he is able to spend or spend money in extreme ways and even abuse certain substances.

    3. Antisocial Personality Disorder

    Antisocial personality disorder can make a person unable to pay attention to right and wrong. As well as treating other people badly without thinking about the consequences. Impulsive behavior related to this condition is the abuse of certain substances or other dangerous actions. 

    Adolescence is a period of transition and often performs impulsive actions. The book “Psychology of Adolescents” by Sarlito W. Sarwono can be an option for parents or adults closest to adolescents to recognize the psychological conditions experienced by adolescents. In general, this book is about adolescence which is a transitional period from child to adult.

    Dealing with teenagers is not an easy job. To understand the soul of adolescents and find appropriate solutions to their problems, it is important for us to understand adolescents and their psychological development, namely self-concept, intelligence, emotion, sexuality, social, moral and religious motives. The study in this book regarding adolescent psychology in terms of the theoretical aspect of physical and psychological development of adolescents, as well as behavior and juvenile delinquency/delinquency can provide an important reference for students, educators, consultants and officials who are involved in adolescent problems, and no less important are people. old.

     

    How to Deal with Impulsivity

    Impulsive behavior can be handled or suppressed. Summarizing from the hellosehat.com page, here’s how to deal with impulsive behavior that occurs in someone.

    1. Use of Drugs

    When Sinaumed’s consults with a psychiatrist, medication will be prescribed to treat the mental health disorder he is experiencing. Here are some drug choices that are usually used to treat impulsive behavior.

    • Atypical neuroleptics
    • Anti-epileptic drug
    • Antidepressants are usually used to treat depression
    • Glutamatergic agents
    • Mood stabilizers, including those used to treat bonderline personality disorder.

    2. Psychological Therapy

    If it is felt that impulsive behavior is interfering with activities or daily life, Sinaumed’s needs to consult a psychologist or a psychiatrist. One option of psychotherapy that can be done is cognitive behavioral therapy (CBT).

    In therapy, Sinaumed’s will be assisted to determine the triggers of frequent impulsive actions. In addition, Sinaumed’s will also be assisted to strategize in managing responses to these triggers in the future.

    Apart from CBT, Sinaumed’s can also do various other groups, such as group therapy which are usually quite effective for dealing with certain habits. When doing therapy, Sinaumed’s will usually be invited to discuss each other’s conditions with several people.

    This method makes Sinaumed’s not feel alone in dealing with this habit. Not only that, in this therapy, Sinaumed’s will be accompanied by professional experts who assist the discussion so that the therapy goes on smoothly.

    Another therapy that can be done is family therapy. This therapy will usually be more effective for teenagers. When a teenager has problems with self-control so he often takes impulsive actions. This will have an impact on the family.

    By undergoing therapy with the family. Each member will have room to convey problems or conditions that may have something to do with the impulsive actions experienced by one of the family members. The therapist can also listen in to provide an evaluation of the root of the problem and find a solution for it.

    3. Coping Mechanisms

    Coping mechanisms can be an alternative to overcome impulsive behavior. Breathing techniques can be applied when these behaviors start to appear. Breathing can also relieve stress which may be one of the triggers.

    Sinaumed’s can also redirect this behavior in a healthier direction. For example, instead of spending money on unnecessary things when stress comes. Sinaumed’s can turn it into sports, journaling, or sharing stories with trusted people.

    4. Home Workout

    Launching from the katadata.co.id page, in addition to psychotherapy and drugs. There are several steps you can take to reduce and overcome impulsivity. Sinaumed’s can try either strategy when symptoms or impulses of impulsive behavior are present as follows.

    • Perform a chain analysis that allows Sinaumed’s to identify impulsive behavior, what happened before and after the impulsive behavior.
    • Join a support group that can help Sinaumed’s manage his impulsive behavior and allow him to talk or share stories with people who have the disorder.
    • Replace impulsive behavior with something healthy, like journaling, talking to someone you trust, going for a walk, and so on.
    • Performing proper breathing techniques or deep breathing can manage stress which can help regulate mood and reduce impulsive behavior. This method can also help distract Sinaumed’s when impulsive impulses start to come.

    Impulsive behavior is one of the problems in social psychology. To understand more about applied psychology in the social field, Sinaumed’s can read the book “Applied Social Psychology” by Fattah Hanurawan.

    In general, the book contains the results of analysis, reflection, and descriptions of various scientific references related to: the application of social psychology in the context of solving social behavior problems. This book is intended for the community of social psychology, social sciences, observers of social behavior problems, and practitioners of solving social behavior problems.

    Difference between Impulsive and Compulsive Behavior

    Impulsive and compulsive behavior are similar. However, they have a thin thread of distinction. Sinaumed’s can observe the difference between impulsive and compulsive behavior which has been summarized from the following primayahospital.com page.

    1. Impulsive Behavior

    Impulsive behavior is behavior that is quick to act suddenly according to impulse. So, if someone’s behavior suddenly changes, outside of the plan, or an attitude that is not supported by strong reasons.

    In general, his attitude belongs to the irrational. Thus, it can be concluded that the individual is an impulsive person. Impulsive personal characteristics are when talking is often not accompanied by reasons or logical reasoning.

    2. Compulsive Behavior

    Compulsive behavior is an anxiety disorder ( anxiety ) in which the mind is dominated or filled with persistent and uncontrollable thoughts. Thus, making the individual forced to continuously repeat certain actions that cause significant distress and have the potential to interfere with daily functioning.

    A psychologist, Dani states that a person can perform an extraordinary high repetition of an action, physical or mental. This is what causes the person to experience obsessive compulsive disorder ( obsessive compulsive disorder ).

    For example, a person may have a compulsion to wash their hands or check the locks over and over again. It is also characterized by a person’s anxiety to do something and is impulsive. Which when doing these things will make her anxiety less. This disorder can occur in any gender.

  • What is Imagery in Poetry? And Examples of Poetry Imagery

    What is Imagery in Poetry? – Poetry is known as a literary work that has beautiful language. In the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), poetry is a literary variety whose language is bound by rhythm, dimension, rhyme, as well as the arrangement of lines and stanzas; compositions in language whose forms are chosen and arranged carefully so as to sharpen people’s awareness of life experiences and evoke specific responses through the arrangement of sounds, rhythms and special meanings; rhyme.

    Etymologically, the word “poetry” in Greek comes from the word “poesis” which means creation. In English, the equivalent of the word poetry is poetry which is closely related to poet and poem. The word poet comes from the Greek which means to make or create.

    The word poet in Greek is also interpreted as a person who creates through his imagination, a person who is almost like a god or who is very fond of the gods. He was a man of keen eyesight, a saint, who was at once a philosopher, a statesman, a teacher, a man who could guess hidden truths.

    Frost expressed his opinion regarding poetry as “Poetry is a rhythmical composition of words expressing an attitude designed to surprise and delight, and to arouse an emotional response”.

    In tune with Frost, Sayuti also shared her views on poetry. In Sayuti’s view, poetry is formulated as a form of language pronunciation that takes into account the sound aspects in it, which expresses the poet’s imaginative, emotional, and intellectual experience drawn from his individual and social life; which is expressed with certain chosen techniques, so that the poem is able to evoke certain experiences in the reader or listeners

    Poetry can be studied from various sides, such as the use of diction, figures of speech, imagery, and so on. From several things that can be studied in poetry, imagery may sound foreign. Sinaumed’s may wonder. “What is imagery in poetry?” The following will discuss in detail the imagery of poetry which has been summarized from various pages on the internet and journal articles.

    The Concept of Imagery in Poetry

    Imagery is a poetic instrument used by writers on words, phrases or sentences expressed in poetry in order to create visual images or images of feelings that can be felt by the reader. Simply put, imagery is used to build strong images of the feelings and thoughts of the reader.

    Imagery is a fantasy image created by the poet. According to Waluyo, imagery is an arrangement of words that express sensory experiences, such as sight, hearing, and feeling. Imagery is characterized by the use of specific and concrete words.

    Launching from the Tripven.com page, the imagery of poetry is usually expressed by means of imaginative descriptions expressed through words. Often times, to create an image in poetry, the writer will convey it with two main ideas, namely depiction or metaphor.

    Kinds of Imagery in Poetry

    Launching from the Tripven.com page, the following is a classification of poetry imagery.

    1. Auditory Imagery

    Auditory imagery is used so that the reader can feel something related to sound on the sense of hearing. For example, to create a booming sound, silence, breaking, and so forth. For example, in the poem “Old Beggar Moans” by Abdul Maliki” in the first line “Brakk … Instantly the beggar fell”.

    2. Olfactory imagery

    Smell is used to stimulate the reader’s sense of smell. So, as if the reader can smell the smell described in a work. This image tends to be difficult to express because the effect of smell is a very subjective experience. For example, the image of smell in the poem entitled “Give Daku Sumba” by Taufik Ismail.

    3. Tactile Imagery

    In the image of touch, it makes the reader feel as if he can feel something. This imagery is similar to motion imagery because the reader can feel what is expressed in the poem. In this type of imagery, the writer is advised to choose diction that can make the reader feel smooth, rough, and soft. As in the poem entitled “To My Mother I Miss” by Abdul Maliki.

    4. Motion Imagery ( Kinestetic )

    Motion imagery provides a stimulus in the form of movement from an entity that can be in the form of a human or a machine. This imagery is usually used to indicate an intention of a movement. Even though the entity is not moving, the reader can feel the movement in the image. For example, the poem “Pendaki Api Merapi” by Abdul Malik.

    5. Vision Imagery ( Visual Imagery )

    In this image, poetry is made as if the reader can describe and see what the author inserts in the poem. This type of imagery most often appears in poetic works. This imagery was chosen because almost all readers can imagine something. For example, a poem entitled “My Melatiku” by Abdul Malik.

    6. Taste Imagery ( Gustatory )

    Taste imagery is used by the author in his work to provide a descriptive stimulus regarding the sense of taste. The implementation of this imagery can be done by writing poetry that is directly related to the taste in tasting, especially the taste of food.

    Through the image of the taste buds, the reader will be brought to the flavors that can be imagined on the taste buds, such as sweet, spicy, salty and savory. An example of a poetic work that fits this image is a poem entitled “Secupir Kopi and Memories” by Abdul Malik.

    Example of Poetry Imagery Analysis

    Rahimah in a journal article entitled Citraan in the Poetry “Love Letter” by WS. Rendra analyzes poetry from its imagery. Following are the results of the analysis conducted by Rahimah on the poem “Love Letter” by WS. Rendra.

    Love letter

    By Ws. Rendra

     

    I’m writing this letter

    When it rains it drizzles

    Like the sound of a toy drum

    Fairy children of the magical world.

    And the wind sighs moans and sighs.

    O sister Narti,

    I love you!

     

    I’m writing this letter

    when the sky cries

    and two ducks

    make love in the pool

    like two naughty children

    witty and sweet

    wagging tail

    and flutters its feathers.

    Dear Dik Narti,

    I want you to be my wife!

     

    Pointed rain legs

    touch the ends of the earth.

    Firm legs of love

    like glittering heavy metal

    go forward

    and will never be postponed.

     

    A dozen angels

    has come down

    in the drizzling rain.

    In front of the window pane

    they look in the mirror and wash their hair

    for the party.

    Dear Dik Narti,

    in an elegant wedding dress

    flowers and sacred keris

    I want to lead you to the altar

    to be married.

     

    I propose to you.

    You know long ago:

     

    nothing worse

    and nothing better

    than others….

    poets of everyday life,

    people who start with words

    word that comes from

    life, thought and feeling.

     

    Strong spirit of life

    like millions of alit needles

    piercing the skin of the sky:

    pockets of fortune and wingit blessings.

    Then spill the drizzle.

    Wind and love

    sighed in the drizzle.

    My strong love spirit

    like a thousand magical hands

    spreading a thousand nets

    ambush your heart

    who always smiles at me.

    You are a mermaid

    my captive.

    Mermaid with soft melodious voice

    like a sea breeze,

    sigh for me!

    The wind sighed

    always sigh

    with her melodious wail.

    You are a mermaid

    limp

    blinking her beautiful eyes

    in my net.

    O Mermaids,

    i caught you

    I propose to you.

     

    I’m writing this letter

    when it rains

    because of the sky

    spoiled and sweet girl

    crying for toys

    Two naughty boys frolic in a ditch

    and the sky is jealous to see it.

    Dear Dik Narti,

    i want you

    be the mother of my children!

    The following is an analysis of the poem “Love Letter” by WS. Rendra is seen from five types of images, namely visual, auditory, tasting, moving, and feeling images. First, the visual imagery in the poem “Love Letter” by WS Rendra can be seen in the poem:

    • Verse I: I write this letter when it rains.
    • Verse II: I write this letter when the sky cries and two grouse make love in a pond; wags its tail and vibrates its feathers.
    • Verse III: the firm legs of love like heavy metal glisten forward and will never be put back.
    • Verse IV: in front of the windowpane they look in the mirror and wash their hair for the feast; with a beautiful wedding dress of flowers and an apocalypse dagger I want to lead you to the altar to be married.
    • Verse VI: a bag of fortune and wingit’s blessing then spills the drizzle.
    • Verse VII: you are a mermaid lying limply blinking her beautiful eyes in my net g. Verse VIII: I am writing this letter when it is drizzling because the sky is a spoiled and sweet girl crying for toys; frolicking in the ditch and the sky was jealous of him.

    Second, the image of hearing in the poem “Love Letter” by WS Rendra can be seen in the poem.

    • Verse I: like the sound of a drum played by children of the faeries of the unseen world; and the wind sighs moans and sighs.
    • Verse VI: the wind and love sigh in the drizzle.
    • stanza VII: a mermaid with a soft melodious voice like the sea breeze sighs to me; the wind moans, always moans with its melodically tears.

    Third, the image of taste in the poem “Love Letter” by WS Rendra can be seen in verse II of the poem: like two naughty children, witty and sweet.

    Fourth, the image of motion in the poem “Love Letter” by WS Rendra is found in poetry.

    • stanza III: sharp raindrops touching the earth.
    • Verse IV: a dozen angels have descended in a drizzling rain.

    Fifth, the image of feelings in the poem “Love Letter” by WS Rendra is found in poetry.

    • Verse I: O sister Narti I love you.
    • Verse II: O sister Narti I’m pinang you to be my wife!
    • Verse V: I propose to you, you know from the past that nothing is worse and nothing is better and the other.
    • Verse VI: the spirit of life is strong like millions of tiny needles piercing the skin of the sky; my strong spirit of love is like a thousand invisible hands spreading a thousand nets to ambush your heart which always smiles at me; oh, mermaid I netted you I proposed you; O, Dik Narti, I want you to be the mother of my children!

    Poetry Analysis with Roman Ingarden’s Norma Approach

    Poetry can be analyzed with various opinions or approaches. One of them is the analysis of poetry using the Roman Ingarde Norma approach. Here’s a more detailed explanation.

    The elements of Roman Ingarden’s Norma approach are as follows.

    a. Sound Layer

    The poem is in the form of sound units: the sounds of syllables, words, and sequences make up the whole sound of the poem which is the sound of phrases and sentences. With the sound units, people catch the meaning. The thing that is still closely related to sound speech is rhyme. Repeated sounds, regular alternations, and sound variations create a lively movement. Or the alternation of ups and downs, short lengths, loud and soft utterances of language sounds on a regular basis. So the sound layers in the poem are all sound units based on certain language conventions. As for the various kinds of sound that we can know, among others.

    1. Variety of Cacophony Sounds ( Cacophony )

    This cacophony sound is suitable and able to strengthen an unpleasant, chaotic, completely disorganized, even disgusting atmosphere. This variety of sounds can be used to create an atmosphere of depression, alienation, sadness, serenity, gloom, emotion and sadness. Visually, this variety of sounds uses a lot of consonants k, p, t, s (Pradopo, (in Hanafi, 2017:161)).

    2. Variety of Ephonic Sounds ( euphony )

    Ephony ( euphony ) is a combination of melodious sounds or beautiful sounds. This melodious sound orchestration is usually to describe intimate feelings, affection or love, as well as joyous things. Examples of euphony include a combination of vowel sounds a, e, i, u, o with voiced consonant sounds like b, d, g, j and liquida sounds like r and l, as well as nasal sounds m, n, nya and ng (Pradopo, (in Hanafi, 2017: 161)).

    3. Onomatopoeic Sounds

    Onomatopoeic sounds are referred to as a variety of sounds in the form of imitation of sounds that exist in the universe, such as the sound of wind, sea, trees, animals, and so on in the form of markers (Suryaman dala Wiyatmi (in Hanafi, 2017: 161))

    b. Lapis Arti ( Units of Meaning )

    The meaning layer is a series of phonemes, syllables, words, phrases, and sentences. These are all units of meaning. The series of sentences becomes paragraphs, chapters, and the whole story or the whole poem (Pradopo, 2012:15). In poetry it is not enough if only the meaning is stated. What the poet wants is that whoever reads can also feel and experience what the poet feels and experiences (Pradopo, (in Hanafi, 2017: 161-162))c

    c. Layer Things That Are Presented

    The layers of things put forward are the objects put forward, the setting, the actors, and the author’s world (Pradopo, (in Hanafi, 2017:162)). The setting, which is also referred to as the fulcrum, suggests the notion of place, time relationships and the social environment in which the events told occur (Abrams (in Hanafi, 2017: 162)).

    d. World Layer

    The world layer is a layer that is seen from a certain point of view that does not need to be disclosed, but is contained within. An event in literature can be stated or stated as “heard” or “seen”, even the same event, for example the sound of a door window, can show an external aspect or an inner character. For example, a door with a soft sound can give suggestions that open or close a woman or a person with a cautious character (Pradopo (in Hanafi, 2017:162)).

    e. Metaphysics Layer

    The metaphysical layer is in the form of metaphysical properties which are sublime, tragic, horrific or frightening and sacred with these characteristics art can give reflections to the reader. At this layer the reader is invited to reflect and think or imagine what is contained in the poem being read. The purpose of imagination is so that the reader or listener is able to understand and truly understand the meaning of the poem. However, not every literary work contains such a metaphysical layer (Pradopo (in Hanafi, 2017: 162)).

  • What is IELTS and Other Important Information You Must Know

    What is IELTS? – English is an international language used in many countries. Therefore, if you can speak English properly and correctly, various opportunities are wide open. Whether to get scholarships to study abroad, or work there.

    There are also many countries that open opportunities for foreigners to develop careers in their countries. One of the requirements for obtaining it all is having an IELTS test score. What is IELTS? This test is a kind of key to get a chance to get there. Here are some important things you should know if you want to take the test.

    A. What is IELTS?

    This test is generally administered by three organizations, namely Cambridge English Language Assessment, IDP: IELTS Australia, and the British Council. This test as well as the TOEFL test are the main English proficiency tests in the world. Out of 140 countries, there are currently nearly 1,000 test centers. This is because this test is already available and recognized by many countries.

    If you want to continue your studies at universities abroad, then you need this test requirement to be accepted there. There are four sections in the IELTS test, namely Reading, Listening, Speaking and Writing.

    To work on all sections of the test, the time given is 2 hours 45 minutes. Then for each section, the time allotted varies, for listening for 30 minutes, reading for 60 minutes, writing for 60 minutes, and speaking for 11-14 minutes.

    Then, the reading, writing, and listening sections will be carried out on the same day without rest. While speaking can be done on the same day or seven days before or after the test is carried out.

    For the value itself it ranges from 1-9 with a difference of 0.5 (for example the value is 7.0 , 7.5, 8.0 , 8.5, etc.). Each value in each part will be averaged to get the overall score. Because each section has the same weight or to be calculated or the overall score, the average value of the four test components will be taken.

    But you also need to know that each university or college will usually ask for grades for certain sections, so not the overall recap value. If a college requires a score of 7 for writing, if your score in the writing section is 6.5, you still don’t qualify, even if your overall score is 7.5. Then you have to repeat the test if you want to meet the entry requirements of the college you want to go to.

    B. Benefits of Taking the IELTS Test

    Through this test, you also simultaneously prepare yourself and practice your speaking skills in a foreign language. So when accepted later, will not experience difficulties. What’s more, all learning is of course also carried out using English instruction.

    If your goal is to work outside, of course this also makes it easier to negotiate and establish cooperation with various parties. Especially if you work abroad, the salary offered will be higher. What are the other benefits of this test? here’s the list:

    1. Not a computer test

    The IELTS test is different from the TOEFL test. In the speaking test section, you will be immediately confronted with a native speaker. Therefore, the possibility of errors is much smaller.

    2. Can be used for overseas exchange programs

    The second benefit, you can use it as capital exchange abroad. When you are in college, usually there will be a student exchange program from PTs in the country with foreign PTs. There are also exchange programs that require IELTS test results, such as YES, SSEAYP, and IYEP.

    3. Making communication more fluent with foreigners

    In addition, if you have passed this test, of course it will be easier for you to communicate with native speakers. Because various parts of the test will test your English proficiency. If you pass the test with good results, it means that you have mastered English well.

    4. Open opportunities to work in international companies

    Some international companies certainly require their employees to be fluent in foreign languages. So, if you have obtained the results of the IELTS test, of course there will be a chance to be accepted to work there.

    5. Test results have been recognized by 6000 organizations in the world

    There are many countries that recognize IELTS test results. These countries include Australia, Hong Kong, Ireland, the United States, South Africa and New Zealand.

    And there are many other countries that recognize the results of this test. More and more institutions/organizations/companies are using this test as a requirement for membership, meaning that you have many opportunities to be able to travel or have a career anywhere.

    6. As initial capital to obtain a scholarship

    If you have a high IELTS score, there will be many scholarships you can get. Currently there are lots of scholarships to study abroad. Of course, the scholarship requires that each recipient can communicate in English.

    So, if you have mastered the IELTS test, of course prestigious scholarships abroad are easier to get. Then, if you want to study in Europe, this test is also very important. In Europe, there are also many prestigious campuses that can accept you, such as Cambridge, Oxford, ICL, Zurich, UCL, and other campuses.

    7. Fewer reading sections and faster speaking

    There are not too many reading sections on the IELTS test, apart from that the questions are also more specific. Usually there are only 3 short readings. Then the total time for listening is also not too long, which is around 40 minutes. That way, test takers will be much more comfortable, focused, and also maximal in doing the test.

    D. Steps to Prepare for the IELTS Test

    If you want to get a high score, of course you need to prepare well for the test. The following are some things that need to be done to prepare for the IELTS test.

    1. Determine the type of test to be followed

    IELTS has two types of tests, namely the academic test and the general test. The two are not the same, the general test is for those of you who take the test because you want to work, while the academic test is for those of you who wish to continue their studies abroad. So the academic test is more devoted to the field of education.

    Both types are indeed the same IELTS test. However, for some people, the general test is considered easier and simpler than the academic test. Even so, that doesn’t mean you can make the general test easy.

    If you want to take both tests, you still have to study seriously together as preparation. However, you can just focus on studying in fields that are required by the institution, organization or company you want to enter. That way, the results of the IELTS test that you take will be as you expect.

    2. Improve your ability to speak English

    The second step is to improve your ability to speak English. If you are still a student, of course the English lessons you get at school are still very minimal. Moreover, to be able to work on standard IELTS questions. This means that you need additional English tutoring to broaden your knowledge of English.

    You can call a private teacher or take tutoring at a certain institution. There are lots of institutions that now provide qualified places to learn English. So, make sure you get a good tutor to help improve your English skills.

    3. Study reading and listening material

    Two aspects of the IELTS test, namely reading and listening certainly require good English skills. Both of these tests include passive English proficiency. The problem may not be the same as the TOEFL ITP test which is commonly used in Indonesia. Therefore, this test has a much higher level of questions.

    So you need to study reading and listening material even deeper. Then because this test is used to register to England and its surroundings, the language used is usually British English. So try to read a lot of British English writing, so that you will be more familiar when taking the test later.

    4. Practice your writing and speaking skills

    The two sections of the IELTS test are even more challenging, namely writing and speaking. Both of these tests are included in active English proficiency.

    So, instead of being asked to do questions, you will be asked to speak and write more in English. In fact, when speaking or writing, it means you have to be prepared with more English vocabulary.

    You also have to be able to make flexible sentences and master what topics you want to write or talk about. So, to prepare for this part of the test, practice speaking English a lot and increase your vocabulary.

    Apart from that, you also need to practice writing on various topics using English, so that the vocabulary you master will also be much larger. In essence, each part of the test requires different preparation. That way, you also need to divide the time to prepare it all.

    E. Other Important Matters Regarding the IELTS Test

    For example, if you want to get a PhD, you must be able to write a research proposal and statement of purpose in English. So, both of these writings must be written according to a special language style (academic writing) which can be learned through the IELTS test.

    In addition, when taking care of administration or preparing many things, of course you will come into contact with many people using English. Especially if you want to do an interview with a supervisor, of course you have to be proficient in speaking. What’s more, because in a formal academic setting, in writing or speaking, you have to use formal language.

    So, learning to prepare for the IELTS test is not only useful for getting a high score, but will also expedite all your needs when dealing with administration abroad. So, therefore, it is important for you to know more information regarding the IELTS test. Check out the following points for more information.

    1. Where can the IELTS test be taken? 

    In Indonesia, there are several institutions that administer the IELTS test, including IDP, British Council, and IALF. All of these institutions are spread throughout Indonesia and provide places to carry out the IELTS test. Some cities that you can go to to do the test are, Jakarta, Bandung, Batam, Bogor, Denpasar, Depok, Jayapura, Kupang, Makassar, Malang, Medan, Palembang, Pekanbaru, Pare, Semarang, Solo, Surabaya, Yogyakarta and Tangerang. If you want to know the exact location of the test in each region and which institution administers it, please find further information from other sources.

    2. What is the target score that must be achieved to get a scholarship? 

    If you want to apply to a university abroad, there are IELTS score requirements that must be considered. Several prestigious and advanced campuses there will usually determine the minimum score for the proposed test. Quoted from several scholarship requirements, here is the IELTS score you need as a scholarship requirement:

    • LPDP scholarships abroad require an IELTS score of 6.5
    • domestic LPDP scholarships require an IELTS score of 6.0
    • fulbright scholarships require an IELTS score of 6.0
    • Chevening scholarships require an IELTS score of 6.5

    3. How much does the IELTS test cost? 

    The cost of the IELTS test is indeed more expensive when compared to the TOEFL test. The cost is around US$195 to US$220. If converted to rupiah, it can reach 2,800,000 to 3,000,000. The IELTS test certificate is valid for 2 years. Well, because this test is expensive, so prepare well before doing the test.

    4. Is it true that only England accepts this test?

    There are many countries that use the IELTS test as a condition for registering or entering universities or companies. IELTS is recognized by around 11,000 institutions in 140 countries, such as UK, Australia, USA, New Zealand, Canada, and so on. Whether for study or work purposes, this test is recognized in all of these countries. So, this test is an ideal test to get a career abroad.

    So, those were some answers to the question what is IELTS that you must understand. There are many preparations that need to be made so that the resulting score is maximized. Apart from that, you also need to pay attention to the score required to enter or work at the desired institution.

    This is also very important so that you can focus more on pursuing the required target score. Because getting a test certificate is also not cheap, so careful preparation is highly recommended. To maximize your preparation, read sinaumedia’s book entitled IELTS Tips and Strategies, get it via the www.sinaumedia.com link .

    • Examples of Announcement Text, Formulas & Practice Questions
    • Animal names in English with pictures
    • Hours in English with examples and how to read them
    • Names of Days, Months, Years in English Complete with their Meanings
    • Definition, Examples, & Structure of Review Text